SEM 4 2016 17 Complete PDF

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, BIHAR
Scheme of Teaching and Examinations for

IVTH SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING
(Effective from Session 2016-17 Batch)
THEORY
Sr. SUBJECTS SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION – SCHEME Credits
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours Teacher's Class End Semester Total Pass Pass Marks
Week of Assessment Test(CT) Exam. (ESE) Marks Marks in the
Exam. (TA) Marks Marks Marks (A+B+C) ESE Subject
(A) (B) (C)
1. Soil Science & Soil

1611401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Mechanics
2.
Machine Drawing 1611402 06 04 10 20 70 100 28 40 05
3. Hydraulics & Fluid

1611403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Mechanics
4.
Farm Power & tractor 1611404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Workshop
1611405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Technology
Total:- 18 350 500
PRACTICAL
Sr. SUBJECTS SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION – SCHEME
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours Practical (ESE) Total Pass Marks Credits
Week of Marks in the
Exam. Internal (A) External (B) (A+B) Subject
6.
Farm Power & Tractor Lab 1611406 04 04 15 35 50 20 02
7.
Workshop Technology Lab 1611407 04 04 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 08 100
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Pass Marks in
Credits
week Internal External Marks the Subject
Examiner Examiner (X+Y)
(X) (Y)
8. Machine Drawing
1611408 03 15 35 50 20 01
9. Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics

(TW) 1611409 02 15 35 50 20 01
10. Soil Science & Soil Mechanics

(TW) 1611410 02 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 07 150
Total Periods per week Each of duration one Hours = 33 Total Marks = 750 24
SOIL SCIENCE AND SOIL MECHANICS
Theory No of Period in one session : 42 Credits

No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 100
Subject Code L T P/S ESE : 70
1611401 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Soil serves as the natural media for plant growth. The maintenance of Soil fertility is essential to cater the food needs
for ever increasing population. It is essential for a diploma student to know about the modern scientific knowledge about physical
and chemical properties of soil.
Objective:
The course is designed with following objectives:
- to know about soil and soil formation
- to know about physical properties of soil
- to know about soil constituents
- to know about problem soils and principles of their management
- to develop knowledge about engineering properties of soil
Contents : Theory Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 SOIL AND SOIL FORMATION: [04] [06]
01.01 Rocks
01.02 Weathering of rocks
01.02.01 Physical weathering
01.02.02 Chemical weathering
01.02.03 Biological weathering
Unit -2 SOIL CONSTITUENTS: [04] [06]
02.01 Components of soil
02.01.01 Mineral matter
02.01.02 Organic matter
02.01.03 Soil water
02.01.04 Soil air
Unit -3 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SOIL: [07] [10]
03.01 Soil texture
03.01.01 Soil texture in relation to soil classification
03.01.02 Effects of soil texture on crop production
03.02 Soil structure
03.02.01 Factors affecting soil structure
03.02.02 Type of soil structure
03.02.03 Effects of soil structure on other physical properties of soil.
03.03 Soil temperature
03.03.01 Importance of soil temperature
03.03.02Factors affecting soil temperature
03.03.03Control of soil temperature
03.04 Soil porosity
03.04.01 Factor affecting soil porosity
03.04.02Importance of pore-space in Agriculture
03.05 Soil color
03.05.01 Colour producing compounds in soil
03.05.02 Importance of soil color in agriculture
03.06 Soil density
Unit -4 SOIL MICRO ORGANISM: [03] [06]
04.01 Classification of soil micro organism
04.02 Beneficial function of soil micro organism
04.03 Harmful effect of soil microorganism
Unit -5 ESSENTIAL PLANT NUTRIENTS: [04] [06]
05.01 Classification of nutrients
05.02 Role of nutrients
05.03 Deficiency symptoms of nutrients
05.04 Forms in which nutrients are taken by plants
05.05 Sources of plant nutrients in the soil
Unit -6 PROBLEM SOILS: [05] [08]
06.01 Acid soils and their management
06.02 Saline soils and their management
06.03 Alkali soils and their management
Unit -7 BASIC DEFINITIONS: [03] [04]
07.01 Soil mass
07.02 Water content
07.03 Density or unit weight of soil solids
07.04 Specific gravity
07.05 Void ratio
07.06 Porosity
07.07 Degree of saturation
Unit -8 GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION: [02] [04]
08.01 Sieve analysis
08.02 Stock’s law and hydrometer analysis (Basic concept only)
Unit -9 ATTERBURG’S LIMITS: [02] [04]

09.01 Types of Atterburg’s limits
09.01.01 Methods of Determination of liquid limit
09.01.02 Methods of determination of plastic limit
Unit -10 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS: [02] [04]
10.01 Descriptive idea Grain size classification and Indian standard soil
classification
Unit -11 SOIL PERMEABILITY: [02] [04]
11.01 Darcy’s law
11.02 Constant head permeo meter
11.03 Variable head permeo meter
Unit -12 SOIL COMPACTION: [02] [04]
12.01 Difference between compaction and consolidation
12.02 Factor affecting the soil compaction
12.03 Methods of soil compaction used in field by static and vibrating rollers
Unit -13 BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL: [02] [04]

13.01 Factors affecting the bearing capacity of soil
13.02 Methods of determining bearing capacity of soil
13.03 Determination of bearing capacity by load test
Total 42 70
Reference books :-
1 Soil Mechanics and Foundation - B.C. Punania Standard book house, New Delhi.
Soil Mechanics and Foundation
2 - Bhagirath Lal Gupta Standard publishers Distributors, Delhi-6
Engineering
3 Nature and Properties of Soil - N.C. Brady S. Chand & Company Ltd, New Delhi.
T.D. Biswas & S.K. Mukherjee Tata McGraw Hill publishing company
4 Text Book of Soil Science -
Ltd.
MACHINE DRAWING
Subject Code Theory No of Period in one session : 84 Credits
1611402 No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 100
L T P/S ESE : 70
05
06 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Drawing is the language of engineers. Without the knowledge and skill of drawing an Agricultural Engineering
Diploma Holder becomes handicapped in understanding the problems right from design state of machine components to the
production.
This subject will develop the understanding of drawing, representation of machine parts. The subject will help a
technician in understanding the functioning of different machine, which will help in maintenance, dismantling and assembly
of machines used in agricultural farms, food processing, production process etc. This subject will develop the skill of
communication through drawing which in turn will develop confidence.
Objective:
The students will be able to:
- Understand screw threads and its characteristics representation
- Understand the fastening types and its representation
- Understand the different types of joints used and its representation can get the ability to understand the different
types of power coupling used in farm machinery and its representation
- Can develop the ability to represent the agricultural machine parts, machining components by free hand sketch
- Develop overall drawing and drafting skill in practical fields.

Unit -1 Orthographic Projection. [ 03 ] [02]
Unit -2 Method of projection, 1st angle and 3rd angle projection. [ 05 ] [04]
Unit -3 Orthographic projection of simple models and from given isometric drawing
of simple blocks and machine parts.
[ 08 ] [06]
Unit -4 Isometric drawing. [ 08 ] [06]
Unit -5 Introduction of pictorial, drawing, construction of isometric scale, its use in
isometric drawing.
[ 08 ] [06]
Unit -6 Isometric drawing of simple blocks and m/c parts. [ 08 ] [06]
Unit -7 Conventions used in Machine Drawing. [ 06 ] [04]
Unit -8 Conventional representation of common features in mechanical drawing like screw
threads, rolled sections bearings tension spring, gear and pinion as per IS:696
[ 06 ] [04]
Unit -9 Conventional method of representation of full sectional and half sectional views of
m/c parts as per IS:696
[ 06 ] [06]
Unit -10 Free hand sketches of bolt and nuts. Locking devices, studs, rivet-heads, keys cottess
and simple machine part.
[ 06 ] [06]
Unit -11 Different joints like union joints, expansion joint, bush bearings. [ 06 ] [06]
Unit -12 Loose and fast, pulley & agricultural implements. [ 06 ] [06]
Unit -13 Dimensional and sectional drawing of bearing – pedestal bearing, plummer block,
foot step bearing. Machine parts – cotter joint, knuckle joint
[ 08 ] [08]
Total 84 70
Books Recommended:
1. Machine Drawing - N.D. Bhatt
2. Machine Drawing - Parkinson
3. Machine Drawing - R.B. Gupta
4. Machine Drawing - Mittal & Agarwal
5. A Text Book of Engineering Drawing - R.K. Dhawan
6. Practical Agricultural Engineering - R.K. Ghosh and S. Swain
HYDRAULICS & FLUID MECHANICS
1611403 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale and Objective:
A Diploma student of Agricultural Engineering has to perform his job related to fetch water in the field by
different types. The knowledge of fluid characteristics and its related parameter is must for the students.
This course of Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics is designed to cover the fluid properties, fluid statics and
dynamics, its flow characteristics in closed condute and open channel with weirs and various aspect that are useful
in project planning & execution work.
The curriculum has been divided into the following topics:
PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS:
Density, Specific Weight, Specific Volume, Specific Gravity, Viscosity, Dynamic
Unit -1 Viscosity, Kinematic Viscosity, Cohesion, Adhesion, Surface Tension, Capillarity,
[03] [03]
thermodynamic properties.
MEASUREMENT OF PRESSURE:
Pressure, Pascal’s Law of Fluid Pressure at a point, Pressure head, Transmissibility
of liquid pressure, Bramah’s process OR Hydraulic press, Atmospheric pressure,
Negative pressure OR vacuum pressure, pressure gauge and manometers, the
Unit -2
barometer, the one reid barometer, the siphon barometer, the piezo meter-U- tube [04] [08]
OR Double column manometer, Inverted U-tube manometer, Measurement of
Suction pressure OR Negative pressure, Sensitive manometers, Single column,
Inclined tube manometer, the bourdon gauge, the diaphram pressure gauge, Micro
manometer.
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE ON SURFACES:
Total pressure on a lamina immersed in a liquid, center of pressure, the hydrostatic
Unit -3
paradox, pressure force on vertical and inclined laminae, pressure on curved [03] [05]
surfaces, pressure on lock gates, pressures on a masonry dam, stability of dam,
minimum bottom with required for a dam.
BUOYANCY AND FLOATATION:
Unit -4 Buoyancy, Archimedes principle, Centre of buoyancy, body immersed in two
different fluids, Meta Centre, Metacentric height, stable, unstable and neutral [03] [05]
equilibrium.
HYDROKINEMATICS:
Introduction, method of describing fluid motion, streamline, pathline, streak line,
Unit -5 stream tube, potential line, types of flow, laminar & turbulent, steady & unsteady
flow, uniform and non-uniform flow, rotational and irrotational flow, various types [04] [05]
of fluid movements. Reynolds number, Froud number and webber number. Equation
of continuity for one-dimensional steady flow.
DYNAMICS OF FLUID FLOW:
Energy possessed by fluid body potential energy and potential head, pressure energy
and pressure head, kinetic energy and kinetic head, the energy equation, Bernoulli’s
Unit -6
theorem, Euler’s equation of motion, Inter conversion of potential pressure and [03] [08]
kinetic heads, kinetic energy correction factor, momentum equation, rate of change
of momentum, central volume, the venturimeter, the venturi head, pitot tube, orifice
plate or orifice metre, the flow nozzle.
ORIFICES AND MOUTH PIECES:
Orifices, small and large orifices, circular & rectangular orifices, sharp edge and bell
Unit -7 mouthed orifices, Vena contracta, coefficient of orifices, coefficient of contraction,
coefficient of velocity and coefficient of discharge, submerged orifice, large orifice,
[03] [08]
loss of head due to sudden enlargement, loss of head due to sudden contraction,
mouth piece, convergent, divergent mouth piece.
NOTCHES & WEIRS:
Difference between notch and weir, Nappe or vein, crest or sill of a notch,
Unit -8 classification of weirs, rectangular weir, triangular weir, trape zanidal weir, weir
with end contraction.
[03] [05]
Submerged weir – Anicut raised weir, barrage, broad crested weir, ogee weir,
cipolleti weir.
FLOW THROUGH PIPES:
Unit -9 Laws of fluid friction, loss of head due to pipe friction, Darcy-Weir back formula,
Hydraulic gradient, Total energy line, pipes in series, pipes in parallel, Dupuits
[06] [08]
equation, loss of head in tapering pipe with nozzle.
FLOW THROUGH OPEN CHANNELS:
Types of channels: Rectangular, trapezoidal and circular channels; Opened covered
channels, steady and unsteady flow in a channel. Chezy’s formula, Kuttur’s formula,
Unit -10
Manning formula, Hydraulic mean depth or radius, Most efficient section, Specific [06] [08]
energy head, Critical depth, critical velocity, Hydraulic jump or standing wave.
Condition on which the hydraulic jump will occur. Back water curve, Channel with
mild, steep, critical slope.
PUMPS:
Pumps and its types, Centrifugal pump, method of converting the kinetic energy of
Unit -11 water leaving the impeller into pressure energy, the volute chamber, the vertex or the
whirlpool chamber, guide blades minimum speed to start the pump, loss of head due [04] [07]
to reduced or increased flow. Principles of similarity applied to centrifugal pumps.
Characteristics curves.
Working of Reciprocating pump, Single and double action reciprocating Total 42 70
Books Recommended:
1 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics - Dr. Jagdish Lal Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
S. Ramanruthan Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New Delhi –
2 Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Machines -
110 002
3 A Text Book of Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics - R.S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co., Ram Nagar, New Delhi
4 A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics - R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publication, New Delhi
5 Tube Well & Pumps - Dr. A.M. Michel Water Technology Centre, ICAR, New Delhi
6. Open Channel Flow - V.T. Chaw Mc Graw Hill Co.

FARM POWER AND TRACTOR
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1611404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale & Objective:
A Diploma holder technician in Agricultural Engineering must know the operations control, maintenance and
repairing idea of different sources of power used in Agricultural sector. For proper utilization of agricultural machinery,
processing equipments in agricultural FARM and FIRM with safety for stationary & mobile engines, this course is designed
with following contents:
- Idea of conventional animal, human, coal, fuel and non-conventional solar and wind power sources of energy
used in agricultural sector
- Scope of mechanization, its availability and suitability in Indian condition. Principle of operation of different engines
- Different Engines system
- Different engine components, different control devices repair, maintenance & safety devices of engines
- Power estimation and power losses
- Introduction of mobile engines and tractors
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION OF ENERGY SOURCES: [03] [04]
- Different sources of energy.
- Sources of Farm Power in conventional system with animal, human, fossil
fuel.
- Sources of Farm Power with non-conventional system like solar, wind and
biogas.
Unit -2 SCOPE OF MECHANIZATION IN INDIAN CONDITION FROM SUITABILITY [04] [04]
& AVAILABILITY POINT OF VIEW:
- Farm Mechanization, its advantages and disadvantages.
- Hurdles in farm mechanization in Indian condition with availability &
suitability of power sources.
Unit -3 PRINCIPLES AND COMPONENTS OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION [04] [06]
ENGINE:
- Principles of different cycles; auto cycle; Diesel cycle, theoretical and actual
cycles of engine working.
- Difference in Compression Ignition and Spark Ignition engines.
- Stationary and moving components of I.C. engine and its material of
construction.
Unit -4 TWO & FOUR STROKES CYCLE ENGINES: [04] [07]
- Principles and operation of two stroke cycles engines.
- Difference in two strokes and four strokes engine principles, power calculation.
Unit -5 VALVE SYSTEM AND VALVE TIMING: [03] [06]

- Arrangement of valves in engine
- Function of valves
- Valve timing and its diagram
- Valve clearances and its importance and adjustment of valve clearance.
Unit -6 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM: [03] [07]

- Petrol Supply System
- Diesel Supply System
- Properties of fuel
- Fuel filter and its working
Unit -7 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM: [03] [06]
- Fuel Injection Pump
- Methods of fuel injection pump
- Injector – Nozzel, construction and working.
Unit -8 LUBRICATING SYSTEM: [03] [06]
- Need of lubrication
- Properties of good lubricants
- Types of lubricants used
- Types of lubricating systems
Unit -9 COOLING SYSTEM: [03] [06]
- Need of cooling
- Air cooling
- Water cooling
- Thermo siphon and forced circulation cooling system
Unit -10 PRE AIR CLEANER & AIR CLEANER: [03] [04]
- Need of Pre Air Cleaner & Air Cleaner
- Types of Air Cleaners
- Their construction, working & maintenance
Unit -11 GOVERNING SYSTEM: [03] [04]

- Governing Hit and Miss System, throttle system, centrifugal pheunatic
governor.
- Governor hunting and governor regulation.
Unit -12 MOBILE ENGINE AND TRACTORS: [03] [06]

- Need of mobile engines
- Transmission & control of tractor systems
Unit -13 POWER TILLER AND ITS COMPONENTS: [03] [04]

- Walking type farm operation through power tiller.
- Different system of power tiller and its controlling units.
- Its advantages & disadvantages and suitability.
Total 42 70
Books Recommended:
1
Farm Gas Engines and Tractors - R. Jones Fred Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
2 A.M. Michel & T.P. Ojha
Principles of Agricultural Engineering, Vol. - I -
Jain Brothers, New Delhi
3
Practical Agricultural Engineering Vol. - I & II - Ghosh and Swain Naya Prakash 206, Bidhar Sarani, Kolkata
4 E.L. Barger, J.B. Liljedahl, W.M. Carleton, E.G. Mokibben
Tractors and Their Power Units -
Wiley Eastern Private Ltd., New Delhi
5
Farm Tractors Repair & Maintenance - S.C. Jain & C.M. Rai Standard Publisher Distributors, New Delhi
6
Tractor and Automobile - V. Redichev MIR Publication
7
Basic Automobile Engineering - C.P. Nokra Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New Delhi
8 Jagdiswar Sahay Agro Book Agency, New Area, Jakkanpur,
Elements of Agricultural Engineering, Vol. - I & II -
Patna – 1
WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
1611405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Workshop technology deals with different processes by which component of a machine or equipments are made,
objectives of Agricultural Engineering Diploma holders will have to deal with different types of machines and tractors, so they
are supposed to know different processes in workshop. keeping this in view, this subject has been included in the curriculum.

Unit -1 ENGINEERING MATERIAL:
01.01 Classification of materials
01.02 Properties of materials
01.03 Crystal structure, unit cell & space lattice, metallic, space lattice, effect
of grain size on properties of metals cooling curves for metals and
alloys. [08] [10]
01.04 Brief ideas about ferrous metals and alloys
01.05 Brief ideas about non-ferrous metals and their alloys
01.06 Miscellaneous materials e.g. plastic, glass, plywood, packing materials,
abrasive materials, belt materials, lubricating materials, their properties
and uses.
Unit -2 HEAT TREATMENT OF STEEL:
02.01 Definition, objectives, iron-carbon equilibrium diagram
02.02 Different Heat treatment processes [03] [10]
02.03 Defects due to heat treatment of steel
Unit -3 GENERAL PROCESSES:
03.01 Welding, definition, types of electrodes, fluxes welding defects, gas
cutting [04] [08]
03.02 Soldering, Definition, types of solder, soldering Iron
03.03 Brazing, definition, types of brazing, atals, fluxes
Unit -4 INTRODUCTION:
04.01 Introduction
04.02 Safety measures in workshop
04.03 Indian factory acts on safety [05] [08]
04.04 Different types of carpentry tools and processes
04.0 5 Brief ideas about Band saw etc, wooden lathe circular saw, wood
planner etc.
Unit -5 BLACKSMITHY SHOP:
05.01 Introduction
05.02 Different tools and their uses
05.03 Different forging operations [06] [06]
05.04 Defects of forging
05.05 Brief ideas about power hacksaw etc.
Unit -6 ESTIMATING & COSTING:
06.01 Introduction of Estimating & Costing [02] [06]
06.02 Elements & Cost
Unit -7 ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIME IN MACHINE SHOP:
07.01 Introduction length of cut, feed, depth of cut, RPM, cutting speed, time,
time allowances.
07.02 Estimation of machining time for different Lathe operations. [04] [08]
07.03 Estimation of machining time for shaping, slotting and planning
operations.
Unit -8 ESTIMATION IN WLEDING SHOP:
08.01 Introduction, types of welding, types of welding joints, edge
preparation, welding techniques. [06] [08]
08.02 Gas welding and gas cutting, arc welding, estimation of welding cost.
Unit -9 ESTIMATION OF SHEET METAL SHOP:
09.01 Introduction, different operations, sheet metal joints.
[04] [06]
09.02 Allowances for sheet metal, operations & joints, estimate of cost.
Total 42 70
Books Recommended:
1 Mechanical Estimates & Costing - S.C. Jain Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi – 6
2 Introduction to Estimating & Costing - GBS Narang and V. Kumar Khanna publishers, Delhi - 6
3 Mechanical Estimates and Costs - T.K. Bagga & S.C. Sharma Khanna publishers, Delhi – 6
4 Estimates & Cost - C.K. Singh & M.I. Khanna

FARM POWER AND TRACTOR LAB
Practical No of Period in one session : 50 Credits
1611406 02
— — 04 Internal : 15
External : 35
Rationale:
A Diploma holder in Agricultural Engineering student has to operate the different machinery with I.C. Engine
power source for stationary & moving process.
Objective:
The present practical course is designed to familiarise the different components of the I.C. engine as well as to
provide well practice over the different control units of the stationary and moving engine operation with safety.
At least Eight experiments to be done from the following list of experiments:
Contents : Practical Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 - Familiarisation with different engine parts viz. stationary, reciprocating and [ 04 ]
rotating.
Unit -2 - Study of two stroke and four stroke cycle engine. [ 04 ]
Unit -3 - Study of valves and valves arrangement. Determination of valve timing and [ 04 ]
firing orders of multi-cylinder engine
Unit -4 - Familiarization with carburettors adjustment and air supply system. [ 04 ]
Unit -5 - Diesel fuel supply system, injector adjustments and air bleeding [ 04 ]
Unit -6 - Study of cooling system in stationary engines and moving engines like tractor. [ 04 ]
Unit -7 - Study of lubricating system. [ 04 ]

Unit -8 - Study of operation of power tillers. [ 04 ]
Unit -9 - Familiarisation with different controls on the tractor and indicators with traffic [ 04 ]
signals.
Unit -10 - Tractor driving practice in different gears without implements. [ 06 ]
Unit -11 - Tractor driving practice, certain limited area in specified by Instructor viz. L- [ 04 ]
shape, S-shape, Circle, 8-shape etc.
Unit -12 - Study about periodic trouble shooting [ 04 ]
Total 50
Books Recommended:
1 Farm Gas Engines and tractors - R. Jones Fred Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
2 Principles of Agricultural Engineering, Vol. - I - A.M. Michel & T.P. Ojha Jain Brothers, New Delhi
3 Practical Agricultural Engineering Vol. - I & II - Ghosh and Swain Naya Prakash 206, Bidhan Sarani, Kolkata
4 Tractors and Their Power Units - E.L. Barger, J.B. Liljedahl, W.M. Carleton, E.G. Mokibben
Wiley Eastern Private Ltd., New Delhi
5 Farm Tractors Repair & Maintenance - S.C. Jain & C.M. Rai Standard Publisher Distributors,
New Delhi
6 Tractor and Automobile - V. Redichev MIR Publication
7 Basic Automobile Engineering - C.P. Nokra Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New Delhi
8 Elements of Agricultural Engineering, Vol. I & II - Jagdiswar Sahay Agro Book Agency, New Area, Jakkanpur,
Patna – 1
WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY LAB
1611407 02
External : 35
Unit -1 - Turning, Knurling, Facing, Drilling, Threading, Tapping, Boring on a job on [ 08 ]

lathe m/c.
Unit -2 - Step turning on lathe. [ 04 ]
Unit -3 - Working of different carpentry m/c e.g. band saw m/c, circular saw m/c, planner [ 08 ]
m/c and grinding, shaping m/c.
Unit -4 - Electric welding and gas welding, different joints, grill gate, garden chair, [ 10 ]
joining of two parts.
Unit -5 - Different operation in sheet metal shop, making of mug, Furmel, bucket, milk [ 10 ]
container, tray.
Unit -6 - Black Smithy shop – different operation, making of ring, khurpi, screwdriver. [ 05 ]
Unit -7 - Estimation of machining time in different lathe operation e.g. step turning, [ 05 ]
facing, chamfering, knurling, threading.
Total 50
Each student has to make two jobs on lathe, two jobs in Black Smithy shop, two jobs in welding shop, one job in sheet metal shop
and one job in wooden lathe – total eight jobs.
Books Recommended:
S.N. Book’s Name Writte’s Name Publisher’s Name

1 Mechanical Estimates and costing S.C.Jain Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi-6
2 Introduction to Estimating and costing GBS Narang and V.Kumar Khanna Publishers Delhi-6
3 Mechanical Estimates and costing T.K.Bagga & S.C.Sharma Khanna Publishers, Delhi-6
4 Estimates and Cost C.K.Singh & M.I.Khanna
MACHINE DRAWING - TW
Term Work No of Period in one session : 42 Credits
Subject Code No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 50
1611408 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
— — 03 External : 35
Rationale:
Drawing is the language of engineers. Without the knowledge and skill of drawing an Agricultural Engineering
Diploma Holder becomes handicapped in understanding the problems right from design state of machine components to the
production.
This subject will develop the understanding of drawing, representation of machine parts. The subject will help a
technician in understanding the functioning of different machine parts which will help in maintenance, dismantling and
assembly of machines parts from machinery & food process machines parts during its production process too. This subject
will develop confidence and will improve the ability of concept.
Objective:
The students will be able to:
- Understand screw threads and its characteristics representation
- Understand the fastening types and its representation
- Understand the different types of joints used and its representation
- Can get the ability to understand the different types of power coupling used in farm machinery and its
representation
- Can develop the ability to represent the agricultural machinery components by free hand sketch
- Develop drafting skill and be able to apply the knowledge & skill of drawing in practical field.
-
Contents : Term Work Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 - Orthographic Drawing, 1st angle projection [07]
Unit -2 - Isometric drawing of related agriculture implements [07]
Unit -3 - Line and Block diagram of: [10]
(a) Transmission system of a four wheel tractor.
(b) Lubricating system (forced fee circulation system) of
tractor and hydraulic control system of tractor.
Unit -4 - Free hand sketching of: [18]
(a) Universal and muff coupling
(b) Crank shaft
(c) Splined shaft
(d) Screw jack
(e) Cultivator
(f) Cage wheel
(g) Rotary paddy thresher
(h) Wheel HUB
(i) Disc plough
(j) Disc Harrow
Total 4
Books Recommended:- 2
1 Machine Drawing - N.D. Bhatt
2 Machine Drawing - Parkinson
3 Machine Drawing - R.B. Gupta
4 Machine Drawing - Mittal & Agarwal
5 A Text Book of Engineering Drawing - R.K. Dhawan
6 Practical Agricultural Engineering - R.K. Ghosh and S. Swain

HYDRAULICS & FLUID MECHANICS - TW
1611409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Rationale:
Diploma Holder in Agricultural Engineering Diploma Student has to work related to Irrigation & Drainage
Engineering where use of different aspects of instrument is must. In view of the following objective this sessional
course has been designed.
Objective:
To familiarize and know the use of the instruments related to Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics.
Students have to get the study of FIVE of the following assignments for practical concept.
Unit -1 - Study of piezometer and pressure gauges used in hydraulics. [ 03 ]

Unit -2 - Study of Bernauli’s experiment. [ 03 ]
Unit -3 - Study of Venturimeter and its uses. [ 03 ]
Unit -4 - Study of notches & mouth pieces. [ 03 ]
Unit -5 - Study of pilot tube [ 03 ]
Unit -6 - Study of manometer [ 03 ]
Unit -7 - Study of Centrifugal pump & its characteristics [ 03 ]
Unit -8 - Study of Reciprocating pump [ 03 ]
Unit -9 - Study of head losses in pipes due to bends, sudden contraction [ 03 ]
Unit -10 - Study of measurement of hydraulic flow and discharge [ 03 ]
Total 30
Books Recommended:
1 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics - Dr. Jagdish Lal Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
S. Ramanrutham Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New Delhi

2 Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Machines -
– 110 002
3 A Text Book of Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics - R.S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co., Ram Nagar, New Delhi
4 A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics - R.K. Bansal Laxmi Publication, New Delhi
5 Tube Well & Pumps - Dr. A.M. Michel Water Technology Centre, ICAR, New Delhi
6 Open Channel Flow - V.T. Chaw Mc Graw Hill Co.

SOIL SCIENCE & SOIL MECHANICS -TW
1611410 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Rationale:
An Agricultural Engineering Diploma student is required to know about soil structure and texture. He has to apply
engineering and technology in agricultural operation in a better way to improve productivity.
Objective:
The course is designed with following objectives:
- to understand about soil science and soil mechanics and its relation with crop production
- to know about soil pH, soil classification, method of sample taking etc.
- to develop skill about engineering properties of soil.
At least Seven sessional units must be carried out by the students.

Unit -1 - Study about soil classification. [ 02 ]

Unit -2 - Study about texture and structure of soil. [ 02 ]
Unit -3 - Study about essential plant nutrients. [ 02 ]
Unit -4 - Study about acid and alkali soils and principles of their management. [ 02 ]
Unit -5 - Study about soil compaction. [ 02 ]
Unit -6 - Study about soil sample taking methods from the field. [ 02 ]
Unit -7 - Study about soil pH and its determination by pH meter. [ 03 ]
Unit -8 - Study about determination of N:P:K of given soil sample. [ 03 ]
Unit -9 Study about determination of moisture content of given soil sample. [ 03 ]
Unit -10 - Study about determination of grain size distribution of given soil sample by [ 03 ]
Sieve Analysis.
Unit -11 - Study about determination of liquid limit of given soil sample. [ 03 ]
Unit -12 - Study about determination of field density and void ratio of soil by the help [ 03 ]
of core cutter.
Total 30
Books Recommended:
1
Soil Mechanics and Foundation - B.C.Punania Standard book house,New Delhi.
2 Soil Mechanics and Foundation
- Bhagirath Lal Gupta Standard publishers Distributors, Delhi
Engineering
3
Nature and Properties of Soil - N.C. Brady S. Chand & Company Ltd, New Delhi.
4 T.D. Biswas & S.K. Mukherjee Tata McGraw Hill publishing company
Text Book of Soil Science -
Ltd.
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN ARCHITECTURAL ASSISTANTSHIP
THEORY

No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours Teacher's Class End Semester Total Pass Pass
Week of Assessment Test(CT) Exam. (ESE) Marks Marks Marks in Credits
Exam. (TA) Marks Marks Marks (A+B+C) ESE the Subject
(A) (B) (C)
1. Building
1637401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Construction-I`
2. History of
1637402 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Architecture
3. Ecology &
1637403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Environment
4. Building Services,
Sanitation & Air 1637404 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Conditioning
5. Interior Design &
1637405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Rendering
Total:- 18 350 500
PRACTICAL

No. CODE SCHEME
6.
Construction Practice Lab -I 1637406 04 04 15 35 50 20 02
7.
Model Making Lab-I 1637407 06 06 30 70 100 40 03
Total:- 10 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
8.
Model Making (TW) 1637408 02 15 35 50 20 01
9.
Interior Design (TW) 1637409 03 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 05 100
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION-I
1637401 03
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
The aim is to develop an understanding of the behavior and function of various components of
buildings. For this it is essential that the student are taught the various components of the buildings
such as foundations, floors, super structure, joints, openings, roofs etc.
Teachers must supplement their lectures with models, audio-visuals and on-site study of various
building components
Contents :Theory
Name of the Topic Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 Brick Masonry
(i) Brick Bond (Different types of brick bond)
a) English
b) Flemish
(ii) Wall Junction 08 09
a) T-Junction
b) Cross Junction
(iii) Arches & Lintels in brick /Stone
Unit -2 Stone Masonry / Marble, Kota, parquettle tiles
Rubble Masonry
Random Rubble
08 09
Course Masonry
Unit -3 Openings
Different types of Doors – Panelled door, Metal doors, Rolling door,
Revolving. Collapsible ,Sliding, Revolving door
14 16
Different types of Windows – glazed, louvered, corner and bay
window,
Ventilators & North light.
Unit -4 Interior
Partition Wall ( Different types of partition wall)
a) Brick,metal, stone,PVC/Plastic
b)Timber Panel and Soft board Partition
c) Partition using Aluminium and Timber Section 14 16
d) Glass block Partition
False Ceiling
a) Gypboard
Unit -5 Flooring
Types of Flooring, Method of Laying
16 20
Different Floor finishes with stones ,Cement, Colored Cement,
mosaic,Terrazzo,Tiles , Wooden
Total 60 70
Books Recommended:-
1 Sushil Kumar, Building Construction, Standard Publishers, Distributors, Delhi
2 Mitchell, Mitchell’s Elementary Building Construction, Bombay Allied Publishers
3 S.C.Rangwala, Building Construction, Charotar Publishing House Anand
HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE
1637402 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
The course on History of Architecture develops appreciation regarding past and current trends
in the field of architecture. The knowledge of this course will help the students to understand how
political, physical, social, economical and technological change affects the architecture, materials and
construction techniques. The course covers broad topics like: pre-historic architecture, important
civilizations (Indian, Egyptian, Greek and Roman), medieval architecture in Europe and temple
architecture and Buddhist architecture in India.
The teacher should try to create interest among the students for this course by organizing site visits to
the local old monuments. Audio-visual aids should also be used to explain various architectural
developments. While imparting instructions, teachers should stress upon the context of form and space,
construction methods structural systems and materials. The teacher should motivate the students to
take general reference for form, drawings, structural solutions and materials from the history while
designing their project.
Contents :Theory
Unit -1 Pre Historical Architecture and introduction to History of Architecture. 10 11
Indian Ancient Civilization.
Indus valley Civilization: Form of Harppan city, location and role of public
buildings.
Architecture of the typical Harappan dwelling, Granary and Bath.
The Vedic Village, building typology and construction.
Unit -2 Hindu Architecture 14 13
Elements of Hindu Temple
Orissan Style ( Sun Temple Konark / Lingraj Temple / Bhubaneshwar/Puri
South Indian Style ( Madurai)
Khajuraho Group (Kandarya Mahadeva)
Unit -3 Buddhism / Jainism 12 13
Stupas (Sanchi Stupa)
Chaitya &Viharas
Jain Temple ,Dilwara,Mt.Abu
Unit -4 Rise of Indo-Islamic Architecture 10 11
Use of Arches,Vaults,Jali,Minarets,Squinches
Study of Architechtural Design and feature of
Qutub minar, Taj Mahal, Fatehpur Sikri, Jama Masjid.
Unit -5 Greek Architecture 09 10
Ionic ,Doric and Corinthan order
Characteristics feature of temple Design
The Parthenon at Athens
Public Building and spaces :Theatre and Agora
Unit -6 Roman Architecture 11 12
Ionic, doni and Corinthian order
Characteristics feature of temple Design
The Parthenon at Rome
Basillica of Trajan ,Rome,
Colloseum at Rome
Total 60 70
Books Recommended:-
1. Urban Pattern Cyallion B Fischer
2. History Builds the Town Arthur Koher
3. A History Architecture: Settings and Rituals Spiro Kostof.
4. Town Building in History Hirons
5. World Architecture Michael Raeburn
Internet Sources/Various search engineers may also be bio used for additional information on
some topics.
ECOLOGY & ENVIRONMENT
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
A diploma holder must have knowledge of different types of pollution caused due to industries and
constructional activities so that he may help in balancing the eco system and controlling pollution by
pollution control measures. He should also be aware of environmental laws related to the control of
pollution.
Lectures will be delivered on following broad topics.
Contents :Theory
Unit -1 Ecology and Environment 10 14

Brief Introduction to direct and indirect factors of environment,
concept of an ecosystem ,structure and function of an
ecosystem, food chain ,food web, ecological pyramid
Unit -2 Environmental Pollution 20 30
Air/Water/Noise pollution- their causes and its Effect
Acid Rain
Ozone layer depletion
Global Warming and Green House effect
Unit -3 Conservation of Land and water 07 09
Green House Effect, Rain Water Harvesting
Solid Waste management
Unit -4 Natural Resources 08 10
Forest resources & water resources
Consequences of deforestation, floods and draughts, Energy
Resource, Renewable Sources- Solar Energy, Wind energy,
hydropower, Biomass energy(Bio gas and Bio fuels)
Non renewable resource: Coal, Petroleum, natural gas
Land Resource, Soil Erosion-causes and Effect
Unit -5 Sustainable development, equitable use of resources for 05 07
sustainable development
Total 50 70
BUILDING SERVICES ,SANITATION & AIR CONDITIONING
1637404 03
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Students of Architectural Assistantship at diploma level are expected to prepare working drawings of
various fittings and fixtures and water supply and sanitary installations. Also students should be well
conversant with electrical and mechanical installations in the buildings. For this purpose, it is essential
that the students are taught various aspects of building services like: sanitation, domestic water supply,
electrical layout and air conditioning. Therefore, the subject of building services is very important for
students undergoing diploma courses in Architectural Assistantship.
Objectives:
The student will be able to: -
1) Understand the commonly used methods of water supply
2) Know terms and principles in air conditioning.
3) Drainage System
Contents :Theory
Name of the Topic Hrs/week M
ar
ks
Unit -1 Domestic Water Supply 08 09
Sources of water supply, standards of purity and treatment of water, qualities of
potable water. Domestic water demand, capacity of over head tanks and
calculation of water consumption.
Unit -2 Domestic water piping systems: Water distribution networks. Cold and hot 10 11
water distribution within the building. Specifications and sketches of various
plumbing fittings for buildings. Uses of valves, taps, and their different types.
House/service connection. Layout of water supply lines in a domestic house.
Unit -3 Sanitation: Definition of different terms related to sanitation, Basic 08 11
principles of sanitation and disposal of waste matter from building. Brief
description of various systems of sewage disposal and their principles. Details of
a Septic tank and capacity calculation.
Unit -4 Sanitary fittings & Fixtures – Definition of water seal, Breaking of water 10 11
seal, Anti siphonage, inspection chamber define trap and its different types
(P-trap, Q-trap, S-trap), Gully trap, floor trap intercepting trap and their
uses.
Fittings & Fixture – water closets (Indian & European types) flushing
cistern, urinals, Bath tub, wash Basin, Inspection, Testing and
maintenance.
Plumbing work – Main soil pipe, brach soil pipe, vent pipe Rain water
pipe, sketch of plumbing work of building.
Unit -5 Air conditioning 06 09

Principles of refrigeration & Air -Conditioning
- Different types of Air-Conditioning.
- Cooling load Calculation
Air Conditioning Equipments -
-Major equipment used in Air conditioning - their characteristics & suitable place
for location, consideration for reduction of heat gain and economic layout of
supply and return air ducts.
- Schematic drawings showing the Air conditioning system of an office building,
hotel, auditorium etc.
Unit -6 Fire Safety 10 11
- Role and Importance, Fire safety design, planning for fire protection.
- Fire detection & fire fighting
- Different fire fighting methods to be adopted in buildings.
Unit -7 Drainage System 06 08
Sanitation
Glossary of drainage terms----
Surface drainage: Systems of drainage, combined and separate systems.
Open drains in small towns, shape of street drains. Storm overflow,
self cleaning velocities, domestic drains, flushing of drains
Sewers: Sewers for different systems, standard type of drains, R.C. drain
sewers, making sewers, cement concrete, asbestos cement
concrete, earthen ware pipes, cast iron pipes,Test of pipes,
Masonry sewers, setting out sewer line and excavation, laying and
joining pipes, sewers crossings, branch connections of sewers
Manholes
Spacing, Size, Covers, Lamp Holes, Ventilation of sewers
House Drainage
Trap Types, Intercepting traps, gully traps, grease traps, Trap material and
functions, Inspection chambers, Ventilation of House drains,
Antisyphonage, vent pipes, one and two pipe system, Sanitary fitting,
Sinks, bath, water closet, closet ranges, Flushing cisterns, urinals,
laboratory basins, bidets, Size of pipes and traps for house drainage testing
drainage, pipes for leakage, smoke test, water test, cast iron brass pipes,
soil & rain water pipes, wrought iron and steel and pipes, P.V.C. pipes
Plumbing and Internal Fixtures
Joints for various type of pipes,Septic tanks, cess pools and seepage pits
Total 60 70
Books:-
1 Rangwala S.C., Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering Charotar Publishing House, Anand
2 I.S.I National Building Code B.I.S. Publication
3 J.S.Birdie G.S.Birdie Water Supply and Sanitary Engineering Dhanpatrai Publication Co., New
Delhi
4 S.L. Uppal Electrical Wiring Estimating & costing Khanna Publication, New Delhi
5 V.N. Gharpure Water Supply engineering Engineering Book Publication, C.O.Pune
6 I.S.I. Code of basic requirement for Water Supply I.S. –1172 B.I.S.
Books Recommended:-
1. Handbook of Designing and Installation of Services in Building Complex – High-rise Buildings
by VK Jain, Publication. Khanna Publishers, New Delhi Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
INTERIOR DESIGN & RENDERING

L T P/S ESE : 70
04
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Students of Architectural Assistantship at the diploma level are expected to know, design and execute
building interiors. Therefore, the basic knowledge of building construction and detailed knowledge of
building materials is required. With the knowledge of this subject the students can help in handling
interior projects from the concept stage to the project implementation stage. Also this exercise is
necessary since the interiors are becoming more integral part of architecture and considerable stress is
being laid in interior design.
Teachers while imparting instructions are expected to explain concepts and principles introducing
various building finishing materials. The course would be supplemented with literature and samples of
materials.
Contents :Theory

Unit -1 Introduction to Interior Designing. 05 07
Unit -2 Principles of Interior Designing 05 07
Unit -3 Principle of lines, wall composition guidelines. 03 05
Unit -4 Colum for interior, hue, chroma and tonal values, Effect of light on 02 04
colours ,various colour scheme, colour planning process.
Unit -5 Presentation of interior design schemes-
a) Drawing Room, Family Room 05 07

b) Kitchen 03 07
c) Bed Room 05 07
d) Toilet 02 05
e) Restaurant 03 07
f) Office 03 07
g) Shop /Show Rooms Interior 05 07
Rendering with Hand/Computer Software 03
Total 50 70
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE LAB -I
1637406 02
External : 35
Contents : Practical
List of Experiments :- Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Brick bond (English & Flemish) - 2 Sheet 02 13
Unit -2 Wall Junction (T& Cross Junction) - 2 Sheet 02 13
Unit -3 Stone Masonry - 1 Sheet. 01 06
Unit -4 Door/ Window - 1 Sheet. 01 06
Unit -5 Floor - 1 Sheet. 01 06
Unit -6 DPC (Exp joint/ Water proofing) - 1 Sheet 01 06
total- 08 50
MODEL MAKING LAB-I
Subject Code Practical No of Period in one session : 60 Credits
L T P/S ESE : 100
03
External : 70
Rationale:
Students of Architectural Assistantship at diploma level are expected to assist in the preparation of
architectural models of various kinds in their professional career. This skill can also form a basis of
self-employment. Architecture models as three- dimensional representations are made in different
mediums. The students should be acquainted with all of these mediums/materials
Contents :Practical
List of Experiments:- Hrs/week Marks
1. Model of Building Using Mount Board 12
2. Block Model Using Thermocol /Wood 12
3. Clay Modeling 12
4. Plaster of Paris 12
5. Model of Grill/Railings/Gates 12
Total 60
Materials Supplied : Thermocol, Mount Board, Adhessives, Hard board

In Examination : Materials & Drawing Sheet of ½ imperial size
MODEL MAKING -TW
Term Work No of Period in one session : Credits
1637408 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Rationale:
Students of Architectural Assistantship at diploma level are expected to assist in the preparation of
architectural models of various kinds in their professional career. This skill can also form a basis of
self-employment. Architecture models as three- dimensional representations are made in different
mediums. The students should be acquainted with all of these mediums/materials
Contents: Term Work
List of Term Work :- (2 Model Block )-

1. Model of Residential Block - (Block model using thermocol and Mount
Board with hard board base)
2 Model of Commercial Block - (Mount Board with hard board base)
.
INTERIOR DESIGN -TW

1637409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Contents: Term Work ( 5 Sheets )

List of Term Work :-
Bed Room Interior - 12
Unit-1 (Pencil) - 1 Sheet.
Unit-2 Kitchen - 1 Sheet 12
(Using Ink) -
Unit-3 Drawing Room - 1 Sheet 12
(Pencil) -
Unit-4 Restaurant - 1 Sheet 12
View of Interior, Using Perspective
(Using water color two point)
Unit-5 Office Shop/Show room - 1 Sheet 12

IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING / MECH. ENGG.(AUTO)
( Effective from Session 2016-17 Batch )
THEORY
TEACHING EXAMINATION-SCHEME
SCHEME
Periods per Hours Teacher's Class End Total Pass Pass Credits
Sr. SUBJECT
SUBJECT Week of Assessment Test Semester Marks Marks Marks
No. CODE
Exam. (TA) (CT) Exam.(ESE) (A+B+C) ESE in the
Marks Marks Marks Subject
A B C
1. Theory of Machines
1625401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
& Mechanisms
2.
Automobile Engines 1633402 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
3.
Automobile Systems 1633403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
4.
Thermal Engineering 1625404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Fluid Mechanics and

1625405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Machinery
Total :- 16 350 500
PRACTICAL
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT
SUBJECT Hours of Practical (ESE) Total Pass Marks Credits
No. CODE
Periods per Exam. Internal(A) External(B) Marks in the
Week (A+B) Subject
6.
Thermal Engineering Lab 1625406 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
7. Fluid Mechanics and

1625407 03 03 15 35 50 20 01
Machinery Lab
8.
Production Processes Lab 1625408 04 04 15 35 50 20 02
Total :- 09 150
TERM WORK
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Marks Pass Marks in Credits
SUBJECT
No. CODE Week Internal External (X+Y) the Subject
Examiner Examiner
(X) (Y)
9. Theory of Machines &
1625409 02 07 18 25 10 01
Mechanisms (TW)
10. Professional Practices- IV(TW)
1625410 04 07 18 25 10 02
11.
Automobile Engines (TW) 1633411 02 15 35 50 20 01
Total :- 08 100
24
Total Periods per week Each of duration One Hour 33 Total Marks = 750
THEORY OF MACHINES AND MECHANISMS
(MECHENICAL ENGINEERING GROUP)
Subject Code Theory Credits
1625401
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY

Unit -1 Fundamentals and types of Mechanisms:-
1.1 Kinematics of Machines: - Definition of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics,
Kinetics, Kinematic link, Kinematic Pair and its types, constrained motion
and its types, Kinematic chain and its types, Mechanism, inversion, machine
and structure.
1.2 Inversions of Kinematic Chain.
1.2.1 Inversion of four bar chain, coupled wheels of Locomotive &
Pentograph.
1.2.2 Inversion of Single Slider Crank chain- Rotary I.C. Engines
mechanism, Whitworth quick return mechanism, Crank and Slotted
lever quick return mechanism. 08 15
1.2.3 Inversion of Double Slider Crank Chain- Scotch Yoke Mechanism
& Oldham’s Coupling.
1.3 Common Mechanisms
1.3.1 Bicycle free wheel Sprocket mechanism.
1.3.2 Geneva Mechanism.
1.3.3 Ackerman’s Steering gear mechanism.
1.3.4 Foot operated air pump mechanism.
Unit -2 Velocity and Acceleration in Mechanism:-
2.1 Concept of relative velocity and relative acceleration of a point on link, angular
velocity and angular acceleration, inter- relation between linear and angular
velocity and acceleration.
2.2 Drawing of velocity and acceleration diagram of a given configuration, diagrams
of simple mechanisms. Determination of velocity and acceleration of a point on
link by relative velocity method [Excluding coriollis components of
06 09
acceleration].
2.3 Analytical method [no derivation] and Klein’s construction to determine
velocity and acceleration of different links in single slider crank mechanism.
Unit – 3 Cams and Followers:-
3.1 Concept, definition and application of Cams and Followers.
3.2 Classification of Cams and Followers.
3.3 Different follower motions and their displacement diagrams like uniform velocity, 04 08
SHM, uniform acceleration and Retardation.
3.4 Drawing of profile of radial cam with knife-edge and roller follower with and
without offset with reciprocating motion (graphical method)
Unit – 4 Power Transmission:-
4.1 Types of Drives – Belt, Chain, Rope, Gear drives & their comparison.
4.2 Belt Drives – flat belt, V– belt & its applications, material for flat and V- belt,
angle of lap, belt length. Slip and creep. Determination of velocity ratio, ratio of
tight side and slack side tension, centrifugal tension and initial tension, condition
for maximum power transmission( Simple 133umerical)
4.3 Chain Drives – Advantages & Disadvantages, Selection of Chain & Sprocket
wheels, methods of lubrication.
4.4 Gear Drives – Spur gear terminology, types of gears and gear trains, their 12 14
selection for different application, train value & Velocity ratio for compound,
reverted and simple epicyclic gear train, methods of lubrication, Law of gearing.
4.5 Rope Drives – Types, applications, advantages & limitations of Steel ropes.
Unit – 5 Flywheel and Governors:-
1.1 Flywheel – Concept, function and application of flywheel with the help
of turning moment diagram for single cylinder 4-S I.C. Engine (no
Numericals). Coefficient of fluctuation of energy, coefficient of
fluctuation of speed and its significance. 05 06
1.2 Governors – Types, concept, function and application & Terminology
of Governors.
1.3 Comparison between Flywheel and Governor.
Unit – 6 Brakes, Dynamometers, Clutches & Bearings:-
10 14
6.1 Function of brakes and dynamometer, types of brakes and Dynamometers,
comparison between brakes and dynamometer.
6.2 Construction and working of i) shoe brake, ii) Band Brake, iii) Internal
expanding shoe brake iv) Disc Brake.
6.3 Concept of Self Locking & Self energizing brakes.
6.4 Numerical problems to find braking force and braking torque for shoe &
band brake.
6.5 Construction and working of i) Rope Brake Dynamometer, ii) Hydraulic
Dynamometer, iii) Eddy current Dynamometer.
6.6 Clutches- Uniform pressure and Uniform Wear theories.
6.7 Function of Clutch and its application, Construction and working of i)
Single plate clutch, ii) Multiplate clutch, iii) Centrifugal Clutch iv)
Cone clutch v) Diaphragm clutch. (Simple 134umerical on single and
Multiplate clutch).
6.8 Bearings – i) Simple Pivot, ii) Collar Bearing, iii) Conical pivot. Torque
& power lost in friction (no derivation). Simple 134umerical.
Unit – 7 Balancing & Vibrations:-
7.1 Concept of balancing. Balancing of single rotating mass. Graphical
method for balancing of several masses revolving in same plane. 03 04
7.2 Concept and terminology used in vibration, causes of vibrations in
machines, their harmful effects and remedies.
Totals 48 70
Text/ Reference Books:

Titles of the Book Name of Authors Name of the Publisher
Theory of machines Khurmi Gupta Eurasia publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 2006
edition
Theory of Machine S.S.Rattan McGraw Hill companies II Edition
Theory of machines P.L.Ballaney Khanna Publication

Theory of machines Timo Shenko Wiley Eastern
Theory of machines Jagdishlal Bombay Metro – Politan book ltd.
Theory of machines Ghosh – Mallik Affilated East west press
Theory of machines Beven T. CBS Publication
Theory of machines J.E.Shigley Mc Graw Hill
Kinamatics and Dynamics of George Henry Martin
machines
The theory of machines through J.S rao
solved problems
AUTOMOBILE ENGINES
(AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING GROUP)
1633402
L T P/S ESE : 70
04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Unit -1 Engine principles and fundamentals:-
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Basic engine nomenclature.
1.3 Classification of automobile engines.
1.4 Use of engines
1.5 Merits and Demerits of vertical and horizontal engines. 06 12
1.6 Four stroke SI and CI engine
1.7 Two stroke cycle engine.
1.8 Comparison of two stroke and four stroke cycle engine
1.9 Reasons for using single cylinder two stroke and four stroke cycle engine.
Unit -2 Constructional features of automobile engine components:-
2.1 Cylinder block, cylinder liner, types of liner, comparison of dry and wet
liners, cylinder head, gaskets, type of gaskets, piston, piston ring pin etc.
2.2 Piston, piston rings, Piston ring joints, piston pin.
2.3 Crank shaft, camshaft, connecting rod, valve, valve cooling, valve 08 12
mechanisms, valve timing, port-timing diagram, manifolds, silencers,
flywheel etc.
2.4 Types of camshaft drives.
2.5 Rotary and reed valve
Unit – 3 Engine cooling system:-
3.1 Introduction – Purpose of cooling
3.2 Systems- Air cooling system, water cooling systems.
3.3 Comparison of air & water cooling systems.
3.4 Parts of cooling system. 04 08
Thermostat, water expansion tank, Temperature Indicator Pressure cap,
water pump, fan and fan belt, radiator.
3.5 Cooling water additions
Unit – 4 Lubrication systems:-
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Purpose of lubrication, parts to be lubricated, functions and properties of
engine lubricating oils, additives for lubricants, classification of lubricating
oils. 06 08
4.3 Dry Sump lubrication system, wet sump lubrication system, petrol
lubrication system, pressurized lubrication system, splash lubrication
system.
Unit – 5 Fuel Systems:-

Part A 07 10
5.1 Fuel feed system in petrol engines.
5.2 Mechanical fuel pump, electrical fuel pump
5.3 Principles of carburetion.
5.4 Simple 112arburetor.
5.5 Starting, Idling & slow running, acceleration, Main metering system,
choke system.
5.6 S.U. Carburettor, solex 112arburetor.
5.7 Carburettors used in two wheelers and four wheelers.
Part B 07 08
5.8 Requirement of fuel injection system.
5.9 Various components & Diesel Fuel injection system.
5.10 Types of fuel injection pumps for single and multi cylinder engines, inline
and rotary types of fuel injection pumps.
5.11 Types of fuel injectors.
5.12 Air fuel mixture ratio in a petrol and diesel engine and comparison.
5.13 Mixture requirement for Transient conditions.
I.C. Engine Testing:-
6.1 Engine Power – Indicated, Brake and Frictional Power.
Unit – 6 6.2 Efficiency- Mechanical, Thermal, Relative and Volumetric.
6.3 Fuel Consumption- BSFC 10 12
6.4 Morse test, Motoring test.
6.5 Heat Balance Sheet.
Total 48 70

A course in internal combustion engine M.L Mathur R.P.Sharma Dhanpat Rai Publication
The Motor vehicle Newton, Steeds, Garrett. Butterworth Heinmann.
Automobile Engineering Vol.-2

Dr. Kirpal Singh Standard Publishers.
Automobile Engineering Vol. I – Engines. Anil Chikara Satya Prakashan, New Delhi
Automobile Mechanics Crouse / Anglin. TATA McGRAW – HILL

Automobile Engineering R.B. Gupta Satya Prakashan
Automotive Technology H. M. Sethi Tata McGraw Hill.
Automotive Engines S. Srinivasan Tata McGraw Hill.
Autotmobile Power Plants Ben George Elliot
A text book of automobile engineering R.K Rajput
AUTOMOBILE SYSTEMS
1633403
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY

Unit -1 Front Axle and Steering :-
1.1 Types of front axle – Dead axle, live axle, type of stub axle arrangements-
Elliot, reverse Elliot, lamoine, reverse lamoine.
1.2 Front wheel assembly.
1.3 Steering geometry – Caster, camber, king pin inclination, toe in– toe out,
Correct Steering angle.
1.4 Under steering and over steering, Turning radius & its effect. 12 16
1.5 Construction, working & application of Steering gear box – rack and pinion
type, recirculating ball type, worm & roller type.
1.6 Steering linkages & steering column.
1.7 Ackerman Principle & linkage.
1.8 Power assisted steering & its types (Hydraulic & electrical)
Unit -2 Brakes:-
2.1 Function and necessity.
2.2 Classification of brakes and braking systems. 10 14
2.3 Principle, construction and working of –disc brakes, drum brake
2.4 Construction and working of the following–Mechanical braking system,
Hydraulic Braking system, Air braking system, Hydraulic operated air
assisted braking system.
2.5 Properties of brake fluids and their specifications
2.6 Concept and working of antilock braking system.
2.7 Parking brake.
Unit – 3 Suspension Systems :-
3.1 Types of suspension systems – Rigid & independent suspension
3.2 Types of Independent suspension system-McPherson strut, wishbone type.
3.3 Semi-elliptical Leaf spring, coil spring , torsion bar arrangement
3.4 Telescopic shock absorber, Gas filled shock absorber, hydraulic shock 08 12
absorber
3.5 Air Suspension System.
3.6 Anti roll bar, stabilizer bar.
Unit – 4 Body Engineering:-
4.1 Effect of stream lining on vehicle performance.
4.2 Materials used in body construction and types of bodies.
06 10
4.3 Protective and anti corrosive treatments, painting procedure.
4.4 Safety devices –air bags, exhaust brake, emergency brake, Central locking,
collapsible steering.
Unit – 5 Car Heating Ventilation & Air Conditioning System(HVAC):-
5.1 Basic principle- vapour compression cycle, layout and operation of HVAC.
5.2 Types of refrigerant used in car air conditioning and their Properties.
5.3 Human comfort conditions.
06 10
5.4 Temperature control system, humidity control.
Unit – 6 Vehicle Performance :-
R.P Resistance faced by the vehicle- Air resistance , rolling Resistance, gradient
resistance.
6.2 Define traction, tractive efforts, draw bar pull, gradeability an Acceleration, 06 08
pitching, Bouncing, Rolling, Sway and yaw.
6.3 Stability of vehicle on turn and slopes (No mathematical Treatment).
Total 48 70

Motor Automotive Technology
Anthony Schwaller Delmar Publisher Inc.
Automotive Service Tim Gills Delmar Publisher Inc.

Automobile Engineering Vol. II
Anil Chikara Satya Prakashan New Delhi
Automobile Mechanics Crouse / Anglin. TATA McGRAW – HILL

Automobile Engineering Vol.I
Kirpal Singh Standard Publication
Automobile Engineering R.B. Gupta Satya Prakashan New Delhi

Automotive Mechanics S. Srinivisan TATA McGRAW – HILL
ASHRAE HANDBOOK OF HVAC
-- ASHRAE
Automobile Air Conditioning
Boyce H. Dwiggins THOMSON LEARNING
Automotive technology: A system Approach Jack Erjavec
Automobile Electrical And Electronic Tom Denton

systems
THERMAL ENGINEERING
(MECHANICAL ENGINEERING GROUP)
1625404
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY

Unit -1 Fundamental concepts of thermodynamics and various thermodynamic
processes:-
1.1 Basic concepts of –
i) system ii) surrounding iii) Universe iv) open system v) closed system 08 14
vi) Isolated system vii) steady flow energy equation viii) internal energy ix)
enthalpy x) entropy.
1.2 Zeroth, first and second law of thermodynamics, General gas equation,
Characteristics of gas constant, Mol of gas, Universal gas constant, specific
heats of ideal gases.
1.3 Thermodynamic processes of ideal gases.
Isobaric, Isochoric, Isothermal, Adiabatic and polytropic with representation on
P-V and T-S diagram, work done, change in internal energy, change in
enthalpy and relation between P,V & T (Derivations only for adiabatic
process)
1.4 Air cycles: - P-V and T-S diagram and equations for air standard efficiency
of Otto, Diesel & Dual combustion cycle.
Unit -2 Properties of steam and steam power:-
2.1 Formation of steam, various phases like wet steam, dry saturated Steam,
superheated steam.
2.2 Dryness fraction, degree of superheat, sensible heat, Latent heat, calculation
of enthalpy of wet, dry saturated & superheated steam using steam table.
2.3 Study of boilers like three pass packaged type boiler, Water Tube & Fire
Tube Boiler. Mountings – Bourdan Pressure Gauge, Safety valves, Water
level Indicator and fusible Plug.
Accessories – Economiser, superheater and air pre-heater. 08 14
2.4 Steam condenser: Principle, Function, locations in steam power plant.
Surface condenser & its Applications.
2.5 Steam Turbines:
Classification of turbines, construction and working of Impulse and Reaction
turbine. Application of equation of continuity to steam turbine.
Unit – 3 Air Compressors:-
3.1 Various uses of compressed air and classification of compressors.
3.2 Construction and working of single stage and two stage reciprocating air
Compressors with P.V diagram. Necessity of multistaging and intercooling.
3.3 Construction & working of rotary compressors
i) Centrifugal compressor
ii) Axial flow compressor
iii) Screw compressor 06 10
3.4 Comparison of various compressors
3.5 Air compressor terminology like
i) Free air delivered ii) Capacity of compressor
iii) Piston displacement iv) I.P., B.P.R. Volumetric efficiency vi) Isothermal
efficiency vii) Overall Isothermal or Compressor efficiency
Unit – 4 Gas Turbines:-
4.1 Brayton cycle- P. V. diagram and thermal efficiency
4.2 Classification of gas turbines. 04 06
4.3 Construction and working of gas turbines open cycle ii)closed cycle gas
turbines, P.V. & T.S diagrams.
4.4 Turbojet & turboprop engine.
Unit – 5 Sources of Energy & Power plants:-
06 10
5.1 Classification of various conventional and non-conventional sources of
energy.
5.2 Construction and working of power plants based on conventional energy
sources :
i) Thermal power plant
ii) Diesel power plant
iii) Gas turbine power plant.
5.3 Parameters of site selection :
5.4 Study the working and construction of non- conventional energy sources.
I) Solar ii) Bio-diesel
Unit – 6 Heat transfer:-
6.1 Modes of heat transfer–conduction, convection and radiation.
6.2 Conduction – Fourier’s law , thermal conductivity, conduction through
cylinders, thermal resistance, composite walls, combined conduction and
convection.
6.3 Thermal radiation, absorptivity, transmissivity, reflectivity, emissivity, black 06 08
and gray bodies, Stefan-Boltzman law, Heat transfer by radiation.
6.4 Heat transfer in condenser and radiator.
Total 48 70
Text / Reference Books:

A Text book of Thermal Engineering R. S. Khurmi & J. K. Gupta
S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
Elements of Heat Engines (Vol. I, II & III)
Patel and Karamchandani Acharya Book Depot.
Thermal Engineering A. S. Rao Satya Prakashan

Thermal engineering B. K. Sarkar Tata McGraw Hill
Engineering Thermodynamics
Jones & Dugan Prentice Hall of India
Thermodynamics Yunus Cegel & Mike Boles Tata McGraw Hill

Thermodynamics for Engineers. Jesse S.Doolittle & Francis J Hale
John Willey & Sons
S. Domkundwar, Dr C.P.
A course in Thermal Engineering Dhanpat Rai & Co.(P) Ltd, New
Kothandaraman Delhi
& A.V. Domkundwar
Power Distribution Planning H Lee Willis
Heat Power K.C. Pal

FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY
1625405
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Chapter Name of the Topic Hours Marks

Properties of fluid :
• Density, Specific gravity, Specific Weight, Specific Volume
Unit-01 • Dynamic Viscosity, Kinematic Viscosity, Surface tension, Capillarity 04 04
• Vapour Pressure, Compressibility
Fluid Pressure & Pressure Measurement :
• Fluid pressure, Pressure head, Pressure intensity
• Concept of absolute vacuum, gauge pressure, atmospheric pressure,
absolute pressure.
• Simple and differential manometers, Bourden pressure gauge.
Unit-02 09 12
• Concept of Total pressure on immersed bodies, center of pressure.
Note: Numericals on Manometers, Total Pressure & Centre of pressure
Fluid Flow :
• Types of fluid flows
• Continuity equation
• Bernoulli’s theorem
• Venturimeter – Construction, principle of working, Coefficient of
Unit-03 discharge, Derivation for discharge through venturimeter. 12
09
• Orifice meter – Construction, Principle of working, hydraulic
coefficients, Derivation for discharge through Orifice meter
• Pitot tube – Construction, Principle of Working
Note :- Numericals on Venturimeter, orifice meter, pitot tube
Flow Through Pipes :
• Laws of fluid friction ( Laminar and turbulent)
• Darcy’s equation and Chezy’s equation for frictional losses.
• Minor losses in pipes
Unit-04 05 06
• Hydraulic gradient and total gradient line.
• Hydraulic power transmission through pipe
Note: Numericals to estimate major and minor losses
Impact of jet :
1.10 Impact of jet on fixed vertical, moving vertical flat plates.
1.11 Impact of jet on curved vanes with special reference to turbines &
Unit-05 pumps 09 08
Note - Simple Numericals on work done and efficiency
Hydraulic Turbines :
2.5 Layout of hydroelectric power plant.
2.6 Features of Hydroelectric power plant.
2.7 Classification of hydraulic turbines.
2.8 Selection of turbine on the basis of head and discharge available
Unit-06 10 10
2.9 Construction and working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan
turbine.
2.10 Draft tubes – types and construction, Concept of cavitation in turbines
2.11 Calculation of Work done, Power, efficiency of turbine.
A] Centrifugal Pumps :
3.6 Construction , principle of working and applications 10 10
Unit-07 3.7 Types of casings and impellers.
4.4 Concept of multistage
4.5 Priming and its methods, Cavitation
4.6 Manometric head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, Overall
efficiency, NPSH
4.7 Performance Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps
4.8 Trouble Shooting
4.9 Construction, working and applications of submersible, jet pump
Note :- Numericals on calculations of overall efficiency and power required to

drive pumps.
B] Reciprocating Pump :
4.10 Construction ,working principle and applications of single and double
acting reciprocating pumps. 08 06
4.11 Concept of Slip, Negative slip, Cavitation and separation
4.12 Use of Air Vessel.
7.11 Indicator diagram with effect of acceleration head & frictional head.
Note:- No Derivations and Numericals on reciprocating pumps.

Total 64 70
Text/Reference Books:
Hydraulic, fluid mechanics & fluid Ramamrutham S.
Dhanpat Rai and Sons New
machines
Delhi
Hydraulics and fluid mechanics Modi P. N. and Seth S. M.
Standard Book House. New
including Hydraulic machines
Delhi
Fluid Mechanics Streeter Victor, Bedford K.W., Wylie McGraw Hill Int.
E.B
One Thousand Solved Problems in K. Subramanya Tata McGraw Hill
Fluid Mechanics
Pump manufactures’ catalogs such as Kirloskar Brothers, KSB, Kishor pumps etc.
Elements of Workshop S. K. Hajra Choudhury. A. K. Hajra Media Promoters
Technology. Vol. – I & II Choudhury. & Publishers Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai.
Workshop Technology Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.

H. S. Bawa
Vol. – I & II. Ltd. New Delhi.
Workshop Technology Dr. W. A. J. ELBS & Edward Arnold
Part- I, II & III Chapman ( Publishers ) Ltd., London.
B. H. Amstead, Phillip Ostwald, Myronl
John Wiley & Sons ( Eighth Edition )
Manufacturing Processes Begeman.
CNC machines programming &

applications. Aditan, Pabla Willey Estarn Ltd.
Production Technology H.M.T. H.M.T.

R. Video Cassettes and CDs:
Video cassettes developed by:
-- Electronics Trades and Technology Development Corporation ( A Govt. of India undertaking ), Akbar Hotel Annex
, Chanakyapuri , New Delhi – 110 02.
Learning Materials – CBT Packages developed by N.I.T.T.T.R, Bhopal.
Uday Vaidya Composites for

Automotives
Walter Fung Textiles in automotive
engineering
THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB
Subject Code Practical Credits
1625406
L T P/S ESE : 50
01
— — — External : 35
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
Practical: Skills to be developed:

Intellectual Skill :
1) Understand different sources of energy and their applications.
2) Understand various concepts and fundamentals of thermodynamics.
3) Understand concepts and laws of ideal gasses.
4) Understand vapour processes, steam boilers and different mountings and accessories.
5) Understand modes of heat transfer and concept of heat exchanges.
6) Interpret steam tables, mollier chart and relationship between different thermodynamic
properties.
Motor Skills :
3) Collect and write technical specifications of photovoltaic cells and identify different components on
panels of photovoltaic cells.
4) Conduct trial on the setup for calculation of thermal conductivity of metal rod
5) Trace path of flue gases and water steam circuit in a boiler.
6) Conduct trial on solar water heating system.
List of practical:
• Collection of technical data and specification of photovoltaic cell by referring to manufacturers’
catalogues.
• Study and Trial on solar water heating system.
• Report on visit to wind power generation plant / biogas plant / hydraulic power plant.
• Trace the flue gas path and water-steam circuit with the help of boiler model and write a report.
• Report on visit to sugar factory / Dairy / steam power plant with specifications of boiler and list of
mountings and accessories.
• Calculation of thermal conductivity of a solid metallic rod.
• Verification of Stefan-Boltzman’s law
• Study and compare various heat exchangers such as radiators, evaporators, condensers, plate heat
exchangers etc.
Numericals on vapour processes and ideal gas processes (minimum two problems on each)
FLUID MECHANICS & MACHINERY LAB
1625407
L T P/S ESE : 50
01
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL

Intellectual Skills:
1. Select and use appropriate flow measuring device.
2. Select and use appropriate pressure measuring device.
3. Analyze the performance of pumps and turbines.
Motor Skills:
1. Use flow measuring device.
2. Use pressure measuring device.
3. Operate pumps and turbines.
List of Practical:
1. Calibration of Bourden pressure gauge with the help of Dead Weight Pressure gauge.
2. Verification of Bernoulli’s Theorem.
3. Determination of Coefficient of Discharge of Venturimeter.
4. Determination of Coefficient of Discharge, coefficient of contraction and coefficient of velocity of
orifice meter.
5. Determination of coefficient of friction of flow through pipes.
6. Trial on Pelton wheel to determine overall efficiency.
7. Trial on centrifugal pump to determine overall efficiency.
8. Trial on reciprocating pump to determine overall efficiency.

PRODUCTION PROCESSES LAB
1625408
L T P/S ESE : 50
02
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
Note: Six hours practical work will be performed during practical examination Student will prepare
one jobs from the following list of practicals.
List :
1) Electric welding/Gas welding jobs.
2) Industrial visit to observe plastic processing shop and report on the visit.
3) One job on lathe containing the operations like plain turning, threading, boring, taper turning.
4) One job on CNC lathe containing the operations like plain turning, taper turning and curvature.
(Group of two students , each group must use different program for different job dimensions )
5) One job containing drilling, milling, reaming, gear cutting (spur gear) per job max. two students.
6) One job containing surface grinding / cylindrical grinding for tolerances
± 30 micron,( For the job already made on milling machine /lathe).
7) One assignment on accessories & attachment – chucks, mandrels, carrier and catch plates rests,
face plate and angle plate, grinding attachment used on lathe.
8) One assignment on accessories & attachment, work holding & tool holding devises used on milling
machine.
9) One assignment each on shaper, planer, boring machine, broaching machine.
10) Fittings related jobs.
One assignment on types of grinding wheels.
THEORY OF MACHINES & MECHANISMS -TW
Subject Code Term Work Credits
1625409
L T P/S Internal : 07 01
CONTENTS: TERM WORK
List of Term Work :- (Perform any four) -
1) Draw the profile of radial cam for the given motion of follower. (At least four problems)
2) Determine the radius of rotation of flyball for different speed of governor and draw a graph between radius of
rotation versus speed.
3) Dismantling and assembly of mechanically operated braking mechanism for two wheelers.
4) Determi nation of power transmitted by any belt drive using any one dynamometer.
5) Dismantling and assembly of multiplate clutch of two-wheeler.
6) Determine graphically balancing of several masses rotating in a single plane.

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IV -TW
1625410
CONTENTS: TERM WORK Hrs/week

Unit -1 Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be submitted by
the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
TWO industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries
i) Garage / service station. (Engine/chassis components, subsystems, their
location.) 14
ii) Vehicle manufacturing company.(Component manufacturing
processes.)
iii) Engine FIP testing unit.
iv) Sugar Factory / SSI / Chemical Factory
v) Machine shop having CNC machines.
Unit -2 Lectures by Professional / Industrial Experts to be organized from any of the
following areas (3 Lectures : 2 hrs duration each):
06
i) Interview Techniques.
ii) Power steering
iii) Antilock braking system
iv) Air suspension system
v) Automotive safety systems
vi) Car heating, ventilation & air conditioning system.
vii) Vehicle performance
viii) Alternative sources of energy (wind, solar and biomass)
ix) Use of internet
Unit – 3 Information Search:
Information search through manufacturers, catalogue, internet, magazines; books etc.
and submit a report of max. 10 pages (Any Two topics) Following topics are
suggested :
i) Two wheeler engine specifications.
ii) Four wheeler engine specifications
iii) Engine lubricants & additives
iv) Automotive gaskets and sealants
v) Engine coolants and additives
vi) Two wheeler 130umerical130.
vii) Four wheeler 130umerical130. 08
viii) Fuel injection pumps
ix) Power steering
x) Filters
xi) Different drives/Transmission systems in two wheelers.
xii) Types of Rolling Contact bearings – construction, mountings,
applications, cost and suppliers.
xiii) Radiators
xiv) Maintenance procedure for solar equipment.
xv) Drilling machines-types, tools and operation
Unit – 4 Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each student
08
shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar (Presentation time
– 10 minutes)
Unit – 5 Mini Project / Activities :
a) Prepare one model – cardboard / acrylic / wood / metal / etc such as : i) Elliptical
Trammel ii) Pantograph iii) Coupling iv) Geneva Mechanism v) Cam &
follower mechanism
OR
b) Dismantling and assembly (e.g. Piston – connecting rod, Cylinder head 12
– valves, Tool post, valves etc.) Take measurement and prepare sketches of
different parts.
OR
c) Make a small decorative water fountain unit.
OR
d) Toy making with simple operating mechanism
OR
e) How it works ? (students to collect information on working of small
assemblies or mechanisms)
Such as - - door closer, mobile charger , microwave oven , washing machine , gas
lighter , oil-can , grease gun , electromagnets , burglar alarm , central lock
(automobile).
Total 48
Note: The topics suggested under various activities (Sr.No.1 to 4) are only suggestive and may serve as
guidelines to the teachers. Any other equivalent topics or activities may be considered to improve professional
skills of the learner.
Text/ Reference Books:-

Titles of the Book Name of Authors
New directions in professional Practices Diane .T Marsh
Performing Arts Management: A handbook of professional practices Tobie S Stein,Jessica Bathurst

AUTOMOBILE ENGINES -TW
1633411
CONTENTS: TERM WORK
1) Operate a cut section model to explain two- stroke cycle engine.
2) Operate a Cut section model to explain four- stroke CI and SI engine
3) Dismantling and reassembling of following types of engines. (Any one from each category)
- Moped, scooter, motorcycle Single cylinder petrol or diesel engines.
- Four stroke petrol or diesel engines.
4) i) Remove the radiator from the vehicle, check it for leak, clean and reverse flush the
radiator and refit.
ii) Remove the water pump, clean, inspect and refit.
iii) Remove the thermostatic valve, check and refit
5) Remove the 113arburetor from the engine of motor cycle, identify and check the components,
draw the circuits and refit.
6) Remove the 113arburetor from the car engine, identify and check the components, draw
the circuits and refit.
7) Open the fuel injection pump and fuel injector, identify the components – draw sketch and
reassemble.
8) Perform a trial on a Multi-cylinder engine. Prepare a heat balance sheet.
9) Perform a Morse test on a Multi-cylinder engine.

IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN COSTUME DESIGN & GARMENT TECHNOLOGY
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
Week of Assessment Test(CT) Exam. (ESE) Marks Marks in the Credits
Exam. (TA) Marks Marks (A+B+C) ESE Subject
Marks (A) (B) (C)
1.
Pattern Making 1642401 04 04 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
2.
Fashion Sketching 1642402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
3.
Draping 1642403 03 04 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
4. Elements of Fashion
1642404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
and Design
5. Indian Textiles &
Surface 1642405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Embellishment
Total:- 16 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Pattern Making and Draping

1642406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Lab.
7.
Clothing Construction Lab.-II 1642407 06 04 15 35 50 20 03
8. Indian Textiles & Surface

1642408 03 03 15 35 50 20 02
Embellishment Lab
Total:- 13 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
9. Pattern Making and
1642409 02 15 35 50 20 01
Draping Lab. (TW)
10. Fashion Sketching
1642410 02 15 35 50 20 01
(TW)
Total:- 04 100
PATTERN MAKING
Subject Code Theory No of Period in one session : Credits
1642401 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE: Today’s fashion industry is versatile and rapidly changing in trends and therefore quick response of production is
very much essential. Flat pattern technique and Draping are the most important techniques employed in fashion garment industry
since its inception. Therefore, a steep demand of professional and technically educated workforce of advanced pattern
designing is one of the basic human resources of garment production industry. Aim of introducing this subject is to prepare
students with a professional approach of flat pattern and draping techniques, relevant to today’s fashion garment making industry.
Introduction of this course is a step forward in educating students in synchronization with the needs of today’s garment industry.
Objectives: Students will be able to:
1. Create innovative pattern using appropriate basic blocks and techniques.

CONTENTS : THEORY
Name of the Topic Hrs/ Marks
Week
Unit-1 Introduction to Pattern making 05 05
1.1 Importance of pattern making.
1.2 Methods of pattern making.
1.2.1 Flat pattern method.
1.2.2 size drafting method (Give idea through demonstration on dress form).
1.2.3 Drafting method (Upper & Lower Block)
1.3 Pattern making in today’s world.
Unit–2 Introduction to Blocks. 04 05
2.1 Definition of block.
2.2 Types of blocks: Standard block , Simplified block, Tailoring block, Trade block, Primary block and
Secondary block.
2.3 Importance of blocks, off figure drafting.
Unit–3 Techniques of Pattern Designing. 15 30
3.1 Material used for flat pattern methods.
3.2 Methods of flat pattern: (i) Pivot method, (ii) Slash method.
3.3 Principles of flat pattern method, its advantages and disadvantages.
Unit–4 Garment Components 10 15
4.1 Definition, Drafting of Basic Sleeves and types of sleeves.
4.1.1 Set in sleeves and its varieties.
4.1.2 Non set in sleeves and its varieties.
4.2 Definition and Drafting of Basic Shirt & Band Collar
4.3 Types of Collars.
4.3.1 Flat Collars and its varieties.
4.3.2 Raised Collars and its varieties.
4.3.3 Varieties in neck-lines without Collars.
4.4 Definition of Cuffs.
4.4.1 Varieties of cuffs- detachable cuff, Gauntlet cuff, barrel cuff, Beret cuff, Rollup cuff, French cuff,
Button loop cuff.
Unit-5 Introduction to skirt. 05 10
5.1 Definition of Skirt and Drafting of Basic Lower Blocks;
5.2 Classify various types of skirts according to its length.
5.3 Differentiate between straight and circular skirts.
Total 42 70
List of Recommended Books
S. No. Title of Books Author Publication

1 Pattern making for fashion design. Helen Joseph -Armstrong Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd
2 Fabric, form and flat pattern cutting Winifred Aldrich Blackwell Publishing
3 Pattern making for fashion design. Helen Joseph -Armstrong Harper Collins Publishers
4 Pattern Grading for Women’s Cloths Gerry Cooklin Willey –Black Well
FASHION SKETCHING
1642402 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE: This course forms the basis for drawing garments on human figures. It emphasizes the basic silhouettes. The
knowledge of different type of human figures enables the designers to design appropriate costumes. There is great demand of
professionals in the market who can design garments for different human figures. The focus of the course is on development of
skills in the student to apply principles and elements of design for garment design in industry. The course Art and design is
prerequisite for this course.
i. Design appropriate garment using principles and elements of design for given human figure.
ii. To develop ability in students to prepare in ligneous designs.
iii. To impart knowledge on human anatomy.
iv. To impart knowledge about model figure, fashion figure.
v. To impart knowledge of various figure types.
vi. To develop rendering knowledge and tools used for fashion drawing.
CONTENTS : THEORY
UNIT Name of the Topic Hrs/ Marks

Week
UNIT-1 Human figure proportions and stylization
1.1 Basic Human proportions, Human postures
1.2 Comparative analysis of Male, Female and children ideal proportions
12 20
1.3 Preparing a personalized fashion croquis for Men’s wear, women’s wear and children’s
wear range development
1.4 The croquies made should be used for further exercises in the course.
UNIT-2 Application of elements of designs in clothing
2.1 Identifying and Incorporating the element of ‘point’ in garments
2.2 Identifying and incorporating the element of ‘line’ in the design of garments
07 10
2.3 Identifying and incorporating the element of ‘form’ in the design of garments
2.4 Identifying and incorporating the element of ‘colour’ in the design of garments
2.5 Identifying and incorporating the element of ‘texture’ in the design of garments
UNIT-3 Application of principles of designs in clothing
3.1 Repetition and the elements as applied to the clothing
3.2 Gradation and the elements in the clothing
3.3 Transition and the elements in the clothing
07 10
3.4 Radiation and the elements in the clothing
3.5 Rhythm and the elements in the clothing
3.6 Emphasis and the elements in the clothing
3.7 Balance and the elements in the clothing.
UNIT-4 Application of principles of designs in clothing to modify the look of the garment
4.1 Exploring the concept of large top slim bottom; slim top large bottom.
4.2 Creating an angular/sharp look through Colour, Line, Point and texture
06 10
4.3 Creating a Tubular/flat look through Colour, Line, Point and texture
4.4 Creating a Curvy look through Colour, Line, Point and texture
4.5 Accentuating various zones of the body through Colour, Line, Point and texture
UNIT-5 Pattern design & flattering different types of figures
5.1 The Stout figure and the thin figure
5.2 Narrow shoulder and Broad shoulder
5.3 Round figure
5.4 Large Bust, Flat chest
5.5 Large Hip, Large waist & Hips
5.6 Large abdomen
5.7 Long Waist, slender figure
5.8 Short Waist 10 20
5.9 Sway Back
5.10 Long Neck, Short or thick neck
5.11 Large face, Small face, Square or broad face, Round face, Narrow Pointed face.
5.12 Retrousse Nose, Prominent Nose
5.13 Prominent Chin & Jaw, Receding Chin & Small Jaw
5.14 Prominent forehead, Low forehead
5.15 Sharp angular feature, Large features
5.16 Glasses
Total 42 70
List of Recommended Books:-

Sr. No. Title Author Publisher
1 Visual Design Marian L. Davis. Prentice Hall, Englewood diffs, New Jersey.
2 Art in Everyday Life Harrient Goldstein Vettagoldstein Publisher
3 Mc'calls sewing in colour Hamlyn Publication
4 How you look and dress Byrta Carson
5 Simple Accessories Jeff Sone & Johnson Gros --
6 Fashion From Concept to Consumer Gini Stephens Frings Pearson publications, 2009
The complete 20th Century Source
7 John Peacock Thames and Hudson, London, 2000,
Book
8 Fashion Accessories- Men John Peacock Thames and Hudson, London, 1996
9 Century of Bags Claire Billcocks Chartwell Books, New Jersey 1997
Malolow Blahnik- Co
10 Shoes -Fashion and Fantasies Thames and Hudson, 1989
Collin Mac dolw
DRAPING

1642403 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE: Today’s fashion industry is versatile and rapidly changing in trends and therefore quick
response of production is very much essential. Flat pattern technique and Draping are the most important
techniques employed in fashion garment industry since its inception. Therefore, a steep demand of
professional and technically educated workforce of advanced pattern designing is one of the basic
human resources of garment production industry. Aim of introducing this subject is to prepare students
with a professional approach of flat pattern and draping techniques, relevant to today’s fashion garment
making industry. Introduction of this course is a step forward in educating students in synchronization with
the needs of today’s garment industry.
CONTENTS : THEORY
Week
Unit-1 Introduction to Draping 05 05
1.1 Importance of Draping
1.2 Methods of Draping
1.2.1 Draping method (Give idea through demonstration on dress form).
1.2.2 Draping in customized garments
Unit–2 Introduction to front and back bodice through draping 04 05
2.1 How to handle fabric directly on body form
2.2 Dart formation and manipulation on bodice through draping
2.3 Contemporary designs for tops using draping techniques
Unit–3 Techniques of Draping 15 30

3.1 Material used for draping methods.
3.2 Methods of Draping: (i) Pivot method, (ii) Slash method.
3.3 Principles of draping, its advantages and disadvantages.
Unit–4 Draping Components 10 15
4.1 Pinning
4.1.1 Trimming
4.1.2 Clipping
4.2 Creating shapes using darts and tucks
4.3 Adding volume using pleats and gathers
4.3.1 Handling complex curves
4.3.2 How to use support elements such as shoulder pads , under layers and petticoats
4.3.3 How to handle bias draping
Unit-5 Techniques used in sewing of the Draped muslin 05 10

5.1 How to mark the seam lines darts etc while still on the body form
5.2 How to correctly remove the muslin from the body form
5.3 How to pin and stitch the final garment
Total 42 70
ELEMENTS OF FASHION AND DESIGN
1642404 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE: This course helps in understanding concept of fashion and the factors that affect fashion. It enables the students to
familiarize with fashion terminology. Understanding of the fashion trends is must for garment designers to make their designs
acceptable in market. Every costume designer should know about fashion and latest fashion trends if he/she wants his/her products
to be appreciated by the consumers. This course therefore helps the students to familiarize with fashion capitals, fashion brands,
fashion designers and consumer segmentations in order to understand the nuance of fashion as a global phenomenon affecting
lifestyle and commerce. This will help to keep themselves updated with knowledge and developments in fashion world. Thus this
is a very important course for students of CDGT programme.
Objectives: The course content should be taught and curriculum should be implemented with the aim to develop required skills in
the students so that they are able to acquire following competency:
1. Apply appropriate element and principles of fashion in given situation.
2. Gain knowledge about the national and international fashion scenario affecting life style and commerce.
3. Appreciate the influence of style icons on fashion across the globe.
4. Explain unique selling preposition ‘USP’ and signature style of important fashion designers across the world.
5. Explain principle and intangible of fashion.
CONTENTS: THEORY
UNIT Name of the Topic Hrs/ Marks

Week
Unit-1 Introduction
1.1 What is fashion?
1.2 Difference between style, fashion and trend.
1.3 Principles of fashion 08 14
1.4 The intangible of fashion.
1.5 Terminologies associated with clothing: Terms for clothing details, Terms for clothing
articles, Terms for materials and techniques associated with clothing.
Unit–2 Fashion Theory
2.1 Veblen’s theory of leisure class
2.2 Life cycle of fashion, The bell curve
2.3 Haute couture, pert e porter, high fashion, diffusion line, bridge fashion, mass
06 10
manufactured
2.4 Trends in fashion
2.5 Trickle up, trickle down and trickle across theory
2.6 Fads and classic
Unit–3 Elements of Fashion
3.1 Fabric: fabric quality, weave, texture, ornamentation etc.
3.2 Colour
3.3 Fit 06 10
3.4 Fall
3.5 Shapes and Proportions
Unit–4 Factors Affecting Fashion
4.1 The factor of age and gender; geography, culture, economy and class, technology, ‘icon’, 06 10
popularity (fashion leaders and fashion followers), taste, Time period.
Unit-5 Apparel Categorization
5.1 Street wear, Formal wear (business formals), Business casuals, Ethnic wear, Bridal wear
(Western, Indian), Kids wear, Denim wear, Lounge wear, Resort wear, Beach wear, 05 08
Sports wear, Active sports wear.
Unit-6 Fashion Research
6.1 Design brief analysis
6.2 Key words analysis and mind mapping
6.3 Consumer research and boards (psychographic and demographic) 05 08
6.4 Concept boards
6.5 Brand research boards
Unit-7 Fashion Icons, Fashion Designers & Fashion Brands

7.1 Fashion icons, Prominent Indian and International fashion designers and their signature
style. Various national and international fashion brands and analysis of the nature of 03 05
products that they sell.
Unit-8 Sources and Creator of Fashion

13.1 Creator of fashion inspiration 03 05
13.2 Promotion of fashion from designer to closet.
Total 42 70
Sr. Title of Books Author Publication

No.
1 Fashion Design Essentials: 100 Principles of Jay Calderin Rockport Publishers 2011
Fashion Design (Essential Design Handbooks)
2 The Culture of Fashion. A New History of Christopher Breward Manchester University Press 1995
Fashionable Dress (Studies in Design) Paperback
3 Fashion and Modernity Christopher Breward Bloomsbury Academic 2005
4 Fashionology: An Introduction to Fashion Studies Yuniya Kawamura Bloomsbury Academic; 1st edition, 2005
(Dress, Body Culture)
5 Fashion and Its Social Agendas: Class, Gender, Diana Crane University Of Chicago Press 2001
and Identity in Clothing
6 Fashion Cultures: Theories, Explorations and Stella Bruzzi, Pamela Routledge; New edition 2001
Analysis Church Gibson
INDIAN TEXTILES & SURFACE EMBELLISHMENT
1642405 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE: This course will provide basic knowledge, origin, history, design elements and material and methods used for
textile in northern, southern, eastern and western region of India. The knowledge and skills provided by this course would help in
designing and making garments for different regions of India as per local needs/customs/traditions and would also help in creating
new designs by fusion of features of traditional designs of different parts of India.
Objectives: The students will able to:

i. Describe the different historical/ traditional textile and their origin.
ii. Apply appropriate traditional textile crafts in given situations.
CONTENTS : THEORY

Week
Unit–1 Textile of Northern Region. 05 07
2.1 Jammu and Kashmir : Various shawls (Jamawar, Pashmins, Amilkar, kanikar) , Namda,
Gubba.
2.2 Himachal Pradesh : Kullu, Kinnaur shawls.
2.3. Uttar Pradesh : Brocade ( kinkhab, Tanchoi, Abrawan, Gyasar).
Unit–2 Textile of Eastern Region 08 14
3.1 Assam : Muga,Pattu and Eri silk; Mekhla chaddar.
3.2 Manipur : Innaphi
3.3 Meghalaya: Woven textiles
3.4 Nagaland : Naga shawls
3.5 Orissa : Ikkat, Kora-pat sarees
3.6 Sikkim : Carpet weaving, Tangkha painting
3.7 Mizoram : Woven textiles
3.8 Tripura : Woven
3.9 Bihar : Woven
3.10 West Bengal : Jamdani sarees and its types (Daccai,tangil, dhaniakali, Shantipuri etc),
Tussar silk, Baluchari sarees.
Unit–3 Textile of Southern Region 06 12
4.1 Andhra Pradesh: Kalamkari, Pitamber, Pochampalli, Telia rumal, Dharmaveram sarees,
Venkatgiri sarees, Mangalgiri Sarees, Gadhwal Sarees.
4.2 Karnataka: Ilkal sarees.
4.3 Tamilnadu : Kanjiveram
4.4 Kerala : Kasu sari, Set-mundu.
Unit-4 Textile of Western Region 08 14
5.1 Rajasthan : Lehriya and mothra, Batik; Prints-Sanganer, Bagru Daabu ; Pichawai, Pabuji ki
phad, Dhurries
5.2 Gujarat : Mata-ni-pachedi, Rogan, Bandhani, Ajarakh printing, Mashru, Patola, Brocades of
Gujarat.
5.3 Madhya Pradesh: Chanderi sarees, Maheshwari sarees, Bagh prints.
5.4 Maharashtra : Paithani sarees, Mangalkari, Amru & himru.
Unit-5 Surface embellishment through Embroidery 04 05
6.1 Embellishment on fabric/ garment with machine embroidery / Computerized machine
embroidery
6.2 Embellishment on fabric/ garment with hand embroidery and ari work, quilting etc
Unit-6 Surface embellishment through Printing Technology 04 05
7.1 Embellishment on fabric/ garment with block, stencil, screen, Fabric painting etc.
7.2 Industry visit to observe functioning of digital printing, roller and heat transfer printing, and
industrial screen printing.
Unit-7 Surface development through fancy technique 05 08
8.1 Embellishment on fabric/ garment with Crochet- Single chain, slip stitch, single crochet,
double crochet, treble, half single treble, double treble, triple treble etc.
8.2 Macramé- Half hitch, Half knot, Square knot, Lark head , Horizontal cording, Diagonal
cording, Vertical cording, Overhead knot, Josephine knot.
8.3 Tatting- single shuttle and double shuttle.
8.4 Knitting- Purl, Knit, Garter, Rib, Cable and fancy stitch.
Total 42 70
Sr. Title of Books Author Publication

No.
1 Textile and embroidery of India John Irvin Marry Publications, Bombay.
2 Traditional Indian Costume and Textile Dr. Parul Bhatnagar Abhishek publication, Chandigarh
3 Hand woven fabrics of India Jasleen Dhamija and Jyotindra Jain Mapin publishing Pvt.Ltd. Ahmedabad
4 Patolas and resist dyed fabrics of India Mapin publishers
5 The Saree Linda Lyton Thames and Hudson
6 Indian Textiles John Gillow & Nicholas Barnard
7 Textile Traditions of North-east India Shankar K Roy
PATTERN MAKING AND DRAPING LAB
1642406 L T P/S ESE : 50
02
External : 35
CONTENTS : PRACTICAL
List of Experiment:- Hrs/ Marks
Week
Unit-1 1.1 Prepare upper basic block as per measurement 02
1.2 Prepare basic block of sleeve as per measurement 02
1.3 Prepare lower basic block as per measurement 02
Unit-2 2.1 Shift One, two & three dart by pivot method (3 samples). 02
2.2 Shift One, two & three dart by slash method. (3 samples). 02
2.3 Combine two darts and three darts by pivot method. (2 samples ) 02
2.4 Combine two darts and three darts by slash method. (2 samples ) 02
2.5 Divide one dart and two darts by pivot method. (2 samples ) 02
2.6 Divide one dart and two darts by slash method. (2 samples ) 02
2.7 Combine dart and convert into seams. (2 samples ) 02
2.8 Combine dart and convert into gathers. (2 samples ) 02
2.9 Combine dart and convert into yoke. (2 samples ) 02
Unit-3 3.1 Design sleeves for women garments (10 drawings) 02
3.1.1 Prepare set in sleeves through slash method (Total 5+1 fancy sleeves): Gathers at 04
top (puff sleeve), Gathers at bottom (puff sleeve), Gathers at top & bottom (puff
sleeve), Petal, Bell.
3.1.2 Prepare non-set in sleeves through adaptation from basic block of women 04
garment (Total 6 sleeves): Kimono, Raglan pointed, Raglan with round base, Square,
Magyar, Dolman.
3.2 Design flat and raised collars (10 drawings) 02
3.2.1 Prepare flat collars (Total 5 collars): Peter-pan, Sailors collar, Cape collar, Cape 06
collar with scallops at bottom, Peter pan with lace at bottom.
32.2 Prepare raised collars. (Total 5 collars): Chinese collar (mandarin collar), Shirt 06
Collar, Roll collar, Polo collar.
3.3 Design cuffs ( 5 drawings) 02
Unit-4 4.1 Design skirts ( 10 drawings) 02
4.2 Prepare skirts through slash method and drafting method. 06
4.2.1 Skirt with fullness at top (Gathered skirt)
4.2.2 Skirt with fullness at bottom (Flared skirt)
4.2.3 Skirt with fullness at top & bottom (Tiered skirt)
4.2.4 Skirt with yoke, & belt and facing
4.2.5 Half umbrella (Half Circular)
4.2.6 Full umbrella (Full Circular)
4.2.7 Skirt with panels
Unit-5 5.1 Study Size Charts (discuss and prepare size chart of different countries ) 02
Total 60
CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION LAB - II
1642407 L T P/S ESE : 50
03
External : 35
RATIONALE: This course will provide proficiency in upper and lower garments for children, males & females. The skills to be
acquired by this course would help diploma pass outs in planning and supervising operations in industry efficiently and
maintaining the quality of products. Students therefore should try to master these skills. This course will develop the requisite
skills in the students for preparing fashioned garments at par with the industry.

i. Design, cut &stitch the upper garments for males & females.
ii. Design, cut &stitch varieties of skirts.
iii. Prepare lower garments for men and women as per requirement.
iv. Draft, cut and stitch basic trouser for women & men.
v. Draft, cut and stitch Indian bifurcated garment for women.
CONTENTS :PRACTICAL
UNIT List of Experiment Hrs/ Marks

Week
Unit-1 Prepare basic upper block for children. 02
Unit-2 Design shirts for children (Three different designs) 02
Unit–3 Draft, cut and stitch a children shirt (Age group: 8-10 years). 04
Design frocks. (Three different designs) 02
Unit-4 Draft, cut and stitch frock. (Age group: 6-8 years) 04
Prepare basic upper block for men. 02
Unit-5 Design formal shirts. (Three different designs) 02
Unit-6 Draft, cut and stitch a formal shirt for men. 04
Design casual shirts. (Three different designs) 02
Draft, cut and stitch a casual shirt for men. 04
Prepare basic upper block for ladies. 02
Design ladies kurtas. (Three different designs using darts, pleats, tucks, laces, surface 03
embellishment techniques etc.)
Draft, cut and stitch a ladies simple kurta. 04
Unit-7 Draft, cut and stitch basic trouser for men. 04
Draft, cut and stitch basic trouser for women. 04
Design trouser variations (Five design) 03
Design skirt variations (Five design) 03
Draft, cut and stitch any one of the above variations. 05
Draft, cut and stitch Indian bifurcated garment for women (churidar or salwar) 05
Design Indian bifurcated garment variations (Five design) 04
Draft, cut and stitch any one of the above variations. 05
Total 70
INDIAN TEXTILE & SURFACE EMBELLISHMENT LAB
1642408 L T P/S ESE : 50
02
External : 35
RATIONALE: This course will help students to learn about surface development of fabric for garment construction and
development of garment through surface embellishment. It is useful for the students for embellishing the fabric in garment
industry. Imbibed knowledge will be useful for preparing fashioned garments.

i. Embellish fabric using suitable embroidery technique.
ii. Apply different printing technique for embellishment of garments and fabric.
iii. Select Crochet, macramé, Tatting and knitting technique for embellishment of accessories.
List of Experiment Hrs/ Marks

Week
Unit–1 Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on yoke 02
Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on border 02
Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on center panel 02
Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on overall sari 02
Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on sari palav 02
Designing of surface embellishment using embroidery on dress. 02
Prepare a fabric/ garment from embroidery technique by using any one design prepared above. 07
Unit–2 Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on T-shirt, 02
Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on kurti, 02
Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on sari, 02
Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on cushion cover 02
Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on bed sheets/bed spreads 02
Prepare design of surface embellishment using printing on table mats 02
Prepare apparel/ household articles using printing technique prepared above. 05
Prepare various sample of block print on 12”x12” cloth by using wooden block. 04
Prepare various sample of batik on 12”x12” cloth by using wooden block. 04
Prepare various sample of tie and dye on 12”x12” cloth by using following basic techniques. 08
(a) Circle (b) Fold (c) Knot (d) Pleat (e) Sew (f) Marbling
(g) Ruching (h) Traditional bandhani.
Unit–3 Prepare basic samples of knitting/macramé/tatting 06
Prepare jewellery as accessory using techniques such as crochet /knitting /macramé /tatting (Foot 03
wear, hand bags, head wear, etc.)
Prepare Foot wear as accessory using techniques such as crochet /knitting /macramé /tatting 03
Prepare hand bags as accessory using techniques such as crochet /knitting /macramé /tatting 03
Prepare head wear as accessory using techniques such as crochet /knitting /macramé /tatting 03
Total 70
PATTERN MAKING AND DRAPING LAB -TW
Subject Code Term Work No of Period in one session : 50 Credits
1642409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
CONTENTS : TERM WORK

List of Term Work Hrs/Week Marks
Unit-1 1. Measurement taking

2. Drafting Children’s Basic Bodice- 7years (1/4th Scale)
3. Drafting for A-line frock (1/4th Scale)
4. Drafting for Romper (1/4th Scale)
5. Drafting for Waist Line Frock (1/4th Scale)
6. Drafting for Sunsuit (1/4th Scale)
7. Drafting for Female Basic Bodice (1/4th Scale)
8. Drafting for Female Basic Skirt (1/4th Scale)
9. Drafting for Women’s Nighty Block- Bespoke Method (1/4th Scale)
10. Drafting for Women’s Plain Saree Blouse (1/4th Scale)
11. Drafting for Men’s Basic Shirt and Sleeve (1/4th Scale)
12. Drafting for Men’s Flat Front Trouser Block (1/4th Scale)
13. Adapting for Men’s Culoette- from Flat front trouser (1/4th Scale)
Total 50
FASHION SKETCHING - TW
L T P/S Internal Examiner : 15 01
1642410 — — 02 External Examiner : 35
CONTENTS :TERM WORK
List of Term Work Hrs/ Marks

Week
UNIT-1 1.1 Quickly sketch human figures as seen in real life: sketching field trip to: Station,
marketplace, street etc. (3 drawings)
1.2 Make silhouette or ‘Ghost’ drawing of human figures using any thick medium like: Piece of
charcoal, thick brush and ink, Thick felt-tip marker (3 drawings)
1.3 Draw live male standing figure in detail: front, side, back & 3/4thGeometric simplification
of figure: front, side, back & 3/4th; Morphing ‘style lines’ on the human form : like Chest
line, Waist line, Hip line, Knee levels, Centre front, Centre back; Preparing master croquie
Male in front, side, back, 3/4th postures (4 drawings)
1.4 Draw live female standing figure in detail: front/back & 3/4th Geometric simplification:
20
front, side, back & 3/4th; Morphing ‘style lines’ on the human form : like Bust line, Waist
line, Hip line, Empire line, Princess line, Knee levels, Centre front, Centre back. Preparing
master croquie female in front, side, back, 3/4th postures (4 drawings)
1.5 Draw live kids standing figure in detail: front/back & 3/4th Geometric simplification of
figure: front/back & 3/4th. Morphing ‘style lines’ on the human form : like chest line, Waist
line, Hip line, Knee levels, Centre front, Centre back; Preparing master croquie Kids in
front, side, back, 3/4th postures (4 drawings)
1.6 Copy illustration of any famous fashion illustrator using different mediums like: Ink and
brush, felt tip pens, paints, pencil crayons, oil pastels, etc. (1 art work)
UNIT-2 2.1 Design a garment using ‘Point’ as a main feature of the garment (1 drawing)
2.2 Design a garment using ‘Line’ as a main feature of the garment (1 drawing)
2.3 Design a garment using ‘shape and form’ as a main feature of the garment (1 drawing) 04
2.4 Design a garment using ‘Color and Texture’ as a main feature of the garment (1 drawing)
2.5 All exercises to be done on the croquies developed in Unit-I
UNIT-3 Prepare one Sheet in every sub-topics given below
3.1 Repetition and the elements as applied to dress.
3.2 Gradation and the elements as applied to dress.
3.3 Transition and the elements as applied to dress.
07
3.4 Radiation and the elements as applied to dress.
3.5 Rhythm and the elements as applied to dress.
3.6 Emphasis and the elements as applied to dress.
3.7 Balance and the elements as applied to dress.
UNIT-4 4.1 Explore the concept of large top slim bottom; slim top large bottom on the croquies
developed in Unit-I (2 drawings)
4.2 Create an angular/sharp look through Colour, Line, Point and texture on the croquies
4.3 Create a Tubular/flat look through Colour, Line, Point and texture on the croquies
18
4.4 Create a Curvy look through Colour, Line, Point and texture on the croquies developed in
Unit-I(4 drawings)
4.5 Accentuate various zones of the body through Colour, Line, Point and texture on the
croquies developed in Unit-I (4 drawings)
UNIT-5 5.1 Selecte a reference visual (1 sheet)
5.2 Derive colour story and make colour board (1 sheet)
5.3 Derive shapes, lines and textures from the visual (1 sheet)
04
5.4 Design 6 to7 ensembles incorporating the derivations from the visual on the garments (1
sheet: 6 to 7 drawings)
5.5 Compile the process
UNIT-6 6.1 Create concept presentation boards
6.2 Derive silhouettes direction, style direction, color story planning, and material story
planning according to the theme.
6.3 Develop 6 to 7 ensembles on the croquies while incorporating elements and principles of 03
design through darts, pleats, tucks, gathers, ruffles, panels, colour blocking, and other
surface embellishment methods
6.4 Compile the whole process in a booklet format appropriate for buyers.
Total 56
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN CERAMIC ENGINEERING
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1.
Geology 1613401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
2. Chemistry for
1613402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Ceramic Engineering
3. Chemical
1613403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
4. Pottery & Porcelain
1613404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Technology-I
5. Refractory
1613405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Technology-I
Total:- 15 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours of Practical (ESE) Total Pass Marks Credits
Week Exam. Marks in the
Internal (A) External (B) (A+B) Subject
6. Ceramic Processes
1613406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Workshop-II
7. Ceramic Engineering
Workshop Practice–II 1613407 04 04 15 35 50 20 02
(Pottery & Refractory)
8.
Geology 1613408 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 12 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Pass Marks in the
Credits
week Internal External Marks Subject
(X) (Y)
9. Ceramic Processes Workshop-
1613409 03 15 35 50 20 01
I I (TW)
10. Ceramic Engineering
Workshop Practice-II (Pottery 1613410 03 15 35 50 20 02
& Refractory) (TW)
Total:- 06 100
GEOLOGY
1613401 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:
Geology is the science of Earth. The subject has been kept mainly to impart knowledge on Ceramic related Geological topics
covering the history of Earth, plate tectonics, climates, rocks and minerals etc. These deals with Economic Geology besides
various tests and equipment required to carry out those tests are also dealt within the subject.
OBJECTIVE:
The objective is to:
01. Identify rocks and minerals by using Geological methods.
02. Know about classifications of Geology, Rocks, and Minerals.
03. Know about formation of Rock and weather effect on it.
04. Handle Petrological Microscope for analysis and identifications of minerals.
05. Know about Economic Geology related to Ceramic materials.
Contents : Theory Hrs/wee Marks
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: k [10 ]
Introduction with the definition of Geology, History of Geology, Earth Structure,
Origin and Age of Earth, Branches of Geology and Utility of Geology in Ceramic
Industries.
Unit -2 GEOLOGICAL MATERIALS: [ 10 ]
Rocks: Definition, Classification of Rocks, Characteristics of Rocks
and Rock Cycle.
Mineral: Nomenclature and Classification, Crystal Structure, Hardness,
Luster, Colour and Streak, Cleavage, Parting, Fracture and Tenacity
and Specific Gravity etc.
Mineral Classes covering Silicates.
Unit -3 PROPERTIES OF ROCKS AND MINERALS: [ 08 ]
Physical Properties of Rocks and Minerals used in Ceramic Industries such as:
Kaolin, Fireclay, Ball clay, Feldspar, Talc, Sillimanite, Kyanite, Andulasite,
Bauxite, Topaz, Garnet, Limestone, Magnesite, Dolomite, Olivine, Zircon, Mica,
Quartz, Steatite, Granite, Corundum and Diamond etc.
Unit -4 GEOLOGICAL METHODS: [ 08]

Field Methods, Petrology, Structural Geology and Stratigraphy.
Unit -5 APPLIED GEOLOGY: [ 07 ]
Economic Geology related to Ceramic Materials such as Clay, Quartz and
Feldspar etc.
Engineering Geology.
Unit-6 OPTICAL MINERLOGY: [10]
Introduction, Petrological Microscope, Properties of Light, Refraction, Double
Refraction, Polarized light, Nicole Prism, Observation of minerals and
Procedure for the Identification of Minerals in section etc.
Unit-7 PLANETARY GEOLOGY, NATURAL HAZARDS, GEOLOGICAL [07]
SURVEY OF INDIA:
Planetary Geology of other Planets.
Natural Hazards such as: Earthquake, Tsunami, Volcanoes and Avalanches etc.
Geological Survey of India: Its Role and Function.
Total 60
Books Recommended:-
1. Introduction of Physical Geology - A.K. Dutta
2. Optical Mineralogy - A.F. Rogers and P.F. Kerr

CHEMISTRY FOR CERAMIC ENGINEERING
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1613402 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:
Chemistry is important to be studied by Ceramic Engineers as it gives basic knowledge with fundamentals applicable in
applied field of Technology. It deals with both physical and Industrial Chemistry. Theory is always backed by practice and so
the basic knowledge of Chemistry helps in understanding manufacture and properties of ceramic products.
OBJECTIVE:
The objective is to know about:
1. Fundamental Concept of Physical chemistry
2. Industrial value of Chemistry in Ceramic Engg.

Unit -1 GASES AND FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPT: [ 15 ]
Ideal & Real gases. Different unit of gas constant equation of state Kinetic theory of
gases. Chemical equilibrium Law of mass action, Le-chattelier principle PH value,
surface tension, viscosity, phase rule one and two component system.
Unit -2 CHEMICAL KINETICS: [ 10 ]
Rate of reaction, Order of reaction, molecularity of reaction, Determination of first
order reaction, concept of activation energy
Unit -3 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY: [ 25 ]

Preparation, Properties and Uses of the Compounds used in Ceramic
Industry.
Sodium Carbonate, Sodium Silicate, Sodium Sulphate, Barium Carbonate, Calcium
Carbonate, Calcium Sulphate. Plaster of Paris and Gypsum, Magnese Oxide, Zinc
Oxide, Lead Oxide, Tin Oxide, Potassium Chromate and Dichromate, Potassium
Permagnet Borax, Copper Sulphate, Cuprous and Cupric Oxide, Alumina, Ferrous
Sulphate. Hardness of water, Estimation of Hardness by EDTA Method.
Total 50
Books Recommended:-
1. Physical Chemistry - Puri and Sharma
2. Physical Chemistry - Bahl and Tuli
3. Inorganics Chemistry - Puri and Sharma
4. Engineering Chemistry - O.P. Agrawal

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
Theory No of Period in one session : Credits
1613403 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:
This subject deals Chemical Engineering applied in Ceramic Industries and so it is an important subject. The students are
required to know various aspects of operations carried out in Ceramic industries such as heat transfer, size reduction, mixing
and drying etc. It is Chemistry based science with application technology.
OBJECTIVE:
1. Flow of fluids.
2. Size reduction and separation.
3. Material handling to prepare ceramic body for shaping.
4. Drying and the equipment used to carry out drying.
5. Heat flow and losses.

Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: [05 ]
Definition of Chemical Engineering and Concept of Chemical Engineering applied
to Ceramic.
Unit -2 FLOW OF FLUIDS: [ 10 ]

General concept of Flow of Fluids, Types of Fluid Flow, Fluid Properties and
Concept of Orifice and Ventury use in Flow of fluid etc.
Unit -3 SIZE PEDUCTION AND SEPARATION: [ 08 ]

Size Reduction-
Concept of Size Reduction and Rettinger’s Law of Crusing.
Crushers such as: Jaw Crusher, Gyratory Crusher, Disintegrator and Crushing Rolls
etc.
Grinders such as: Ball Mill, Pot Mill and Tube Mill etc.
Size Separation
Screens, Grizzles, Trommels, Shaking Screens and Vibrating Screens etc.
Unit -4 CONVEYING: [ 08 ]
Definition of Conveying, Type of Conveyors used: Belt Conveyor, Screw
Conveyor, Elevator and Chain Conveyor etc.
Unit -5 MIXING: [07 ]
-Role of Mixing, Equipment used for Mixing: Paddle Stirrer, Propeller, Kneader,
Dry Mixer, and Muller Mixer etc.
Unit -6 DEWATERING: [ 05 ]
Dewatering Concept in Ceramic Industry, Dewatering Equipment used: Plate and
Frame Fitter Press etc.
Unit -7 DRYING: [07]
Concept and Role of Drying, Drying Equipment used: Compartmental Dryer, Drum
Dryer, Rotary Drier and Tunnel Dryer etc.
Unit -8 HEAT TRANSFER: [ 10 ]
Conduction, Heat flow through composite wall, convection, radiation, double pipe
heat exchanger.
Total 60
Books Recommended:-
-
1 Introduction to Chemical Engineering Bedger and Banchero
-
2 Unit Operation Mc Cabe and Smith
POTTERY AND PORCELAIN TECHNOLOGY – I
1613404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:
Pottery is an important Ceramic Engineering subject dealing with forming a clay body in to objects of required shape. This
is an ancient art work which was made by potters using local clay available there. It has transformed in to modern pottery
products with developed technological inputs.
OBJECTIVE:
1. Contemporary and Modern Pottery and Porcelain Products.
2. Raw Materials for pottery and porcelain.
3. Process of Manufacture for various Pottery and Porecelain Products.
4. Decorating and Glazing.
5. Plaster of Paris.
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: [ 10 ]
Definition, History, Classification of Pottery and Porcelain, Products of Pottery.
Unit -2 RAW MATERIALS: [ 10 ]

Pottery and Porcelain Raw Materials such as: Clay, Quartz, Feldspar, Whiting, Talc,
Pyrophylite, Nepheline, Syenite, Bone Ash, Kyanite. Colouring Materials and
Ceramic Transfer papers etc.
Unit -3 BATCH CALCULATION: [ 10 ]
Various type of Batch used in Pottery and Porcelain and Batch Calculation.
Unit -4 PLASTER OF PARIS: [ 03 ]
Plaster Paris: Raw Material, Manufacture. Properties and Use.
Unit -5 GLAZES AND DECORATING: [ 07 ]

Glazing: Types of Glaze, Raw Materials for Glaze, Colouring ingredients,
Manufacture and Defects of Glaze.
Decorating: Methods of Decoration and Glaze Application.
Unit -6 PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING: [ 20 ]
Body Preparation: Crushing and Grinding, Clay Preparation, Blunging, Agitating,
Ball Milling, Screening, Iron separation, Dewatering, Pugging and Kneading etc.
Methods of Shaping: Jigger and Jollying, Shaping on Potter’s Wheel, Casting
Shaping on C N C Machine, Copying, pressing and Mould making etc.
Drying and Firing: Drying Technology and Dryers used for Drying, Firing
Technology and Kilns/Furnaces used for Firing.
Inspection, Packing and Dispatch.
Total 60
BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1. Elements of Ceramics -F. H. Norton
2. Ceramic Fabrication Process -W.D. Kingrey
3. Modern Pottery Manufacture -H.N. Bose
4. Industrial Ceramics - Singer and Singer
REFRACTORY TECHNOLOGY – I
1613405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:
Refractory Technology is an important subject which deals with heat resistant materials and products, refractory is an
essential material used in all kind of furnaces and therefore knowledge of this technology is vital for the ceramic Engineers
It also provides opportunity to know various Kilns/furnaces used in Ferrous and Non Ferrous industries besides its use in
Ceramic industries.
OJECTIVE:
The Objective is to know about:
1. Refractory and its classification.
2. Raw Materials and plant and Machinery.
3. Methods adopted in making Refractory along with the use of Dryers and Kilns used in Refractory
Manufacture.
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: [ 05 ]
Definition, History, Concept and Role of Refractory.
Unit -2 CLASSIFICATION OF REFRACTORY: [ 05 ]
Based on Chemical Composition: Acidic, Basic and Neutral Refractory.
Based on Manufacturing Method: Shaped and Unshaped (Monolithic).
Based on Fusion Temperature: Normal, High and Super Refractory.
Unit -3 RAW MATERIALS: [ 12 ]
Refractory Raw Materials such as: Fire Clay, Alumina, Kyanite, Sillimanite,
Andulasite, Bauxite, Quartzite, Magnesite. Chromite, Dolomite, Forsterite, Zircon
and Silicon Carbide etc.
Their Properties uses and Occurrence.
Unit -4 PLANT AND MACHINERY: [ 12 ]
Crusher and Grinder: Jaw Crusher, Cone Crusher Disintegrator, Impact Mill and
Ball Mill etc.
Other Machinery: Vibrating Screen, Magnetic Separator, Pug Mill, Mixer, Screw
Press, Toggle Press and Hydraulic Press etc.
Unit -5 DRYER AND KILN: [ 10 ]
-Dryer: Function of Drier, and Type of Dryer Such As Batch and Continuous
Dryers.
-Kiln: Function of Kiln, Type of Kilns such as: Up Draft Kiln, Down Draft Kiln,
Chamber Kiln, Tunnel Kiln, Rotary Kiln, and Shaft Kiln etc.
Unit -6 PRODUCTS: [ 10 ]
Refractory Bricks and Shapes, Crucible, Glass Pots, Saggers, Furnace Blocks
Muffles, Sagger Cones, Burner Blocks and Silicon Carbide Troughs etc.
Unit -7 QUALITY CONTROL: [ 06 ]
Concept of Quality Control and I S O Specifications.
Total 60
BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1. Refractories and Their Manufacture, Properties and Uses - M.L .Mishra
2. Handbook on Refractories - D.N.Nandi
3. Refractories - F.H.Norton
4. Technology of Ceramic and Refractories -P.P.Bunikov
5. Steel Plant Refractory -J.H.Chesters
CERAMIC PROCESSES WORKSHOP -II
Practical No of Period in one session : Credits
1613406 02
External : 35
Rationale : -
The rationale behind this subject is to familiarize the Ceramic students with various process techniques adopted in
Industries and Laboratories in making different Ceramic Products.
Objective :-
The Objective is to make students conversant with -
1. Process techniques used in pottery, Glass, Refractory etc.
2. High-tech process adopted in advanced ceramics processing.

Unit -1 Kneading, wedging, carving, fluting, burnishing, Lithography, salt [ 20 ]
glazing, ash glazing etc.
Unit -2 Chemical bonding, electro casting, vitrification etc. [ 20 ]

Unit -3 Float glass process, Injection moulding, turning on CNC m/c [ 20 ]
Unit -4 Advanced ceramics processing for carbon, oxide ceramics, optical ceramics, [ 30]
electro-ceramics, Bio and medical ceramics, Ceramic coatings, sol-gel,
combustion engine parts, balls of bearings etc.
Total 90
Books Recommended :-
1. The Ceramics Bible Louisa Taylor
2. Advanced Ceramics Shingeyuki Somiya
3. Ceramic Fabrication Processes W.D. Kingery
CERAMIC ENGINEERING WORKSHOP PRACTICE – II
(POTTERY AND REFRACTORY)
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 50
1613407 02
External : 35
RATIONALE:
This Workshop Practice has been kept to teach Practical method of making Pottery and Refractory Products using the
required raw materials. Use of various machinery used for the purpose are also taught and practiced while making the
products.
OBJECTIVE:
1. Working with hand and practice the shaping techniques.
2. The machine used for the purpose.
3. Practicing various care and precautions required for getting good products without defects.

Unit -1 POTTERY: [ 05 ]
Such as for: Terra Cotta, and Earthenware etc.
Unit -2 CASTING SLIP MAKING: [ 05 ]
Raw material selection, mixing, Casting Slip making, Pouring in the Mould, Taking
out the Casted ware for inspection and finishing etc.
Unit-3 MAKING OF PLASTER OF PARIS: [05]
Making of Plaster of Paris by Gypsum.
Unit-4 MAKING OF MOULD: [10]
Mould making by using the Plaster of Paris and Making of Rubber Mould.
Unit-5 SHAPING OF POTTERY BY HAND MOULDING AND SLIP CASTING ETC. [10]
Shaping of Pottery by using: Manual Process Potter’s Wheel, Jigger Jolly, Pug Mill,
Pressing and Casting etc.
Unit-6 PREPARATION OF FRIT AND GLAZE: [10]
Selection and Batch Making of Frit, Making of Frit in Smelter, Quenching of molten
Frit in water, Taking out and drying and storing in store for use.
Glaze Making for application on Pottery wares.
Use of Ceramic Transfer Papers Pottery wares.
REFRACTORY:
Unit-1 RAW MATERIAL PREPARATION: [05]
Preparation of Plastic and Non Plastic Clay and Fire Clay etc. for making Refractory
Bricks.
Unit-2 SHAPING OF REFRACTORY BY: HAND MOULDING, PRESSING AND [10]
CASTING:
Shaping of Refractory Bricks and Shapes by:
- Hand Moulding.
- Tamping.
- Pressing.
- Casting.
Unit-3 MAKING OF SAGGER: [10]
- By Hand Moulding.
- By Pressing.
Unit-4 MAKING OF MUFFLES: [05]
- By Manual Process.
- By Pressing.
Unit-5 DRYING OF REFRACTORY: [05]
- By natural Process.
- By using Dryer.
Unit-6 FIRING OF REFRACTORY: [10]

Firing of Refractory Bricks and Shapes in a Furnace/Kin.
Total 90
BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1. The Craft of Ceramics - Geza de Vegh and Albert Mandi
2. Ceramic Fabrication Process - W.D.Kingrey
3. Monolithic Refractories -Subrata Banerjee
GEOLOGY LAB
L T P/S ESE : 50
02
External : 35
RATIONALE:
This Geology Lab has been kept to familiarize the students with rocks and minerals used in Ceramic Industry. Also they
carry out various lab practices o identify raw materials. They know about various equipment used to conduct experiments in
Geology Lab.
OBJECTIVE:
The Objective is to provide exposure towards laboratory practices carried out to:
01. Identify Ceramic Raw Materials.
02. Know Petrological Microscope with its function.
03. Find out specific gravity of mineral etc.
Unit -1 INDENTIFICATION OF ROCKS AND MINERALS SUCH AS: [ 30 ]
Basalt, sand stone, kaolin, Quartz Feldspar, Calcite, Beryl, Bauxite, Lime Stone,
Hematite and Magnesite etc.
Unit -2 DETERMINATION OF SPECIFIC GRAVITY USING STEEL YARD [ 25 ]
BALANCE FOR:
Quartz, Feldspar, Calcite, Bauxite, Lime Stone, Magnesite and Hematite etc.
Unit -3 MINERALOGICAL ANALYSIS: [ 25 ]

Study of Petrological Microscope with respect to:
Parts, Components and their Functions.
Working Principle.
Preparation of Slides For analysis.
Unit -4 BLOW PIPE ANALYSIS OF: [ 10 ]
Gypsum, Calcite and Beryl etc.
Total 90
Books Recommended:-
1 Introduction of Physical Geology - A. K. Datta
2 Optical Mineralogy - A. F. Rogers & P. F. Kerr

CERAMIC PROCESSES WORKSHOP II - TW
1613409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Rationale : -
The rationale in keeping this subject is to give them full knowledge of the process with clarity of its operational
advantages.
Objective :-
Making the ceramic students fully conversant with the techniques is the objective by exploring them on -
1. Process techniques used in pottery, Glass, Refractory etc.
2. High-tech process adopted in advanced ceramics processing.
CONTENTS : TERM WORK Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 Kneading, wedging, carving, fluting, burnishing, Lithography, salt [ 20 ]
glazing, ash glazing etc.
Unit -2 Chemical bonding, electro casting, vitrification etc. [ 20 ]

Unit -3 Float glass process, Injection moulding, turning on CNC m/c [ 20 ]
Unit -4 Advanced ceramics processing for carbon, oxide ceramics, optical [ 30]
ceramics, electro-ceramics, Bio and medical ceramics, Ceramic
coatings, sol-gel, combustion engine parts, balls of bearings etc.
Total 90
1. The Ceramics Bible Louisa Taylor
2. Advanced Ceramics Shingeyuki Somiya
3. Ceramic Fabrication Processes W.D. Kingery
CERAMIC ENGINEERING WORKSHOP PRACTICE II
(POTTERY AND REFRACTORY) - TW
1613410 L T P/S Internal : 15 02
RATIONALE:
This Workshop Practice has been kept to teach Practical method of making Pottery and Refractory Products using the
required raw materials. Use of various machinery used for the purpose are also taught and practiced while making the
products.
OBJECTIVE:
1. Working with hand and practice the shaping techniques.
2. Familiarizing with the machine used for the purpose.
3. Practicing various care and precautions required for getting good products without defects.

POTTERY:
Unit -1 Such as for: Terra Cotta, and Earthenware etc. [ 03 ]
Unit -2 CASTING SLIP MAKING: [ 03 ]
Raw material selection, mixing, Casting Slip making, Pouring in the Mould, Taking
out the Casted ware for inspection and finishing etc.
Unit-3 MAKING OF PLASTER OF PARIS: [10]
Making of Plaster of Paris by Gypsum.
Unit-4 MAKING OF MOULD: [03]
Mould making by using the Plaster of Paris and Making of Rubber Mould.
Unit-5 SHAPING OF POTTERY BY HAND MOULDING AND SLIP CASTING ETC. [03]
Shaping of Pottery by using: Manual Process Potter’s Wheel, Jigger Jolly, Pug Mill,
Pressing and Casting etc.
Unit-6 PREPARATION OF FRIT AND GLAZE: [03]
Selection and Batch Making of Frit, Making of Frit in Smelter, Quenching of
molten Frit in water, Taking out and drying and storing in store for use.
Glaze Making for application on Pottery wares.
Use of Ceramic Transfer Papers Pottery wares.
REFRACTORY:
Unit-1 RAW MATERIAL PREPARATION: [03]
Preparation of Plastic and Non Plastic Clay and Fire Clay etc. for making
Refractory Bricks.
Unit-2 SHAPING OF REFRACTORY BY: HAND MOULDING, PRESSING AND [03]
CASTING:
Shaping of Refractory Bricks and Shapes by:
- Hand Moulding.
- Tamping.
- Pressing.
- Casting.
Unit-3 MAKING OF SAGGER: [03]
- By Hand Moulding.
- By Pressing.
Unit-4 MAKING OF MUFFLES: [03]

- By Manual Process.
- By Pressing.
Unit-5 DRYING OF REFRACTORY: [03]
- By natural Process.
- By using Dryer.
Unit-6 FIRING OF REFRACTORY: [10]

Firing of Refractory Bricks and Shapes in a Furnace/Kin.
Total 50
BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
1 The Craft of Ceramics - Geza de Vegh and Albert Mandi
2 Ceramic Fabrication Process - W.D.Kingrey
3 Monolithic Refractories - Subrata Banerjee
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
THEORY
Sr. SUBJECT SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION-SCHEME
No. CODE SCHEME
Week of Assessment Test Semester Marks Marks Marks in
Exam. (TA) (CT) Exam.(ESE) (A+B+C) ESE the
A B C
1. Technology of 1614401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03

Organic
Chemicals
2. Fluid Flow 1614402 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Operation
3. Plant Utilities 1614403 02 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 02
4. Mechanical 1614404 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03

Technology 03
5. Electrical 1614405 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Engineering &
Electronics
Total :- 16 350 500
PRACTICAL
Sr. SUBJECT SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION-SCHEME
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours Practical (ESE) Total Pass Credits
Week of Marks Marks
Exam. Internal(A) External(B) (A+B) in the
Subject
6. Technology of Organic
1614406 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Chemicals Lab
7. Fluid Flow Operation

1614407 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Lab
8. Electrical Engineering
1614408 03 03 15 35 50 20 01
& Electronics Lab
Total :- 07 150
TERM WORK
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Pass Marks Credits
SUBJECT
No. CODE Week Internal External Marks in the
Examiner Examiner (X+Y) Subject
(X) (Y)
9. Plant Utilities (TW) 1614409 02 07 18 25 10 01
10. Visual Basic 6.0

1614410 03 15 35 50 20 02
(TW)
11. Professional
1614411 05 07 18 25 10 02
Practices-IV (TW)
Total :- 10 100
Total Periods per week Each of duration One Hour 33 Total Marks = 750 24
TECHNOLOGY OF ORGANIC CHEMICALS
(CHEMICAL ENGINEERING)
1614401
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Name of Topics Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 Alcohol Based Industries.
1.1- Manufacture of Alcohol by Corn and Molasses.
1.2- Acetic Acid. 06 12
1.3- Ethyl Acetate.
1.4- Butanol
Unit -2 Paint Industry.
2.1- Paints. 05 06
2.2- Varnishes.
2.3- Lacquers.
Unit - 3 Oil ,soap & Detergents.
3.1- Hydrogenation of Edible oil.
3.2- Manufacturing of Oil. 08 14
3.3- Manufacturing of Detergents.
3.4- Manufacturing of Soap.
Unit – 4 Pulp and Paper Industry.
4.1- Manufacturing of Pulp. 05 10
4.2- Manufacturing of Paper.
4.3- Manufacturing of Rayon.
Unit – 5 Polymer/ Plastic Industry.
5.1- Manufacturing of Poly Vinyl Chloride.
5.2- Polyethylene.
5.3- Polystyrene. 15 18
5.4- Polyester.
5.5- Plastic (Poly Carbonate)
5.6- Thermocol.
Unit – 6 Phenol
6.1 Introduction to various processes manufacturing of Phenol.
6.2 Cumene process 09 10
6.3 Toluene oxidation
6.4 Rasching process
Total 48 70

Dryden Outline of Chemical Technology M. Gopala Rao East West Publishers 1997, New Delhi.
Shreve Chemical Process Industries George Austin Mc Graw Hill Publication 1984,Auckland
Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology Kerk & Othmer John Wiley and Sons 1981, New York
Chemical Process Organic Synthesis P. H. Groggins Mc Graw Hill 1958, Auckland.
Handbook of Industrial Chemistry VOL. II Davis. K. H C.B.S Publication 2004, New Delhi
Faith, Kaynes and Clark’s Industrial Frederick A, Cowerntreim & John Wiley and Sons 1935, New York
Chemistry Marguerites K. Moran
FLUID FLOW OPERATIONS
1614402
L T P/S ESE : 70
04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS THEORY
Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 1.1 Properties of fluids
1.1.1 Density & viscosity (absolute & kinematic)
1.1.2 Vapor pressure & surface tension 04 08
1.1.3 Principle of Hydrostatic Equilibrium
Manometers- Types ( U, Inclined, Differential ),Equations, Uses
1.2 Types of fluids
1.2.1 Ideal & Actual fluids,
1.2.2 Compressible & Incompressible Fluids
1.2.3 Newtonian & Non-Newtonian fluids including time dependent & time
Independent fluids
Unit -2 Flow of Fluids (Incompressible)
2.1 Equation of continuity, Calculation of mass flow rate, volumetric flow
rate, average velocity & mass velocity
2.2 Bernoulli’s equation for ideal fluid, actual fluid & with pump work done.
Correction in Bernoulli’s equation
2.3 Reynolds experiment & its significance in determining turbulent, laminar
& transition regime.
2.4 Concept of Boundary layer, Boundary layer formation in straight tubes
2.5 Form friction & skin friction: Relationship between pressure drop, wall
shear & shear stress
2.6 Laminar flow in circular pipe. Relationship between maximum &
average velocity in laminar flow. The Hagen-Poiseuille equation.
2.7 Friction in pipe, Fanning’s friction factor, the standard friction factor
chart. Friction losses due to sudden expansion/reductio of pipe & in 20 32
pipefittings. Definition of equivalent length of pipe fittings.
2.8 Measurement of fluid flow with the help of flow meters
2.8.1 Venturimeter: Construction, Principle, Working, Coefficient of
discharge, Calibration, Derivation for calculating the flow rates.
2.8.2 Orifice meter: Construction, Principle, Working, Coefficient of
discharge, Calibration, Derivation for calculating the flow rates.
2.8.3 Rotameter: Construction, Principle, Working, Calibration.
2.8.4 Pitot tube: Construction, Principle, and Working.
2.9 Measurement of flow in open channels with help of notches ( V- notch,
square-notch)
Unit - 3 Pipe, fittings & valves

3.1 MOC
3.2 Standard sizes of pipes, wall thickness, Schedule number 04 10
3.3 Joints & fittings Gate valve, Globe valve, Ball valve, Needle
valve, NRV, Butterfly valve, Diaphram Valve
Unit - 4 Transportation of Fluids
4.1 Pumps
4.1.1 Centrifugal Pump: Parts of centrifugal pump, Working of Centrifugal
20 20
pump, Performance of centrifugal pump (Characteristics of centrifugal
pump), Characteristics
curves, priming
4.1.2 Developed Head, Cavitations, NPSH Priming.
4.1.3 Positive displacement reciprocating pumps based on pressure
component & based on action of piston/plunger, their
construction & working
4.1.4 Gear pump, its construction & working
4.1.5 Diaphragm pump, its utility, construction & working
4.2 Fans, blowers & compressors:
4.2.1 Fans & their applications
4.2.2 Blowers & Compressors, Reciprocating & centrifugal compressors
Vacuum Pumps, jet ejectors, its working & application
Total 48 70

Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering
McCabe, Smith McGraw Hill
Introduction to Chemical Engineering
Badger & Banchero McGraw Hill
Chemical Engineering Volume-I Richardson & Coulson
Pergamon Press
PLANT UTILITIES

1614403
L T P/S ESE : 70
02
02 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Importance of utilities :
Sources of water, hard and soft water2
1.1 Requisites of industrial water and its uses
1.2 Methods of water treatment
1.2.1 Chemical softening
06 10
1.2.2 Demineralization SS
1.3 Resins used for water softening
1.4 Reverse osmosis and membrane separation
1.5 Effects of impure boiler feed water & its treatments.
1.6.1 Scale & sludge formation
1.6.2 Corrosion
1.6.3 Priming & foaming
1.6.4 Caustic embrittlement.
Unit -2 Refrigeration :
2.1 Refrigeration cycles
2.2 Different methods of refrigeration used in industry
2.2.1 Vapour compression
2.2.2 Vapour absorption: Lithium bromide
(eco-Friendly)
07 16
2.3 Different refrigerants
2.3.1 Monochlorodifluoro methane (R-22)
2.3.2 Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC-Free)
2.3.3 Secondary refrigerants: Brines
2.4 Simple calculation of C.O.P. Refrigerating effects.
Unit - 3 Steam and steam generation :

3.1 Properties of steam
3.2 Problems based on enthalpy calculation for wet
steam, dry saturated steam, superheated steam
3.3 Types of steam generator / boilers: water tube & fire tube
3.3.1 Solid fuel fired boiler.
3.3.2 waste gas fired boiler.
3.3.3 Waste heat boiler. 10 22
3 3.4 Fluidized bed boiler.
3.4 Scaling, trouble shooting, preparing boiler for
inspection
3.5 Steam traps, boiler mountings and accessories
3.6 Boiler Act
Unit – 4 Psychrometry :
4.1 Properties of Air-water vapours.
4.2 Use of humidity chart 06 14
4.3 Equipment used for humidification, dehumidification
Evaporative cooling, spray ponds, cooling towers
Unit – 5 Air :
5.1 Use of Compressed air, process air and instrument air 02 05
5.2 Process of getting instrument air.
Unit - 6 Non steam heating system
Thermic fluid heater, Downtherm heater
01 03
6.1 Temperature range
6.2 Principle, construction & working.
Total 32 70

Thermal Engineering P. L. Balleney Khanna Publisher New Delhi
Industrial water treatment S.T. Powel McGraw Hill, Newyork
Boiler operations Chattopadhya Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

Perry’s chemical Engineer’s Handbook Perry R.H. Green D.W. McGraw Hill, Newyork
Elements of Heat Engines Vol – II,III R.C. Patel C.J. Karmchandani Acharya Book Depot. Vadodara
Refrigeration & Air conditioning P .N .Ananthanarayan Tata McGraw Hill
Industrial chemistry JAIN & JAIN -

MECHANICAL TECHNOLOGY

No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 100 03
1614404
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY
Name of the Topics Hrs/ week Marks

Unit -1 Belt, Rope & Chain Drives
1.1 Construction
1.2 Specification
1.3 Selection and application of flat belt, V-belt, rope & pulleys.
1.4 Open and cross belt drivers.
1.5 Length of belt. 08 08
1.6 Velocity ratio & slip.
1.7 Method of minimizing slip.
1.8 Chain drives Introduction.
1.9 Types of Chains.
1.10 Their selection and application.
Unit -2 Gear drives Introduction
2.1 Types of Gear 08 10
Spur, Helical, Bevel, Sprial & worm gear.
2.6 Terminology and fields of applications.
2.7 Number of teeth and speed ratio.
2.8 Simple, Compound & epicyclic gear train.
2.9 Reverted gear train.
2.10 Selection and application of speed ratio.
2.11 Simple problem involving Calculation of speed ratio.
Unit - 3 Key & Couplings
3.1 Alignment of shafts.
3.2 Function & types of keys, coupling
3.2.1 Rigid (Sleeve, Clamp or Compression and Flange) 04 08
3.2.2 Flexible (Bush type, Hook’s joint & Oldham’s)
Unit – 4 Bearings
4.1 Classification
4.2 Sliding contact bearing.
4.3 Solid Journal bearing.
4.4 Bashed bearing. 04 08
4.5 Split bearing & plummer block.
4.6 Thrust bearing (Step & Collar)
4.7 Kolling contact bearing.
Unit – 5 Seals
5.1 Static seals.
5.2 Dynamic seals.
5.3 Oil Seals. 04 04
Mechanical seals & its Classification.
Unit - 6 Welding, Soldering & Brazing
6.1 Welding.
6.1.1 Introduction.
Types of welding Processes: Gas welding principles & Processes (Oxy-
acetylene gas welding with equipment & techniques only.) Arc welding
principles & processes like carbon arc, submerged arc & TIG & MIG,
Resistance welding principle & processes like spot welding & seam welding.
6.1.2 Various types & application of welded joints.

6.1.3 Edge preparation for welding & prevention of distortion.
6.1.4 Basic weld symbols.
08 12
6.2 Soldering.
6.2.1 Introduction
6.2.2 Soft Soldering.
6.2.3 Hard soldering.
6.3 Brazing
6.3.1 Introduction
6.3.2 Types of Brazing.
6.3.3 Brazing Fluxes.
6.3.4 Advantages of Brazing.
Unit – 7 Sheet Metal Work
7.1 Sheet Metals.
7.1.1 Ferrous & non Ferrous sheet Materials.
7.1.2 Composit sheet materials. 04 05
7.1.3 General properties of sheet metals.
7.1.4 Specification sheet metal gauge, hand tool’s used.
Unit – 8 Bending & Rolling.
8.1 Term associated with bending.
8.2 V-bending & U-bending
8.3 Bending Techniques.
8.4 Bending disc. 04 08
8.5 Pipe & Conduit bending.
8.6 Manual & Power rolls.
8.7 Rolling Techniques.
8.8 Ring rolling & cone rolling.
Unit - 9 Rivetted and Bolted Joints.
Standard rivets & rivet heads.
9.1.1 Types of riveted joints.
9.2 Types of bolts.
9.2.1 High strength Friction grip bolts.
04 07
9.2.2 Application & Advantages.
9.2.3 Types of washer & other locking arrangement.
Total 48 70

Elements of Workshop S.K. Hajara Choudhary A.K. Hajara Media Promoters and
Technology Choudhary Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Vol – I- II Technology
Welding O.P Khanna -
Theory of Machine R.S. Khurmi -
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING & ELECTRONICS
1614405
L T P/S ESE : 70
04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Name of Topics Hrs/ Marks

week
Unit -1 Basic Concepts & Principle Of Electrcal Engineering
1.1 Ohm’s Law, Laws of Electromagnetic Induction
1.2 A.C. fundamental
04 03
Concept of 1ϕ & 3ϕ AC Supply,
P.F, Active & Reactive Power.
Unit -2 D-C Motors
2.1 D.C. Motors working Principle
2.2 Types of D.C. Motor 06 04
2.3 Characteristics & Applications.
Unit – 3 Transformer
3.1 Working Principle.
3.2 Construction. 04 05
3.3 Core type & Shell type transformer.
3.4 EMF Equation.
3.5 Turn ratio, Current ratio & Voltage ratio.
3.6 Concept of Auto transformer & 3ϕ transformer.
Unit – 4 A.C. Motors
4.1 Classification
4.2 3ϕ induction Motor-Principle, Construction, Types &
Application. 06 07
4.3 1ϕ Induction Motors types & Applications.
4.4 Synchronous Motors Principle of Operation, Application.
Unit – 5 Electrical Drivers
5.1 Advantages of Electrical Drivers.
5.2 Classification 04 05
5.3 Selection of Drive.
5.4 Different Encloses & Methods of Mounting.
Unit – 6 Electrical Heating
1.1 Principle of Electrical Heating.
1.2 Resistance Heating, Induction Heating 04 07
& di-electric Heating Principles.
1.3 Procedure to select furnace for Heating.
Unit - 7 Awareness about Electro Metallurgical System
7.1 Concept of Electrolysis & Electroplating 04 04
7.2 Electroextraction.
TOTAL 32 35
Contents : Name of the Topic (Section –II – Applied Electronics) Hrs/ week Marks
Unit -1 Introduction To Electronics
1.1 Conductors, Semiconductors, Insulators.
1.2 Energy level diagram
1.3 Doping, P type & N types semiconductors
1.4 Active & Passive components
1.5 Resistors, inductors, capacitors- their symbol and their use only.
1.6 Diode
08 07
PN junction diode- symbol, Construction, Working, Characteristics,
Applications
Zener diode - symbol, Construction, Working, Characteristics,
Applications
Light emitting diode - symbol, Construction, Working,
Characteristics, Applications
Unit -2 Power Supply
2.1 Need for power supply. 06 07
2.2 Block diagram of a Power supply
Rectifier – Half wave , Full wave Rectifier( centre tapped &
Bridge Circuit diagram, Working, waveforms only
Comparison on the basis of Circuit diagram, Working, waveforms
only ( No mathematical treatment)
2.3 Filter – Definition, & function (No Circuits)
Unit -3 Transistors
3.1 TRANSISTOR- Symbol, types( PNP, NPN), Working. Applications(
NO Configurations, Characteristics)
3.2 Transistor as an Amplifier
06 07
3.3 Single stage CE amplifier – Circuit, Working principle.
3.4 2 Stage RC coupled Amplifier- Circuit diagram & function of various
components used. ( No freq response & working)
Unit -4 Operational Amplifier
4.1 Operational Amplifier – Symbol, Ideal characteristics, Block
diagram, Applications.
4.2 Inverting Amplifier, Non inverting Amplifier( Only circuits, No 06 07
Derivations) , Relationship between input, output & circuit
components.
4.3 Voltage follower circuit & its applications.
Unit -5 Digital Circuits
5.1 Digital signal.
5.2 Logic gates AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR gates- Symbol, logical
expressions, Truth table.
5.3 Universal gates- NAND & NOR gates as universal gates. 06 07
5.4 Digital display- 7 segment display, LCD display – Working
principle & Applications only. (handset to handset)
5.2 Block diagram of mobile phone system and its operation.
TOTAL 32 35
Electrical Technology - Vol 1.1 B.L. Theraja Nirja Construction &
Development Co Ltd
Electrical Technology - B.L. Theraja Nirja Construction &
Development Co Ltd
Arts & Science of Uhllsation of Electrical Energy H. Partab --
--
Electrical Power Soni, Gupta, Bhatnagar
-
Electrical M/C J.B. Gupta -
-
Moern Digital Electronics R.P JAIN -
-
Basic Electronics Bhargava , -
-
TECHNOLOGY OF ORGANIC CHEMICALS LAB
1614406
L T P/S ESE : 50
01
- — 02 Internal : 15
External : 35
CONTENTS: Practical
Skills to be developed:
1. To select suitable process of manufacturing.
2. To select proper process condition for getting maximum yield.
Motor Skill:
1. To work on manufacturing plant.

2. To set proper temperature and pressure conditions
3. To handle reactor.
4. To set controlling steps in manufacturing process.
List of Practicals:
1. Estimation of strength of glacial acetic acid.

2. Analysis of paint, thinner, pigment.
3. Determination of iodine value of oil.
4. Determination of saponification value of oil.
5. Determination of acid value of oil.
6. Analysis of soap(moisture content)
7. Calculation of hiding power of paint.
8. Determination of Aniline point.
9. 9. Preparation of red oxide.
Reference : en.wikipedia.org/wiki/organic-chemistry-72-k
www.onesmartclick.org
FLUID FLOW OPERATION LAB

1614407
L T P/S ESE : 50
01
External : 35
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
Intellectual Skills
1. Observations and interpretation of data.
2. Calculations.
3. Analysis.
Motor Skills
1. Equipment handling
2. Performing
LISTS OF Practical:
1. Determination of coefficient of discharge of venturi meter & plot a calibration curve
2. Determination of coefficient of discharge of orifice meter & plot a calibration curve
3. To calibrate a rotameter for different liquids & plot the calibration curve.
4. To perform experiment on Bernoulli’s Theorem and prove that the summation of pressure head,
kinetic head and potential head is constant.
5. To perform Reynolds Experiment and determine the Reynolds number at the end of laminar
region and beginning of turbulent region.
6. To determination of equivalent length of pipe fittings
7. To plot the characteristics curves of centrifugal pump
8. To determine the relationship between Fanning’s friction factor & Reynolds Number
9. To measure the viscosity of different liquids (Ostwald’s Viscometer or Redwood Viscometer)
10. To measure the flow rate of gases using flow meter.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING & ELECTRONICS LAB
1614408
L T P/S ESE : 50
01
External : 35
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL:
1. Select equipment such as motors, meters & components.
2. To interpret
circuits. Motor
Skills:
1. draw circuits
2. measure various parameters accurately
3. Make connection
List of Practicals:
SECTION –I Electrical Technology
1 Identify different parts of D.C. Machine with their Functions.
2 Control Speed of D.C. shunt Motor below & above normal speed.
3. Determine Voltage & current ratio of transformer.
4 No load test on 1ϕ transformer.
5 Brake test on 3ϕ Induction motor & find efficiency & torques
SECTION-II – Applied
Electronics
1. To Study the various laboratory equipments& measuring instruments like Power supply CRO, DMM.
2. To Study Diode Characteristics- Forward & Reverse characteristics.
3. To study Zener as a voltage regulator.
4. To study transistor as an amplifier- 2 stage RC coupled Amplifier.
5. Study of Logic gates.
PLANT UTILITIES -TW
1614409
- — 02 External : 18
CONTENTS: TERM WORK
Lists of Assignment /Term Work :

1. To determine the alkalinity of water
2. To determine the hardness of water.
3. To determine the variation in PH with ion exchange bed.
4. Determination of humidity and use of humidity chart
5. Boiler simulator.
Determination of outgoing temperature of water from any cooling tower.

VISUAL BASIC 6.0 -TW

1614410
Name of the Topic Hrs/week

Unit -1 PLANNING THE DESIGN OF AN APPLICATION
1.1 Using the Microsoft solution framework
1.1.1 Overview 02
1.1.2 Models
1.1.3 Design Phase
1.1.4 Role of developer
1.1.5 Logical design task
1.2 Designing a system architecture
1.2.1 Understanding application structure
1.2.2 Single tire
1.2.3 Two tire
1.2.4 Multi tire

Unit -2
INTRODUCTION TO VB 6.0
2.1 VB Environment
2.1.1 Menu Bar, Toolbars, Tool
2.1.2 Box
2.1.3 Project explorer
2.1.4 Properties window
2.1.5 Form designer
2.1.6 Form layout
2.2 VB The language
2.2.1 Variable , Constants
2.2.2 Arrays
2.2.3 Procedures, Functions
2.2.4 Control Flow Statements
2.2.5 Looping , nesting
2.3 Managing Forms
2.3.1 Form Basics
2.3.2 Form Events
2.3.3 Form Properties
2.3.4 Form Methods
2.4 Using ActiveX Controls
06
2.4.1 Working with Controls
2.4.2 Using Control Arrays
2.5 Managing Menus
2.5.1 Creating and modifying menu at Design time
2.5.2 Programming menu commands
2.5.3 Shortcut Keys
2.5.4 Menus at runtime
2.6 Drag & Drop operations
2.6.1 Drag mode property
2.6.2 Drag Drop & Drag Over Method
2.6.3 Mouse Conflicts
2.7 Managing Menus
2.7.1 Creating and modifying menu at Design time
2.7.2 Programming menu commands
2.7.3 Shortcut Keys
2.7.4 Menus at runtime
2.8 Drag & Drop operations
2.8.1 Drag mode property
2.8.2 Drag Drop & Drag Over Method
2.8.3 Mouse Conflicts
Unit - 3 3.1 Advanced Controls and Events

02
3.1.1 Common Dialog Box Controls, Toolbar image list, status bar, Rich
text box.
Unit – 4 USING DEBUGGING TOOLS
4.1 Types of errors & debug menu
4.1.1 Types of errors
4.1.2 Debug menu
4.2 Testing the application
4.2.1 Immediate window
4.2.1 Using debug and
local window 02
4.2.2 Setting watch expression
4.3 Implementing error handler
4.3.1 How VB Handles the runtime error
4.3.2 VB error handler
4.4 VB error handling options
4.4.1 How VB handles the runtime error
4.4.2 Disabling the error handler
Unit – 5 Visual Basic and .NET Programming 04
5.1 The Building Blocks of .NET
5.1.1 The .NET framework
5.1.2 .NET Enterprise Server
5.1.3 .NET Building block Services
5.1.4 Visual Studio.Net
5.2 Highlights of the .NET Framework
5.2.1 Common Language Runtime
5.2.2 Class Libraries
5.2.3 Language and Developer Tools
5.3 Visual Basic and .NET
5.3.1 Features of VB.NET
5.4 The VB.NET Language
5.5 The Structure of VB.NET Applications
5.6 Getting Started with VB.NET
5.6.1 WEB applications
Total 16
List of Assignment / Term work:
1. Demonstration of how VB Project works.
2. use of control flow statements in a VB application
3. Program based on case statement
4. How to use different control in a VB application.
5. How manage form properties for different application
6. Select & deselect operations using drag & drop operation
7. Program based on OLE control.
8. Design a Project using MDI form, common dialog control and rich text box.
9. Set database connectivity using Data controls
10. Creating the simple program based on Chemical Engineering using VB. Net.
Titles of the Book Name of Edition Year of Name of the Publisher

Authors publication
MCSC Training Guide MCSD st Reprint Techmedia Publication
1
Mastering Visual Basic Evangelous st
1 Reprint BPB Publication
6.0 Petroutsos
VB 6.0 Programming st
IDG 1 Reprint IDG Book India Pvt. Ltd.
Black Book
Apress L.P.
Professional .Net Kevin Hoffman st
1 Reprint Shroff Publishers &
Framework & Jeff Gabriel
Distributors Pvt. Ltd
Learning Visual Basic st
Jesse Liberty 1 Reprint O’Reilly
.NET
PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IV -TW
1614411
CONTENTS: TERM WORK
Activity Hrs
Industrial Visit:
Industrial visit be arranged and report of the same should be submitted by individual
student to form part of work. Visit to any two of the
Following :
i. Petroleum
Unit-01 ii. Petrochemical industry 35
iii. To a mechanical workshop electroplating unit.
iv. Pump manufacturing company
v. Visit to Foundary & Factory to study Heating System.
vi. Visit to Electroplating workshop.
Lectures: Lectures by professional/ Industrial expert /student
Seminar based or information search to be organized from any THREE of the
following areas:
Unit-02 i. Electronics engineering from a chemical industry.
ii. Electrical engineering from a chemical; industry. 14
iii. Safety in petrochemical industry
iv. Safety in a petroleum industry.
v. Of a expert working on an oil rig.
Group Discussion:
Student should discuss in a group of six to eight & write brief report on the same as a
part of group discussion may monitered by faculty members.
Unit-03 i. Recent trends in manufacture organic chemical 13
ii. Working of a centrifugal pump in institute.
iii. Flow measurement in open channels.
iv. Discussion on CAD
Student Activity:
The student group of 3 to 4 will perform any one of the following activity.
i. Collect different types of pipe fitting.
ii. Collect five samples of pipes of different material and
specific application.
Unit-04 18
iii. Collects five types of values and medium their specific application.
iv. Electrical and electronics
v. Collect transformer details in power home.
vi. Collects information and specification about five electronics devices.
Total 80
IV Semester Diploma in Civil Engineering / Civil (Rural) Engineering
THEORY
SCHEME
Sr. Periods per Hours Teacher's Class End Semester Total Pass Pass Credits
SUBJECT
No SUBJECT Week of Assessment Test Exam.(ESE) Marks Marks Marks
CODE
. Exam. (TA) (CT) Marks (A+B+C) ESE in the
Marks Marks C Subject
A B
1. Advance
1615401 02 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 02
Surveying
2. Mechanics of
1615402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Structures
3. Geo Technical
1615403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
4. Transportation
1615404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
5. Hydraulics
1615405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Total :- 14 350 500
PRACTICAL
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT
SUBJECT Periods per Hours of Practical (ESE) Total Pass Marks Credits
No. CODE
Week Exam. Internal(A) External(B) Marks in the
(A+B) Subject
6. Advance
1615406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Surveying Lab
7. Mechanics of
1615407 03 03 15 35 50 20 01
Structures Lab
8. Geo Technical
1615408 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Engineering Lab
9. Hydraulics Lab
1615409 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total :- 13 200
TERM WORK
SCHEME
SUBJECT Week Internal External Marks in the
No. CODE
(X) (Y)
10. Professional Practices-IV
1625410 03 07 18 25 10 02
(TW)
11. Computer Aided Drawing
1615411 03 07 18 25 10 02
(TW)
Total :- 06 50
ADVANCE SURVEYING
(CIVIL ENGINEERING GROUP)
1615401
L T P/S ESE : 70
02 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY
Unit -1 Plane Table Survey
1.1 Principles of plane table survey. Accessories required
1.2 Setting out of plane table , Levelling , Centering and orientation.
1.3 Methods of plane table surveying – Radiation, Intersection,
and Traversing. 05 10
1.4 Merits and Demerits of plane table Surveying. situations
where plane table survey is used.
1.5 Use of Telescopic Alidade.
Unit -2 Theodolite Survey
2.1 Components of Transit Theodolite and Their functions. Technical 10 20
terms used. Temporary adjustments of Transit Theodolite.
Swinging the telescope, Transiting, Changing the face.
2.2 Measurement of Horizontal angle, method of Repetition,
errors eliminated by method of repetition.
2.3 Measurement of Deflection angle.
2.4 Measurement of Vertical angle.
2.5 Measurement of magnetic bearing of a line by Theodolite .
2.6 Prolonging a Straight line.
2.7 Sources of errors in Theodolite Surveying.
2.8 Permanent adjustment of transit Theodolite ( only
relationship of different axes of Theodolite.).
2.9 Traversing with Theodolite – Method of included angles,
locating details, checks in closed traverse, Calculation of
bearings from angles.
2.10 Traverse Computation - Latitude, Departure Consecutive
Co-ordinates error of Closure, Distribution of a angular
error, balancing the traverse by Bodwitch rule and Transit
Rule, Gale’s traverse table .simple problems on above topic.
Unit – 3 Tacheometric Survey
3.1 Principle of Tacheometry.
3.2 Essential requirements of Tachometer.
3.3 Use of Theodolite as a Tacheometer with staff held in 06 12
vertical and fixed hair method (No derivation).
3.4 Determination of tacheometric constants, simple
numerical problems on above topics.
Unit – 4 Curves
4.1 Types of curves used in road and railway alignments.
Notations of simple circular curve.
Designation of curve by radius and degree of curves. 05 10
4.2 Method of Setting out curve by offset from Long chord
method and Rankine’s method of deflection angles.Simple
Numerical problems on above topics.
Unit – 5 Advanced Survey Equipments
5.1 Construction and use of one second Micro Optic Theodolite,
Electronic Digital Theodolite. Features of Electronic
Theodolite 12 12
5.2 Principle of E.D.M, Components of E.D.M and their
functions, use of E.D.M.
5.3 Total station
Unit – 6 Aerial Survey and Remote sensing
6.1 Aerial Survey Introductions, definition, Aerial photograph.
6.2 Remote Sensing – Introduction, Electro-Magnetic Energy , 04 06
Remote sensing system- Passive system , Active system.
Applications – mineral, land use / Land cover, Natural
Hazards and Environmental engineering system.
Total 42 70
Text /Reference Books:-

Surveying and Levelling
N N Basak Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Surveying and Levelling Part I
T .P. Kanetkar & S. V, PUNE VIDHYARTHI GRIHA
and II Kulkarni Prakashan
Surveying and Levelling Vol. I

and II Dr. B. C. Punmiya Laxmi Publication
Text book of Surveying

S.K.Husain, M.S. Nagaraj S. Chand and company
Surveying and
TATA MC GRAW-HILL
Levelling Vol. I and II S. K. Duggal
Plane Surveying NEW AGE

A.M.Chandra
INTERNATIONAL
Advance Surveying Nishit Sinha Foundation Publishing
MECHANICS OF STRUCTURES
1615402
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
Contents : Theory
Unit -1 Stress & Strain
1.1 Definition of rigid body, plastic body, mechanical properties of
metal such as elasticity & elastic limit.
1.2 Definition of stress, strain, modulus of elasticity, S. I. Unit.
Classification of stress, strain, Sign convention. Stress, strain
curve for mild steel and HYSD bar , yield stress/ proof stress,
Ultimate stress, breaking stress and percentage elongation. 10 10
1.3 Deformation of body due to axial load. Deformation of a
Body subjected to axial forces. Deformation of body of
stepped c/s due to axial load, max. stress and min. stress
induced. Stresses in bars of
composite section & deformation.
1.4 Shear stress, shear strain & modulus of rigidity, complementary
shear stress, state of simple shear, punching shear.
Unit -2 Elastic Constants & Principal Stresses 08 10
2.1 Definition of lateral strain, Poisson’s ratio, Change in lateral
dimensions
2.2 Volumetric strain due to uni-axial force and change in volume
2.3 Biaxial and tri-axial stresses and volumetric strain &
change in volume
2.4 Definition of bulk modulus, volumetric strain.
2.5 Relation between modulus of elasticity, modulus of rigidity
and bulk modulus.
2.6 Definition of principal planes & principal stresses
2.7 Principal planes & stress due to bi-axial stress system & due
to state of simple shear. (Analytical method only)
Unit – 3 Shear Force And Bending Moment :

3.1 Types of beams - cantilever, simply supported, fixed and
continuous beams, types of loading- point load, uniformly
distributed load, support reactions for determinate structures
3.2 Concept of shear force and bending moment, sign 08 14
convention.
Relation between bending moment, shear force and rate of
loading
3.3 Shear force and bending moment diagrams for simply
supported
beams, overhanging beams and cantilever subjected to point
loads, UDL and couples, point of contra flexure
Unit – 4 Moment Of Inertia:
4.1 Concept of moment of inertia M.I of plane areas such as
rectangle, triangle, circle, semicircle and quarter circle 06 10
4.2 Parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorem M.I of
composite sections, built up sections, symmetrical and
unsymmetrical sections,
radius of gyration & polar moment of inertia.
Unit – 5 Stresses In Beams:
5.1 Bending Stresses in Beams: Concept of pure bending, theory of
simple bending, assumptions in theory of bending, neutral axis,
bending stresses and their nature, bending stress distribution
diagram, moment of resistance.
5.2 Application of theory of bending to symmetrical and 06 10
unsymmetrical sections.
5.3 Shear stresses in beams: Shear stress equation, meaning of
terms in equation, shear stress distribution for rectangular,
hollow rectangular, circular sections and hollow circular
sections
5.4 Relation between max. shear stress and average shear stress.
Unit – 6 Analysis Of Trusses

6.1 Definition frames, classification of frames, perfect, imperfect,
redundant and deficient frame, relation between members and 06 10
joints, assumption in analysis. Method of joint, method of
section and graphical method to find nature of forces.
Unit – 7 Strain Energy

7.1 Types of loading – gradual, suddenly applied load & Impact load
7.2 Definition of strain energy, modulus of resilience and proof 04 06
resilience.
7.3 Comparison of stresses due to gradual load, sudden load and
impact load.
Total 48 70

Harper& Row Publishers
Strength of Materials F. L. Singer
Strength of Materials R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Company Delhi

Mechanics of Structures volume –I & II
S. B. Junnarkar Charotar Publishing House, Anand.
Mechanics of Structures Aakash Verma Foundation Publishing
GEO-TECHNICAL ENGINEERING
1615403
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
Contents : Theory
Unit -1 Overview Geotechnical Engineering
1.1 IS definition of soil
1.2 Importance of soil in Civil Engineering as construction material
in Civil Engineering Structures, as foundation bed for structures 02 02
1.3 Field application of geotechnical engineering foundation design,
pavement design, design of earth retaining structures, design
of earthen dams (brief ideas only)
Unit -2 Physical Properties of Soil
2.1 Soil as a three phase system
2.2 Water content, Determination of water content by oven
drying method as per IS code 08 20
2.3 Void ratio, porosity and degree of saturation, density index
2.4 Unit weight of soil mass – bulk unit weight, dry unit weight,
unit weight of solids, saturated unit weight, submerged unit weight
2.5 Determination of bulk unit weight and dry unit weight by core cutter
method and sand replacement method as per IS code
2.6 Specific gravity, determination of specific gravity by pycnometer.
2.7 Consistency of soil, stages of consistency, Atterberg's limits of
consistency viz. Liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage
limit, plasticity index.
2.8 Determination of liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limit as per
IS code.
2.9 Particle size distribution, mechanical sieve analysis as per IS
code particle size distribution curve, effective diameter of soil,
Uniformity
coefficient and coefficient of curvature, well graded and uniformly
graded soils.
2.10 Particle size classification of soils & IS classification of soil
Unit – 3 Permeability of Soil & Seepage Analysis
3.1 Definition of permeability
3.2 Darcy’s law of permeability, coefficient of permeability, typical
values of coefficient of permeability for different soil
3.3 Factors affecting permeability
3.4 Determination of coefficient of permeability by constant head and falling
04 10
head permeability tests, simple problems to determine coefficient of
permeability.
3.5 Seepage through earthen structures, seepage velocity,
seepage pressure, phreatic line, flow lines and equipotential lines.
3.6 Flow net, characteristics of flow net, application of flow net (no
numerical problems)
Unit – 4 Shear Strength of Soil
4.1 Shear failure of soil, field situation of shear failure
4.2 Concept of shear strength of soil
4.3 Components of shearing resistance of soil – cohesion, internal friction
4.4 Mohr-coulomb failure theory, Strength envelope, strength equation 04 08
4.5 Purely cohesive and cohesion less soils
4.6 Laboratory determination of shear strength of soil – Direct shear test,
Unconfined compression test & vane shear test, plotting strength envelope,
determining shear strength parameters of soil
Unit – 5 Bearing Capacity of Soils
5.1 Concept of bearing capacity, ultimate bearing capacity, safe
bearing capacity and allowable bearing pressure
5.2 Terzaghi’s analysis and assumptions made.
5.3 Effect of water table on bearing capacity
5.4 Field methods for determination of bearing capacity – Plate load 04 08
test and standard penetration test. Test procedures as Per
IS:1888 & IS:2131.
5.5 Typical values of bearing capacity from building code IS:1904
5.6 Definition of active earth pressure and passive earth pressure,
structures subjected to earth pressure in the field.
Unit – 6 Compaction of Soil & Stabilization
6.1 Concept of compaction, purpose of compaction field situations
where compaction is required. 06 14
6.2 Standard proctor test – test procedure as per IS code, Compaction
curve, optimum moisture content, maximum dry density, Zero air
voids line.
6.3 Modified proctor test
6.4 Factors affecting compaction
6.5 Field methods of compaction – rolling, ramming & vibration and
Suitability of various compaction equipments.
6.6 California bearing ratio, CBR test, significance of CBR value
6.7 Difference between compaction and consolidation
6.8 Concept of soil stabilization, necessity of soil stabilization
6.9 Different methods of soil stabilization – Mechanical soil
stabilization, lime stabilization, cement stabilization, bitumen
stabilization, fly-ash stabilization
Unit – 7 Site Investigation And Sub Soil Exploration
7.1 Necessity of site investigation & sub-soil exploration.
7.2 Types of exploration – general , detailed.
7.3 Method of site exploration open excavation & boring
7.4 Criteria for deciding the location and number of test pits and bores 04 08
7.5 Disturbed & undisturbed soil samples for lab testing.
7.6 Field identification of soil – dry strength test, dilitancy test
& toughness test
7.7 Empirical correlation between soil properties and SPT values.
Unit – 8 Liquefaction 03 06
Total 30 70
Text/Reference Books:-
Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering
Dr. B. C. Punmia Standard Book house, New Delhi
Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering Murthi
Tata McGraw Hill , New Delhi
Soil Mechanics B. J. Kasmalkar Pune Vidhyarti Griha, Pune
Geo-technical Engineering Gulhati & Dutta
Tata McGraw Hill , New Delhi
Geo Technical Engineering Kuldep Singh Foundation Publishing
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
1615404
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
Contents: Theory
Unit -1 Overview of Transportation Engineering
1.1 Role of transportation in the development of nation.
1.2 Modes of transportation system – roads, railway,
airways, waterways, Importance of each mode, 02 04
comparison and their relative merits and demerits.
1.3 Necessity & importance of Cross drainage works for roads & railways.
Unit -2 Railway Engineering.
2.1 Alignment and Gauges
Classification of Indian Railways, zones of Indian Railway.
Alignment- Factors governing rail alignment.
Rail Gauges – types, factors affecting selection of gauge. 18 26
Rail track cross sections – standard cross section of BG & M.G
Single & double line in cutting and embankment.
2.2 Permanent ways
Ideal requirement, component parts.
Rails – function & its types. Rail Joints – requirements, types,
Creep of rail , causes & prevention of creep.
Sleepers – functions & Requirement, types – wooden, metal,
concrete sleepers & their suitability, sleeper density.
Ballast – function & different types with their properties, relative
merits & demerits.
Rail fixtures & fastenings – fish plate, bearing plates, spikes, bolts,
keys, anchors & anti creepers.
2.3 Railway Track Geometrics.
Coning of wheels, tilting of rails, Gradient & its types, Super
elevation limits of Super elevation on curves, cant
deficiency negative cant, grade compensation on curves.
2.4 Branching of Tracks
Definition of point & crossing, a simple split switch turnout
consisting of points and crossing lines. Sketch showing different
components, their functions & working.
Line sketches of track junctions-crossovers, scissor cross over,
diamond crossing, triangle.
Inspection of points and crossings
2.5 Station and Yards :
Site selection for railway stations, Requirements of railway
station, Types of stations (way side, crossing, junction &
terminal)
Station yards , types of station yard, Passenger yards, Goods yard
Locomotive yard – its requirements, water column , Marshalling
yard – its types.
2.6 Track Maintenance-
Necessity, types, Tools required and their function, orgnisation,
duties of permanent way inspector, gang mate, key man
Unit – 3 Bridge Engineering :
3.1 Site selection and investigation
Factors affecting selection of site of a bridge. Bridge alignment
Collection of design data
Classification of bridges according to function, material, span,
size, alignment, position of HFL.
3.2 Component parts of bridge.
Plan & sectional elevation of bridge showing component parts of ,
substructure & super structure.
Different terminology such as effective span, clear span,
economical span, waterway, afflux, scour, HFL, freeboard, etc. 18 26
Foundation – function, types
Piers-function, requirements, types.
Abutment – function, types
Wing walls – functions and types.
Bearing – functions, types of bearing for RCC & steel bridges.
Approaches –in cutting and embankment.
Bridge flooring- open and solid floors
3.3 Permanent and Temporary Bridges-
Permanent Bridges - Sketches & description in brief of culverts,
causeways, masonry, arch, steel, movable steel bridges, RCC girder
bridge, prestressed, girder bridge, cantilever, suspension bridge.
Temporary Bridges- timber, flying, floating bridges
3.4 Inspection & Maintenance Of Bridge.
Inspection of bridges
Maintenance of bridges & types – routine & special maintenance.
Unit – 4 Tunnel Engineering.
4.1 Definition, necessity, advantages, disadvantages
4.2 Classification of tunnels.
4.3 Shape and Size of tunnels
4.4Tunnel Cross sections for highway and railways
4.5 Tunnel investigations and surveying –Tunnel surveying locating
center line on ground, transferring center line inside the tunnel.
4.6 Shaft - its purpose & construction.
10 14
4.7 Methods of tunnelling in Soft rock-needle beam method, fore-poling
method. line plate method, shield method.
4.8 Methods of tunnelling in Hard rock-Full-face heading method,
Heading and bench method, drift method.
4.9 Precautions in construction of tunnels
4.10 Drilling equipments-drills and drills carrying equipments
4.11 Types of explosives used in tunnelling.
4.12 Tunnel lining and ventilation.
Total 48 70

Railway Engineering S.C. Saxena Dhanpatrai & sons
Railway Track K.R. Antia The New Book Co. Pvt. Ltd Mumbai
Principles of Railway Engineering S.C. Rangwala Charotar Publication
Principles and Practice of Bridge Engineering S.P. Bindra Dhanpatrai & sons
A Text Book of Transportation Engineering IPH New Delhi
N.L. Arora and S.P. Luthra
Elements of Bridge Engineering J.S. Alagia Charotar Publication
Bridge Engineering D.R. Phatak Everest Publisher
Elements of Bridges D. Johnos Victer Oxford & IBH Publishing co.
Road, Railway and Bridges Birdi & Ahuja. Std. Book House
Tunnel Engineering S.C. Saxena Dhanpatrai & sons
Explosive Engineering C. B. Navalkar --

Transportation Engineering Bipin Sinha Foundation Publishing
2. IS / International Codes. : IS 4880, I.S. 5878, Part-I to X.
HYDRAULICS

1615405
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
Contents: Theory
Unit -1 Properties Of Fluid
1.1 Definition of fluid, Difference in behavior of fluid with respect to
solids. Introduction to fluid mechanics and hydraulics, Branches of
hydraulics- Hydrostatics and hydrodynamics, Importance of
Hydraulics with respect to Irrigation and Environmental
engineering. 04 06
1.2 Physical properties of fluid Mass density, Weight density, Specific
volume, Specific gravity, Surface tension and capillarity,
Compressibility, Viscosity, Newton’s law of viscosity – Dynamic
and kinematics viscosity. Ideal and Real liquids
Unit -2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
2.1 Free liquid surface, Definition of pressure and its SI unit
08 10
Hydrostatic pressure at point, Pascal’s law Variation of pressure in
horizontal and vertical direction in static liquid Pressure diagram.
2.2 Total hydrostatic pressure and center of pressure, Determination
of total pressure & center of pressure on vertical & inclined faces
of dams, sluice gates, sides and bottom of water tanks,
Determination of total hydrostatics pressure & center of pressure
on sides and bottom of tank containing two liquids. Determination
of net hydrostatic pressure and center of pressure on vertical
surface in contact with liquid on either side. Numerical Problems.
Unit – 3 Measurement Of Liquid Pressure In Pipes
Concept of pressure head and its unit,
Conversion of pressure head of one liquid in to other devices for
pressure measurements in pipes – Piezometer, U-tube manometer,
04 06
Bourdon’s pressure gauge. Principle of working and limitations.
Measurement of pressure difference using differential manometer
– U-tube differential manometer and inverted U-tube differential
manometer. Numerical Problems.
Unit – 4 Fundamentals Of Fluid Flow
4.1 Concept of flow, Gravity flow and pressure flow. Types of flow –
steady and Unsteady, uniform and non-uniform , Laminar and
turbulent. Various combinations of flow with practical examples,
Reynolds number and its application, Stream line and equi-
06 08
potential line. Flow net and its uses
4.2 Discharge and its units Continuity equation for fluid flow. Datum
head, pressure head, velocity head and total head, Bernoulli’s
theorem, Loss of head and modified Bernoulli’s theorem, Impulse
momentum theorem Numerical Problems.
Unit – 5 Flow Of Liquid Through Pipes
5.1 Loss of head due to friction, Darcy-Weisbach Equation Friction
factor, relative roughness. Moody’s diagram and its use. Common
range of friction factor for different types of pipe material.
5.2 Minor loss of head in pipe flow- loss of head due to sudden
Contraction, sudden expansion, gradual contraction & expansion,
at entrance and exit of pipe in various pipe fittings. Pipes in series 07 10
and parallel Equivalent pipe – Dupuit’s equation
5.3 Hydraulic gradient line and Energy gradient line, Siphon pipe.
Water hammer in pipes – cause effects and remedial measures Use
of Nomograms for design of water distribution system.
Numerical
Unit – 6 Flow Through Open Channel
6.1 Types of channels- artificial & natural, purposes of artificial channel,
Different shapes of artificial channels Geometrical properties of
channel section–wetted area, wetted Perimeter,
hydraulics radius Prismatic channel sections, steady-
uniform flow through prismatic channel section. 07 14
6.2 Chezy’s equation and Manning’s equation for calculation of
discharge through an open channel, common range of values of
Chezy’s constants and Manning’s constant of different types of
channel surfaces.
Most economical channel section, conditions for most economical
channel sections.
6.3 Froud’s number and its significance. Critical, sub-critical and
supercritical flow in channel Hydraulic jump its occurrence in field,
uses of hydraulic jump.
Unit – 7 Flow Measuring Devices
7.1 Velocity measuring devices for open channels. Floats-surface, sub-
surface and float rod, Pitot tube – principle, expression for
velocity Current meter-cup type & propeller type
7.2 Discharge measuring devices for channels , Notches -Types
of notches, expression for discharge. Francis formula, end
contraction
and velocity of approach Weirs - Broad crested weir, ogee spillway,
and expression for discharge. Flumes - Venturi flume, standing
wave flume, expression for discharge. Velocity area method for 08 10
measurement of discharge through open channels. Discharge
measuring devices for pipes.
7.3 Venturimeter – Component parts, principle of working, Study and
use of Water meter
Flow through orifice Orifice- Definition and use, Types of orifice
based on various criteria. Coefficient of contraction, coefficient of
velocity and coefficient of discharge, Relationship between them.
Discharge through small sharp-edged circular orifice
Determination of hydraulic coefficient of orifice. Numerical.
Unit – 8 Hydraulic Machines
Pumps - Definition and types.
Suction head, delivery head, static head and manometric head.
Centrifugal pump - component parts and their functions, principle
of working, priming. 04 06
Reciprocating pump - component parts and working.
Submersible pump and Jet pump.
Selection and choice of pump.
Computation of power required for pumps.
Turbines - Definition and types.
Total 48 70
Text/Reference Books:-
Hydraulics & Fluids Mechanics Dr. P.N.Modi & Dr. S.M.Seth
Standard Book House, Dehli
Hydraulics & Fluids Mechanics
S.Ramamrutham Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
A Text Book of Hydraulics, R.S.Khurmi S.Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi
Fluids Mechanics Hydraulics
Machines
A Text Book of Fluids Mechanics R.K.Rajput S.Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi
Hydraulics Machines
Fluids Mechanics Hydraulics Metropolitan Book Co. Private Ltd.

Dr. Jagdish Lal
New Delhi
Hydraulics Laboratory Manual
S.K.Likhi T.T.T.I. Chandhigrah
Flow Through open Channels Taio McGraw. Hill Publishing Company
K.G. Ranga Raju
Ltd. New Delhi.
Hydraulics B.K. Singh Foundation Publishing
ADVANCE SURVEYING LAB
(CIVIL ENGG. GROUP)

1615406
L T P/S ESE : 50
— — 04 Internal : 15 02
- - - External : 35
Contents: Practical
SKILLS TO BE DEVELOPED:
INTELLECTUAL SKILL:
1) Identify the components of plane table, theodolite, and advanced survey instruments.
2) Know the working principles of these survey instruments.
3) Finding the horizontal and vertical distances.
4) Identifying errors in setting out curve and tabulating elements of a curve.
Motor Skills:
1) Taking and recording the observation in the field book.
2) Preparing drawings, maps etc. with the observed data.
3) Setting out curve for the given alignment.
4) Use Micro optic thodolite, EDM for finding different parameters.
Instructions:-
1) Group size for Practical work should be limited to maximum 6 Students.
2) Each student from the group should handle the instrument to understand. the function
of different components and use of the instrument.
3) Drawing, plotting should be considered as part of practical.
4) One full day per project is required for carrying out project work, which is to be plotted
on a drawing sheet.
5) TERM WORK SHOULD CONSIST OF RECORD OF ALL PRACTICALS AND PROJECTS, IN FIELD BOOK AND
DRAWING SHEETS FOR THE GIVEN PROJECTS.
LIST OF PRACTICAL:( MINIMUM 12 PRACTICAL FROM LIST GIVEN BELOW)
1) USING ACCESSORIES CARRY OUT TEMPORARY ADJUSTMENTS OF PLANE TABLE.
LOCATING DETAILS BY METHOD OF RADIATION.
2) Locating details with plane table by method of intersection.
3) Understanding the components of Theodolite and their functions, reading the vernier
and temporary adjustments of theodolite.
4) Measurement of Horizontal angle by transit theodolite.
5) Measurement of Horizontal angle by method of Repetition.
6) Measurement of vertical angles by theodolite.
7) Measurement of Magnetic bearing of a line using theodolite.
8) Measurement of deflection angle by taking open traverse of 4 –5 sides.
9) To find Reduced levels and horizontal distances using theodolite
as a Tacheometer.
10) To find constants of a given Tacheometer.
11) Study and use of 1 second Micro Optic Theodolite for measurement of
Horizontal and Vertical angles
12) Study of E.D.M. for knowing its components.
13) Use of EDM for finding horizontal and vertical distances and reduced levels.
14) Determine the geographical parameters by total station.
List Of Projects:
1) Plane table survey project for 5-6 sided traverse and locating details of buildings ,
Roads etc. by radiation and Intersection method , Sheet to be drawn by each
student separately on A-1 size imperial drawing sheet.
2) Theodolite traverse Survey for a closed traverse of 5-6 sides for a small
area. Computation by Gale’s traverse table. Plotting the traverse with
details on A1 size imperial drawing sheet.
3) Setting out simple circular curve by Rankine’s method of Deflection angles for a
given problem and plotting the details of curve on A-1 size imperial drawing
sheet
MECHANICS OF STRUCTURE LAB
(CIVIL ENGG. GROUP)

1615407
L T P/S ESE : 50
— — 03 Internal : 15 01
- - - External : 35
Skill to be developed:
1. Interpret the results.
Calculate design parameters.
Motor Skills:
1. Observe the phenomenon during testing of specimen.
2. Draw the graphs and diagrams.
List of Practical:
Group – A (Any Six)
1. Identify the components of universal testing machine & tension test on mild steel.
2. Tension test on tor steel / deformed bars .
3. Izod Impact test on mild steel, brass, copper and cast iron.
4. Charpy impact test on mild steel, brass, copper and cast iron.
5. Flexural test on timber.
6. Flexure test on floor tiles or roofing tiles.
7. Shear Test on metal.
8. Water Absorption & Compression test (Dry & Wet) on bricks
9. Abrasion Test on flooring tiles.
Group - B
1. Drawing of Shear force and Bending Moment diagrams on
Graph Paper (6 Problems)
2. Graphical Solution of Two Problems on simple frames i) Cantilever
ii) Simply supported on A2 size sheet with their analytical solutions
GEO TECHNICAL ENGG. LAB
(CIVIL ENGG. GROUP)

1615408
L T P/S ESE : 50 01
- - - External : 35
Contents: Practical
a. Identify properties of soil.
b. Interpret test results.
c. Follow IS procedure of testing.
Motor Skills:
a. Measure the quantities accurately.

b. Handle the instruments carefully.
List of Practical (Any ten):-
1. Determination of water content of given soil sample by oven drying method

as per IS Code.
2. Determination of bulk unit weight dry unit weight of soil in field by core cutter
method as per IS Code.
3 Determination of bulk unit weight dry unit weight of soil in field by sand
replacement method as per IS Code.
5. Determination of Liquid limit & Plastic limit of given soil sample as per IS
Code.
6 Determination of grain size distribution of given soil sample by mechanical
sieve analysis as per IS Code.
7. Determination of coefficient of permeability by constant head test
8. Determination of coefficient of permeability by falling head test
Practical (Live demo or Prerecorded demo)
9. Determination of shear strength of soil using direct shear test.
10. Determination of shear strength of soil using Laboratory Vane shear test
11. Determination of MDD & OMC by standard proctor test on given soil sample
as per IS Code.
12. Determination of CBR value of given soil sample.
13. Determination of shear strength of soil using unconfined compressive
strength.
14. Determination of shear strength of soil using tri-axial shear test.
HYDAULICS LAB
(CIVIL ENGG. GROUP)

1615409
L T P/S ESE : 50
02
- - - External : 35
a. Interpret test results

b. Calculate quantities of parameters
c. Draw graphs
Motor Skills:
a. Measure different parameters accurately

b. Adjust levels by operating valves
List of Practical:
1. Measurements of pressure and pressure head by Piezometer, U-tube manometer

2. Measurement of pressure difference by U-tube differential manometer. Study of bourdon’s gauge
3. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
4. Reynolds experiment to study types of flow.
5. Determination of Darcy’s friction factor for a given pipe
6. Determination of Minor losses in pipes (any two)
7. Study and use of Moody’s diagram, Nomogram of Manning’s equation
8. Determination of Manning’s constant or Chezy’s constant for given rectangular channel section.
9. Demonstration of Hydraulic jump
10. Determination of coefficient of discharge for given rectangular or triangular notch.
11. Determination of coefficient of discharge for a given Venturimeter.
12. Demonstration and use of Pitot tube and current meter
13. Determination of hydraulic coefficients for sharp edge orifice.
14. Study & use of water meter.
15. Study of a model of centrifugal and reciprocating pump.
16. Use of characteristic curves/ nomograms /charts / catalogs from manufactures for selection of
pump for the designed discharge and head (Refer IS: 9694)
PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IV-TW
(MECH.+CIVIL ENGINEERING GROUP)

1625410
L T P/S Internal : 07
CONTENTS :TERM WORK

Unit -1 Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries (Any
three)
20
i) Bridge under construction
ii) Adarsh Gram
iii) Railway station
iv) Construction of basement/retaining wall/sump well
Unit -2 Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert / Student Seminars based on
information search, expert lectures to be organized from any two of the
following areas: 10
i) Construction of Flyovers: Special Features
ii) Ready Mix concrete
iii) Safety in Construction
iv) Latest Trends in Water proofing
v) Software for drafting
Unit – 3 Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue,

internet, magazines; books etc. and submit a report.(any three)
Following topics are suggested :
i) Collection and reading of drawings of buildings from architect / Practicing

engineers and listing of various features from the drawings. 14
ii) Market survey for pumps ,pipes and peripherals required for multi
storied buildings
iii) Non Conventional Energy Sources with focus on solar energy
iv) Elevators installation and maintenance
v) Any other suitable areas
Unit – 4 Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each student shall 16
submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar (Presentation time – 10
minutes)
Unit – 5 Mini Project / Activities :(any one)
a) Optimum design of concrete 20
b) Preparing three dimensional model of residential building using CAD
Total 80
COMPUTER AIDED DRAWING - TW

1615411
CONTENTS: TERM WORK

Unit -1 CAD Software
Meaning, various CAD software available in the market AutoCAD,
Felix Cad, Auto Civil, 3D Max ; etc.)Starting up of CAD, CAD
Window,
Tool bar, Drop down menu, Command window, Saving the
drawing. Introduction of Graphic screen.
Unit -2 CAD Commands
WCS icon, UCS icon, co-ordinates, drawing limits, grid, snap, ortho
features.
Drawing commands, line, circle, polyline, multiline, ellipse, polygon
etc.
Editing commands – Copy, move, offset, fillet, chamfer, trim,
lengthen, mirror, rotate, array etc.
Working with hatches, fills, dimensioning, text etc.
Unit – 3 Submission / Working Drawing
Generation of line plan, Detailed Plan, elevation, section, site plan,
Area statement
Generation of 3D view and print commands
Introduction to Auto Civil , 3D Max.
Note: Above theoretical aspects should be covered in the practical periods.
A) Building Drawing:
Following exercises shall be completed with CAD software and Print of all the drawings should be
prepared on A3 / A4 size paper
1) Preparation of line plan of a residential building.
2) Preparation of line plan of a Public building.
3) Preparation of detailed plan of a small residential building .
4) Preparation of submission drawing of residential building – showing Plan, Elevation,
Section, Schedule of openings, Site Plan and Area Statement
B) Civil Engineering Drawing.
Preparation of Drawings with CAD software for the following exercises (Any THREE) and Print of
all the drawings should be prepared on A3 /A4 size paper.
1) Plan, Cross Section and Longitudinal section of a Culvert (Pipe culvert/Box Culvert).
2) Section of an Earthen Dam.
3) Plan and Section of K. T. Weir.
4) Cross Section of Retaining wall.
5) Bonds in brickwork – Plan and Elevation for English bond and Flemish bond for one
brick thick wall.
6) Cross Section of ESR.
7) Cross Section of Clarri-flocculator.
Text Reference Books:-
Reference Manual of AutoCAD
AutoDesk
Reference Manual of Felix cad
Felix CAD
Reference Manual of Intel CAD
--
Reference Manual of Auto Civil
--
Reference Manual of 3D- Max
--
Computer Aided Drawing R.C. Tayal Foundation Publishng
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1. Data Structure Using

1618401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
‘C’
2. Digital Electronics &
1618402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Microprocessor
3. Data Base
1618403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Management System
4. Object Oriented
Programming 1618404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
through C++
5. System Analysis and
Management 1618405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Information System
Total:- 15 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Data Base Management

1618406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
System Lab
7. Object Oriented Programming
1618407 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
through C++ Lab.
Total:- 08 100
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
8. Digital Electronics &
1618408 04 15 35 50 20 02
Microprocessor (T W)
9. Data Structure Using ‘C’ 1618409 03 15 35 50 20 02
(T W)
10.
System Analysis & MIS (T W) 1618410 03 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 10 150
DATA STRUCTURE USING “C”
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Data Structure is a subject which deals with data and their structures. In system programming, application programming,
the method and techniques of data structures are widely used. This study of data structure helps the students in developing
logic & structured programs.
Objective:
After completion of this course student will be able to:-
• Understand and use the process of abstraction using a programming language such as 'C'.
• Analyze step by step and develop algorithm to solve real world problems.
• Implementing various data structures viz. Stacks, Queues, Linked Lists, Trees and Graphs
• Understanding various searching & sorting techniques

Unit -1 BASIC CONCEPTS OF DATA REPRESENTATION: [03]
Abstracting data types: Fundamental and derived data types, Primitive data
structures.
Unit -2 INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHM DESIGN AND DATA STRUCTURES: [05]
Design and analysis of algorithm: Algorithm definition, comparison of algorithms,
Analysis of Algorithm; Frequency count, Complexity measures in terms of time
and space.
Unit -3 ARRAYS: [06]

Representation of arrays: single and multidimensional arrays. Address calculation
using column and row major ordering. Various operations on Arrays, Application
of arrays: Matrix multiplication.
Unit -4 STACKS AND QUEUES: [06]

Representation of stacks and queues using arrays and linked-lists, Circular queues,
Priority Queue
Unit -5 LINKED LISTS: [08]
Singly linked list; operations on list. Linked stacks and queues, Circular linked lists,
doubly linked lists
Unit -6 TREES: [07]
Binary tree traversal methods: Preorder, In-order, Post-order traversal. Recursive
and non-recursive Algorithms for above mentioned Traversal methods.
Representation of trees and its applications: Binary tree representation of a tree.
Unit -7 SEARCHING, SORTING AND COMPLEXITY: [08]
Searching: Sequential and binary searches Sorting: selection, bubble, Quick, merge.
Unit -8 GRAPHS: [07]

Graphs representation: Adjacency matrix, Adjancy lists, Traversal Schemes: Depth
first search, Breadth first search.
Spanning tree: Definition,
Implementation Minimal spanning tree algorithms
of Strategies:
- To implement the methods of data structure, C is found to be
appropriate language.
- The student/teacher has to study/teach data structures and their
methods using C.
Total 50
Books Recommended:-
Data Structure Using C and C++, Second Addition, 2000,

1 - Y. Langsam, M. J. Augustein and A. M. Tanebaum
Prentice Hall of India.
Data Structure Using C and C++, Second Addition, 2000,

2 - R. Kruse, C. L. Tonodo and B. Leung
Prentice Hall of India.
Data Structure through "C" Language, First Edition, 2001, S. Chottopadhyay, D. Ghoshdastidar & M.
3 -
BPB Publication Chottopadhyay
Data Structures, Algorithms and Object Oriented

4 - G. L. Heileman
Programming, First Edition, 2002, Tata McGraw Hill.
Fundamental of Data Structes in C++, 2002, Galgotia

5 - E. Horowitz, Sahni and D. Mehta
Publication 2002
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS & MICROPROCESSOR
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1618402 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
The subject will help the students to learn facts, concepts, principle and procedure of digital electronics. These techniques
can be used for designing sequential and combinational circuits which forms the basis of any electronic device. Also, this
subject is designed to give clear idea about working principles of 8085 microprocessor.
Objective:
The objective of this subject is to enable the students to know basic concepts of digital electronics and familiarity with
available chips. After undergoing this course the students will have the awareness of various arithmetic circuits, counter
design, registers, A/D and D/A converters, semi-conductor memories, multiplexers and de-multiplexers etc.

Unit -1 REVIEW OF NUMBER SYSTEM:
Decimal, binary, octal and hexadecimal number systems, Conversion from one
system to another, binary arithmetic, signed numbers Codes: BCD, Excess-3, [02]
Gray.
Unit -2 LOGIC FAMILIES AND CIRCUITS:
2.1 TTL, logic family
2.2 NAND gates [04]
2.3 7400 and 5400 series of IC logic families: RTL, TTL, MOS and CMOS.
Unit -3 LOGIC GATES AND FLIP FLOPS:
3.1 Definitions, symbols and truth table of NOT, OR, AND, NAND, NOR,
XOR, XNOR gates, De Morgan’s theorems; Karnaugh-map.
3.2 Logical diagram, truth table; timing diagram and operation of following [07]
latches and flip flops: NOR latch, RS, T, D, JK, Master/ Slave JK flip flops,
encoders, decoders.
Unit -4 REGISTERS:
4.1 Shift Registers
4.2 Serial in Serial out
4.3 Serial in Parallel out [04]
4.4 Parallel in Parallel out
4.5 Parallel in Serial out
Unit -5 COUNTERS:
5.1 Synchronous and Asynchronous counters [04]
Decade counter and its application
Unit -6ARIT HMETIC CIRCUITS:
6.1 Half adder and full adder circuit, design and implementation
Half and full subtracted circuit, design and implementation [04]
Unit -7 A/D AND D/CONVERTERS:

Analog to digital conversion [02]
Unit -8 SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORIES:
8.1 Memory Unit
8.2 Concept of memories using registers
8.3 Read only Memory (ROM) [06]
8.4 Random Access Memory (RAM)
8.5 Static and Dynamic Memory
Unit -9 DECODERS, DISPLAY DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS:
a) LED, LCD, seven segment display, basic operation of various commonly
used types
[03]
Unit -10 MULTIPLEXERS AND DE-MULTIPLEXERS:
Basic functions and Block diagram of MUX and DEMUX. [04]
Unit -11 MICROPROCESSORS: [10]
11.1 Evaluation of microprocessors, microcomputer organization, 8-bit,
microprocessor-Intel 8085 architecture buses, flags and register organization,
timing signals, instruction sets, addressing modes. Programming in machine
and assembly languages
11.2 16-bit microprocessors-Intel 8086 architecture, register organization, and
instruction sets and addressing modes
Total 50
Books Recommended:-
Text Books:-
1.
Digital Electronics and Applications, McGraw Hills Publishers. - Malvino Leach
2.
Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi. - Morries Marrow
3.
Digital Integrated Electronics, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi - Herbert Raub and Donals Sachilling
4.
Digital Electronics, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi - Rajaraman
5.
Microelectronics, McGraw Hill, 1987 - J. Millman and A. Grabel
6.
Linear Integrated Circuits, Wiley Eastern, 1991 - D. Roychaudhuri and S.B. Jani
Reference Books:
1. Digital Principles, Latest Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

- Malvino & Leach
Company Ltd., New Delhi
2. Modern Digital Electronics, Second Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill
- R.P. Jain
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi
3. Digital Electronics, First Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
- V.K. Puri
4. Electronics Circuits and Systems, 1992, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
- Y.N. Bapat
Company
5.
Modern Digital Electronics, 1983, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company - R.P. Jain
6.
Digital Computer Fundamentals, T.M.H. - Malvino
7.
Digital Computer, Dhanpat Roy & Sons. - B. Ram
8.
Introduction to Microprocessors, Dhanpat Roy & Sons. - Dr. B. Ram
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
This subject will allow students to develop understanding of the basic concepts of data in general and Relational Database
System in particular. The students will learn Database concept, Data Structure, Data Models, various approaches to
Database design, strengths of relational model, Normalization.
Objective:
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
• Develop Database System to handle the real world problem.
• Understand Database design and normalization techniques.
• Use Standard Query Language and its various versions.
• Understand Importance

Unit -1 INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS [05]
(DBMS):
Why Database, Characteristics of Data in Database, DBMS, What is database
Advantage of DBMS
Unit -2 DATABASE ARCHITECTURE AND MODELLING: [05]
Conceptual, physical and logical database models, Role of DBA, Database Design
Unit -3 ENTITY RELATIONSHIP MODEL: [06]

Components of ER Model, ER Modeling Symbols, Super Class and Sub Class
types
Unit -4 RELATIONAL DBMS: [06]
Introduction to Relational DBMS
Unit -5 RELATIONAL ALGEBRA AND RELATIONAL CALCULUS: [06]
Relational Algebraic operations, Tuple Relational Calculus
Unit -6 INTRODUCTION TO SQL: [06]

History of SQL, Characteristics of SQL Advantages of SQL, and SQL in Action
SQL data types and Literals, Types of SQL commands, SQL Operators and their
precedence, Queries and Sub queries Aggregate functions, Insert, Update and
Delete operations. Joins, Unions
Unit -7 DATABASE NORMALISATION: [08]
Keys, Relationships, First Normal Form, Functional dependencies, Second Normal
Form, Third Normal Form,
Unit -8 BACK UP AND RECOVERY: [03]
Database backups; why plan backups? Hardware protection and redundancy,
Transaction logs. Importance of backups, Database recovery
Unit -9 DATABASE SECURITY AND INTEGRITY: [05]
Types of Integrity constraints, Restrictions on Integrity constraints, Data security
risks, Data security requirements, Database users, Protecting data within the
database, Granting and revoking privileges and roles.
Concepts of DBMS will be implemented by using the popular relational DBMS package such as
ORACLE/ MS-SQL.
Total 50
Text Books /Books Recommended:-
1.
Database Management Systems, First Edition, 2002, Vikas Publishing House - A. Leon & M. Leon
2.
Fundamentals of Database Systems, Third Edition, 2000, Addison Wesley - R. Elmasri, S. Navathe
Reference Books:-
1. - H. Korth, A. Silberschatz
Database System Concepts, Third Edition, 1997, McGraw-Hill Internation
2. - B. Desai
An Introduction to Database Systems, Galgotia Publication
3. Database Processing: Fundamentals, Design Implementation, Prentice Hall of - D.K. Kroenke
India.
4. - P. Bhattacharya and A.K. Majumdar
Database Management Systems, First Edition, 1996, McGraw Hill
5. - Abraham Silberschtz, Henry Korth &
Database System Concepts, Fourth Edition, 1997, Tata McGraw Hill
S. Sudarshan
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH C++
03
1618404 03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
C++ is an object-oriented language, which enables a programmer to write programs, so that the object
can be made to work collaboratively to produce the solution to live problems. By undergoing this course, the
students will be able to understand the principles of object oriented programming, write programs in C++ and
use them to make small application programs.
Objective:
The objective of the course is to make the students understand the basic concepts of object-oriented
programming language C++ (Classes, Objects, Inheritance and Polymorphism).
The Course will enable the students to:
- Understand OOPs concepts.
- Use of various C++ constructs and functions.
- Use of C++ to develop programs to solve the real world problems.
- Implementing Inheritance, Encapsulation, Operator Over-loading and Dynamic Binding in C++.
- C++ Streams and concept of exception handling, class libraries, fundamentals of Microsoft foundation
classes.
S.No. Topics Periods
01 Introduction to Object Oriented Programming (04)
02 Elements of C++ Language (10)
03 Functions (08)
04 Objects and Classes (08)
05 Constructors and Destructors (06)
06 Operator Overloading (08)
07 Derived Classes and Inheritance (08)
08 Pointers (08)
(60)
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION TO OBJECTS ORIENTED PROGRAMMING (OOP): [04]
- Basic concept of OOPs
- Comparison of procedural programming and OOP
- Advantages of OOP, OOP Languages
- Definitions: Class, Objects
- Concepts of inheritance and encapsulation
- Operator overloading
- Dynamic binding
- Overview of OOP using C++
- Basic program construction: main and functions, Program statements,
class declaration, comments.
Unit -2 ELEMENTS OF C++ LANGUAGE: [10]
- Tokens and Identifiers: Character Set and Symbols, Keywords, C++
Identifiers
- Variables and Constants: Integers & Characters, Constants and Symbolic
constants, Dynamic initialization of variables, reference variables,
enumerated variables
- Data Types: Basic data types, arrays and strings, user defined data types
- Operators: Arithmetic, relational operators and operators precedence,
logical operators, manipulators, type conversions and type cast operators
- Console I/O: cin, cout functions
- Control Statements: The if statement, if-else; else ... if switch statements
- Loops: for and do-While statements, Break, continue, go to
Unit -3 FUNCTIONS: [08]
- Simple functions: Declaration of functions, calling functions, function
definition
- Passing arguments and returning values: Passing constants and variables,
pass by value
- Return statement, types of functions
- Passing and returning structure variables
Unit -4 OBJECTS AND CLASSES: [08]
- Declaration of classes and objects in C++, Class definition
- Declaration of members, objects as date, time, objects as functions
arguments
- Array of objects
- Returning objects from function
- Structures and classes
Unit -5 CONSTRUCTORS AND DESTRUCTORS: [06]
- Basic constructors, parameterized constructors, multiple constructors
- Dynamic initialization of objects
- Use of copy constructor
- Dynamic constructors
- Destructors
- Constraints on constructors and destructors
Unit -6 OPERATOR OVERLOADING: [08]
- Overloading unary operators: Operator keyword, Argument and return
values, Laminations of increment operators
- Overloading binary operators: Arithmetic operators, Examples: Addition
of polar coordinates and concatenation of strings, Comparison operators,
Arithmetic assignments operators
Data and type conversions: Conversion between basic types, Conversion
between object and basic types, Conversion between objects of different
classes
Unit -7 DERIVED CLASSES AND INHERITANCE: [08]
- Derived classes and Base class: Defining a derived class, Accessing the
base class members, The protected access specifier
- Derived class constructors
- Overriding the member functions
- Class hierarchies: Abstract base class, Constructors and member
functions
- Inheritance: Public and private inheritance.
Unit -8 POINTERS: [08]
- Addresses and Pointers: The address of operator & Pointer variables,
Accessing the variable pointed to Pointer to void
- Pointer and Arrays
- Pointers and Functions: Call by value, Call by reference, pointer to
functions, passing function to another function
- Pointers and strings: Pointer to string constants, strings as function
arguments, Arrays of pointers to strings
- Pointers to objects, Pointers to pointers.
Total 60
Books Recommended:
Text Books
1. C++ Primer, Third Edition, 1998 - Stanley B. Lippman, Addison-Wesely
2. Problem Solving with C++, Second Edition, 1999 - W. Savitch Pearson Education
3. Object Oriented Programming with C++, 1999 - E. Balagurusamy Tata McGraw Hill
4. Object Oriented Programming with C++, 1999 - Nabajyoti Barkakati PHI
1. Object Oriented Programming in C++, Fourth Edition, 2001 - R. Lafore Techmedia
2. The Elements of C++ Programming, Third Edition, 2000 - B. Stroustrup Addison Wesely
3. Mastering C++, First Edition, 1997 - K.V. Venugopal, R. Kumar and
T. Tavishankar, Tata McGraw Hill
SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:-
For the design of an Information System, it is important to understand the requirements, carry out system study and analyze
information. After undergoing this Course, the student will be able to study, analyze and design a system for the user.
Objective:-
The Course focuses on the following aspects of Information System Development:
• Study, Analysis and Design of a System
• Documenting and evaluating the System
• Data Modeling
• Developing Information Management System for an Organization
• Implementing and Testing
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: [05]
System Definition and Concepts: General Theory systems, Manual and automated
systems, Real-life Business Sub-systems. System Environments and Boundaries
Unit -2 SYSTEMS ANALYST: [04]
Role and Need of Systems Analyst, Qualifications and responsibilities
Unit -3 SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT CYCLE: [07]

Introduction to Systems Development Life Cycle (SDLC), various phases of
SDLC: Study, Design, Development, Implementation, Maintenance.
Unit -4 SYSTEM PLANNING: [05]

Data and fact gathering techniques: Interviews, Group Communication –
Questionnaires, Presentation & Site Visits. Modern Methods for determining
system requirements: Joint Application, Development Program, Prototyping,
Business Process Re-engineering.
Unit -5 MODULAR AND STRUCTURED DESIGN: [03]
Module specifications, Top-down and bottom-up design Module coupling and
cohesion
Unit -6 SYSTEM DESIGN AND MODELLING: [05]

Process Modeling, Logical and physical design
Unit -7 INPUT AND OUTPUT: [06]

Classification of forms, Input/output forms design, User-interface design,
Graphical interfaces. Standards and guidelines for GUI design.
Unit -8 SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION AND MAINTENANCE: [03]
System acceptance criteria, System Evaluation and Performance, Testing and
Validation, Preparing User Manual Maintenance Activities and Issues
Unit -9 ANALYSIS/ DESIGN: [04]
Introduction to UML, OO Development Life Cycle and Modeling, Static and
dynamic modeling,
Unit -10 INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT INFORMATION [08]
SYSTEM (MIS):
Meaning and role of MIS, Systems approach to MIS. Types of Information
Systems: Transaction Processing System, Management Information System,
Decision Support System,
Total 50
Text Books Books Recommended:-
1 Modern Systems Analysis and Design, Second Edition, 2000, Joey George
- J. Hoffer
and Joseph Valacich Pearson Education.
2
Systems Analysis and Design, First Edition, 2002, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. - A. Dennis and B.H. Wixom
Reference Books:
1 Systems Analysis and Design Methods, First Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw-
- J. Whitten, L. Bentley and K. Dittman
Hill.
2 Management Information Systems, Seventh Edition, 2002, Pearson
- K.C. Laudon and J.P. Laudon
Education.
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAB
1618406 02
External : 35
LIST OF PRACTICALS:
S.No. Experiment
Hands on experience on any RDBMS to implement the role of Database Administrator like creating the users,
alter user, grant and revoke of rights of user.
Create a Database of employees and departments with the following details.
Table name Fields name
Emp empno (primary key), ename,
Edetails, ebasic, salary-
Details, e-deptno (foreign key)
Dept deptno (primary key), dept-name, dept. Details.
Create suitable tables to perform the following relational operations
select
project
product
join
restriction
union
intersection
difference
Perform the following data manipulation operation on table created in Problem 2
(a) insertion of records
(b) deletion of records
(c) Updating records
For the table created in problem 2 perform the following SQL constructs
a. SELECT……FROM….WHERE……GROUP BY ….. HAVING ….. ORDER BY…..
Create views, temporary tables and perform nested queries on the table created in problem2.
Develop a small application using Visual basic as front end and Oracle SQL as backend using ODBC connectively
Creation and modification of databases through ER diagram, nornmalisation
Creation, updation, insertion and deletion of tables
Teachers can take DBMS Lab topics such as the following:- Personal/Bank/Library/ Hostel Accounting / Insurance
/Budget /Preparing Highest Cricket Score/Class Marks Management/Admission Merit List/Income Tax Calculation/Books
Publisher database/Preparation of Salary of a Govt. organization employee etc.
Books Recommended:
1 Introduction to Database Systems, Addison Wesley(Singapore) Pvt. Ltd., New
- C.J. Date
Delhi
2 Database Management Systems, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., Daryaganj,
- Bipin C. Desai
New Delhi
3 Relational Database Management Systems, Theory & Practice - Val Occardi
4 Teach Yourself Access 97/2000 for Windows, BPB Publications, New Delhi - Charles Siegal
5 Database System - Silver Schutz
6 Relational Database Management System by - ATF, H. Wiley
7 Database Structured Techniques for Design, Performance and Management - S. Atre, Wiley
8 Database Management - C.J. Date, Addison Wesley
9 SQL in 21 days - B.P.B.
10 ORACLE, SQL & PL/SQL – Handbook - Phlinski-Person
11 SQL Bible - Alox Krigel, Boris M. Trukhnov
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH C++ LAB.
1618407 02
External : 35
Unit -1 Programming exercise on executing a Basic C++ Program. [ ]

Unit -2 Programming Exercise on Control Statement (if-else, elseif ladder) [ ]
Unit -3 Programming exercise on loop Control Statement (for, while, [ ]
do-while)
Unit -4 Programming exercise on Function [ ]
Unit -5 Programming exercise on creating classes and their object. [ ]
Unit -6 Programming exercise to demonstrated constructor and destructor. [ ]
Unit -7 Programming exercise on operator overloading. [ ]
[ ]
Unit -8 Programming exercise to illustrate concept of Inheritence
Total
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS & MICROPROCESSOR-TW
1618408 L T P/S Internal Examiner : 15 02
— — 04 External Examiner : 35
Unit -1 - Study of 4 bit up counter [ ]

Unit -2 - Study of 4 bit synchronous counter [ ]
Unit -3 - Study of decade counter [ ]
Unit -4 - Study of serial in serial out register [ ]
Unit -5 - Study of parallel in serial out register [ ]
Unit -6 - Study of different gates. [ ]
Unit -7 - Study of A/D converters [ ]
- Study of decoder, encoder, MUX and DEMUX, Design & [ ]
Unit -8 realization of 4:1 multiplexer & 1:4 Demux.
Unit -9 - Study of half and full adders [ ]
- Assembly language Programming with Intel 8085, and related [ ]
Unit -10 Programs – Addition, Subtraction, Comparision etc.
Total
Text Books /Books Recommended:-
1 Digital Electronics and Applications, McGraw Hills Publishers. - Malvino Leach

2 Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi. - Morries Marrow
Herbert Raub and Donals
3 Digital Integrated Electronics, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi -
Sachilling
4 Digital Electronics, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi - Rajaraman
5 Microelectronics, McGraw Hill, 1987 - J. Millman and A. Grabel
6 Linear Integrated Circuits, Wiley Eastern, 1991 - D. Roychaudhuri and S.B. Jani
Reference Books:-
1 Digital Principles, Latest Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company - Maluino & Leach
Ltd., New Delhi
2 Modern Digital Electronics, Second Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing - R.P. Jain
3 Digital Electronics, First Edition, 2000, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company - V.K. Puri
Ltd., New Delhi
4 Electronics Circuits and Systems, 1992, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company - Y.N. Bapat
5 Modern Digital Electronics, 1983, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company - R.P. Jain
DATA STRUCTURE USING “C” - T W
1618409 L T P/S Internal : 15 02

Problems based on topics taught in Theory classes as per instruction and guidance of the teacher concerned.
Unit -1 - Write a program to create singly linked list, and perform insertion, deletion [ ]
and updation of items of the list.
Unit -2 - Write a program, for creating of priority queues. [ ]
Unit -3 - Write a program to create Stack using linked list and arrays, and perform [ ]
push and pop operation on it.
Unit -4 - Write a program to convert infix expression into postfix expression. [ ]
Unit -5 - Write a program for following sorting algorithms:- [ ]

(a) Selection Sort
(b) Merge Sort
Unit -6 - Write programs for following searching algorithms:- [ ]
(a) Binary & Linear Search
(b) Breadth first Search
Unit -7 - (c) Depth First
Write a program Search
to find in order, Preorder and Post order traversal of tree. [ ]
Total
Books Recommended:-
Text Books
1 Data Structure Using C and C++, Second Edition, 2000, Y. Langsam, M. J. Augesntein and A. M.
-
Prentice Hall of India. Tanenbaum
2 Data Structures and Program Design in C, Second Edition,
- R. Kruse, C. L. Tonodo and B. Leung
1997, Pearson Education.
3 S. Chottopadhyay, D. Ghoshdastidar &
Data Structure through C, First Edition, 2001, BPB Publication -
M. Chottopadhyay
Reference Books:-
Data Structures, Algorithms and Object Oriented

1 - G. L. Heileman
Programming, First Edition, 2002, Tata McGraw Hill
Fundamentals of Data Structure in C++, 2002, Galgotia Y. Langsam, M. J. Augesntein and A. M.
2 -
Publication Tanenbaum
SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION SYSTEM- TW
1618410 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Contents : Term Work

Problems based on topics taught in Theory classes as per instruction and guidance of the teacher Hrs/week Marks
concerned.
Unit -1 - Construct an ER diagram for a bank database that shows the basic [ ]
relationship among customers, checking account, saving account, loans
and bank branches where various accounts and loans are taken out. You
also want to keep track of transactions on accounts and loans and maintain
the current balance in each account and balance on loan. Remember that
each entity in ER diagram represent a simple file of data of which you
want to keep track. Construct DFD showing the functional view of the
system.
Unit -2 - Construct an ER diagram for a car insurance database that includes data [ ]
about customers (car owners), cars, and accidents, drivers involved in
accident, and injured driver and/or passenger. Note that any customer can
insure many cars, each car may have different drivers at different times,
and accidents typically involve one or more cars. Convert this into DFD.
Unit -3 - A clinic is in the business of providing dental services to the patient. A [ ]

number of doctors are on rolls of the clinic. Patients can take the
appointments on the phone or personally for a particular doctor and
particular services. Clinic sends reminders to patient and appointment
schedule to the doctor one day in advance. At due date and time the patient
performs the visit for the appointment to get the services performed on
him. At the time of performing services doctor asks the clinic for patient’s
last record (if any) and what ever services he has performed and informs
the clinic so that the records can be updated.
Unit -4 - Draw DFD for order processing system. [ ]
Unit -5 - An international airlines initiated a policy for a traveler. The information [ ]
is as follows:-
Passengers who fly more than 10,000 miles per calendar year and pay cash
and have been flying for last 5 years, the get concession of free round trip
ticket Otherwise traveler is not entitled for round trip ticket.
(a) Draw suitable decision trees for the above.
(b) Draw decision table for the above.
Unit -6 - Consider a marketing based system. Analyze strategic, managerial and [ ]

operational trends. Assign various tasks to entities like product, customer,
city and departments. Draw also DFD for the above.
Unit -7 - Take hospital management system. Explain PCR (Parent Child [ ]
Relationship) in Hierarchical/relational DBMS. Create a data dictionary
for the same.
Unit -8 - What are the different threats to system security (in view of information
system) like virus, data processing errors, employee errors, telephone
fraud, hacking, software piracy, violations, natural disaster, bugs and
worms?
Total
Books Recommended:-
1 -
System Analysis and Design, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi E. M. Awad
2 -
System Analysis Fitzgerald
3 -
Project Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi. Chaudhary
4 -
Introduction to Sytem Analysis and Design, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Hawryszkiewycz
5 -
Projects-Presentation, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi. Prasanna Chandra
6 -
System Analysis and Design Vol.1 and 2, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., Dariyaganj, New Delhi. Lee
7 -
Analysis and Design of Information System, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 1989. Senn
8 The Analysis Design and Implementation of Information System, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, -
Henry C. Lucas
1992.
9 -
System Analysis and Design, Second Edition, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., Dariyaganj, 1996. Elias M. Avad
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1.
Digital Electronics– I 1621401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
2. Communication
Components and 1638402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Materials
3. Advance Electronic
1621403 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Devices and Circuits
4.
Network and Lines 1621404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Basic Comm.
Techniques & Sound 1621405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
Total:- 17 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
Electronic Construction and

6. Repair Lab.
1621406 06 03 30 70 100 40 03
Total:- 06 100
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Pass Marks in the
Credits
week Internal External Marks Subject
(X) (Y)
7. Electronics Circuit -TW. 1621407 05 30 70 100 40 02
8. Digital Electronics - TW. 1621408 05 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 10 150
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS - I
1621401 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
Digital System has made great in roads in the field of Electronics. The use of Digital Circuits is rapidly increasing in all most all
the electronic applications, to be it microprocessors, Computers, Communications, Measuring instruments and others.
Objectives
This paper is to deal with the basics of Digital System. The students are expected to learn the Binary System, Conversions from
one System to another, the various Logic Circuits, Digital ICs and connected basic Digital Circuits used in Electronic field.

Unit -1 Binary System [08 ]
01.01 Transistor in cut off and saturation.
01.02 Binary Numbers.
01.03 Number Base Conversion.
01.04 Hexadecimal.
01.05 Complements 1’s, 2’s, 9’s and 10’s compliments, its application signed
binary number, weighted and non-weighted codes. Signed Binary numbers,
weighted and non-weighted codes.
01.06 Codes: Weighted and Non-Weighted codes.
Unit -2 Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates [06]
02.01 Basic Definition of Boolean Algebra, Axioms of Boolean Algebra.
02.02 Basic theorem and properties of Boolean Algebra.
02.03 Boolean functions, Canonical and standard forms.
02.04 Logic Gates, universal logic gates and its application.
Unit -3 Simplification of Boolean Function [05]
03.01 Theorem and K-map methods up to variables.
03.02 Product of sum and sum of product simplification.
03.03 NAND and NOR implementation.
03.04 Don't care conditions.
Unit -4 Digital Integrated Circuits [06]
04.01 Introduction to following: RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL, MOS, CMOS,
Transmission gate circuits.
Unit -5 Combinational Logic [12]
05.01 Half Adder, Full Adder.
05.02 Half and Full Subtractor.
05.03 Code Conversion.
05.04 Binary Adder and Subtractor.
05.05 Magnitude Comparator.
05.06 Decoder and Encoder.
05.07 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer.
Unit -6 Multivibrator and Synchronous Sequential Logic [06]
06.01 Transistor/IC based multivibrator circutes.
06.02 Flip Flop (RS, JK, T, D, Master Slave type)
06.03 Triggering of flip flops.
Unit -7 Shift Registers and Counters [07]

07.01 Registers.
07.02 Shift Registers using different types of flip flops.
07.03 Ripple Counter, Synchronous and Asynchronous counter.
Total 50
Reference Books:-
SL Title/Publisher Author
1. Digital Design - Maho
2. Design Principle Application - Malvino and Mano
3. Digital Computer System - Malvino
4. Digital Circuits and Logic Design - Lee

COMMUNCATION COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
Subject Code L T P/S ESE : 70 03
1638402 03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:
Electronics is a major part of our day to day life. In each and every field electronic systems are used. Basic electronics is one
of the subjects which are the base of all advance electronics. It starts with PN junction which makes the student to follow the
functioning of all semiconductor based electronics. This is a core group subject and it develops cognitive and psychomotor
skills.
Unit -1 Passive Components [12]
Resistor: definition, symbol, unit.
Thermistor (symbol and list of application only)
Resistor colour code, wattage (w.r to size)
Capacitor : definition, symbol, unit
Types of capacitor( to be shown in practical, no theory)
Inductor : definition, symbol, unit
Transformer: symbol, types ( step up and step down), application.
Unit -2 Rectifiers & Filters [11]

Need of rectifier , definition
Types of rectifier – Half wave rectifier, Full wave rectifier, (Bridge & centre
tapped )
Circuit operation
Input/output waveforms for voltage & current
Average (dc) value of current & voltage (no derivation)
Ripple, ripple factor, ripple frequency, PIV of diode used, transformer utilization
factor, efficiency of rectifier.
Unit -3 Optical Diodes [07]
LED, photo diode, Tunnel diode, Varacter diode, symbol, operating principle and
application of each. Symbol, operating principle & applications of each.
Unit -4 Integrated Circuits [14]

Integrated Circuits
Advantage and disadvantage of Integrated Circuits
IC Package
IC Classifications
Making Monolithic IC
Fabrication of Components on Monolithic IC
Simple Monolithic ICs
IC Symbols
Scale of Integration
Unit -5 Gun diode, PIN diode Characteristics and their uses. [06]
Total 50
ADVANCE ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
1621403 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
This paper is meant to make the students familiar with widely used IC chips and the solid state devices such as FETs.
The utility of Electronic Devices depends on circuits. Students are to study amplifier and oscillator circuits of different type
meant for various applications and specific uses.
The topics to be covered are:

Unit -1 Transistor Biasing [07]
01.01 Introduction, transistor, basic operation.
01.02 Output Characteristics of CE Amplifier.
01.03 Operating Point.
01.04 Bias Stability.
01.05 Types of Biasing.
01.06 Bias Compensation.
01.07 Thermal Sunway.
Unit -2 Transistor as Amplifier [07]
02.01 Hybrid Circuits
02.02 Z, Y & h Parameters of Two Port Networks.
02.03 Equivalent Circuit of Transistor at low and medium frequencies.
02.04 Analysis of voltage gains, current gain, power gain, input impedance and
output impedance for h-parameter.
Unit -3 Coupled Amplifiers [09]
03.01 Cascading of Amplifier .
03.02 Principles of R-C, D-C and Transformer Coupling.
03.03 Gain Bandwidth consideration.
03.04 Effects of coupling on amplifier performance.
03.05 Changes in frequency response and due to effects on coupling.
03.06 High frequency considerations.
03.07 Compensation of amplifier for high and low frequency tuned circuit.
Unit -4 Feed-Back Amplifiers [10]
04.01 Classification concept.
04.02 Gain with feedback, input resistance, B.W.
04.03 Current Series and Current Shunt Feedback Circuits.
04.04 Voltage Series and Voltage Shunt Feedback Circuits.
04.05 Voltage Shunt Feedback Circuits with Frequency Response.
Unit -5 Oscillators [10]

05.01 Principle of Oscillators.
05.02 Effect of feedback on Amplifier Bandwidth.
05.03 Gain and Phase Margin.
05.04 Wein Bridge Oscillator (Basic idea).
05.05 Crystal Oscillator.
05.06 Frequency Stability.
Unit -6 FET Amplifiers [09]

06.01 Construction and operation of FETs biasing.
06.02 Parameters of FETs, MosFET, D-MosET, E-MosFET biasing, JFET
amplifier.
06.03 Biasing of UJT, equivalent circuit of UJT, characteristics and its
application.
Unit -7 Operational Amplifiers [08]
07.01 Basic Operational Amplifier (OP-AMP).
07.02 Differential Amplifier.
07.03 Operational Amplifier Parameters.
07.04 Parameters Measurement.
07.05 Basic Circuits: Subtractor, Adder, Integrator, Differentiator circuits using
Operational Amplifier (OP-AMP).
Total 60
Reference Books:-
1. Integrated Electronics - Millman and Halkias
2. Electronics Devices and Circuits - John D. Ryder
3. Electronics Devices and Circuits - Millman and Halkias
4. Linear Integrated Circuits - Byan
5. Principle of electronics - V.K Mehta
6. Basic electronics - B.L. Thereja

NETWORK AND LINES
1621404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
Objectives
Unit -1 Network Parameters [07]
01.01 Active and Passive Elements.
01.02 Linear and non-linear elements.
01.03 Unilateral and Bilateral Elements.
01.04 Lumped and Distributed Elements.
01.05 Ideal and Practical Voltage and Current Sources.
01.06 Concept of Nodes, Mesh, Branch, Loop etc.
Unit -2 Two Port Network [12]
02.01 Introduction to Z, Y and ABCD parameters.
02.02 Equivalent Circuits in Z, Y, ABCD, h parameters.
02.03 Transfer function, Concept and Calculation for two port network.
02.04 Four Terminal Networks.
02.05 Symmetrical and Asymmetrical Networks.
02.06 Image and Iterative Impedance.
02.07 Design of Simple Symmetrical and Asymmetrical networks.
02.08 Propagation Constant.
02.09 T and Pai Network.
02.10 Conversion of T to Ӆ to T N/W.
02.11 Ladder and Lattice Network.
Unit -3 Attenuator and Equalizers [04]
03.02 Design of T and Pai type attenuators.
03.03 Equalizers - Introduction.
Unit -4 Filters [08]

04.01 Concept of Decibel and Neper.
04.02 Basic Relations in Filters.
04.03 Classification as per use: Low Pass Filters, High Pass Filters, Band Pass Filters
and Band Stop Filters.
04.04 Attenuation and phase shift characteristics.
04.05 Design of simple T and Pai type in derived filters.
Unit -5 Transmission Lines [19]

05.01 Classification.
05.02 Introduction to open wire, co-axial cable, wave guide, optical fibers with
application.
05.03 Distributed parameters of lines.
05.04 Equivalent Circuit of a finite line.
05.05 T and Pai type representation of a section of line.
05.06 Voltage and Current distribution in an infinite line.
05.07 Characteristics impedance and propagation constant of Transmission line.
05.08 Concept of propagation, attenuation constant and phase shift constant of a line.
05.09 Expression for impedance at a point on line.
05.10 Reflected and standing waves.
05.11 Voltage reflection coefficient and VSWR.
05.12 Maximum and Minimum impedance. Total 50
Recommended Books:-
BASIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES AND
SOUND ENGINEERING
1621405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
The basis of communication techniques and a working knowledge of the principles of Acoustics are felt fit to be imparted
at this stage.
Objectives
The students are expected to get familiar with the process of Modulation and detection, Sonar and the basic principles of
Acoustics. The broad topics to covered are:
Unit -1 Introduction to Communication System and Noise [04]
01.02 Introduction to Information and Noise and type of noise.
01.03 Introduction of basic elements of communication system, Transmitter
channel, receiver.
Unit -2 Modulation [10]
02.01 AM, expression for AM wave power in carrier and sideband.
02.02 SSB and Vestigial Side Board Systems.
02.03 Frequency Modulation.
02.04 Phase Modulation, Noise.
Unit -3 De-Modulation [06]
03.01 Diode Transistor and FET Demodulation for AM waves.
03.02 Phase discriminators and ratio detectors for FM and PM waves.
Unit -4 Pulse Code Modulation [13]
04.01 Introduction.
04.02 Type of Pulse Code Modulation.
04.03 PWM, PPM, PCM, Multiplexing.
04.04 Time-Division Multiplexing and Frequency-Division Multiplexing.
04.05 Introduction to Radio Telemetry.
Unit -5 Ultrasonic G/R [04]
05.01 Detection and Application of Remote Control.
Unit -6 Acoustics [13]

06.01 Introduction to sound, ear audibility and stereo.
06.02 Recording and Reproduction, disc recording type of recorder
06.03 Reproducers, recording.
06.04 Hi-Fi and Stereophonic Systems.
06.05 Room Acoustics: Requirement of record room, acoustics room shape.
Optimum reverberation in room, Absorbent materials, scale model tests,
designer considerations of open air theaters auditorium, commercial
building sound recording.
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
1. Electronics Communication System - Kemecy
2. Hi-Fi Stereo Hand Book -
3. Radio and TV - S.P. Sharma

ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCITONS AND REPAIR LAB.
1621406 03
External : 70
LIST OF PRACTICALS:-

Unit -1 Construction of a Battery Eliminator Box, Stabilizer Box, Radio and TV [ ]
Cabinets.
Unit -2 Soldering Practice: connecting circuit components. [ ]
Unit -3 Assembling Battery-Stabilizer, Radio Receiver, Intercoil Circuit. [ ]
Unit -4 Assembling Inverter. [ ]
Unit -5 – Location of faults and repair of: [ ]
– Battery Eliminator
– Voltage Stabilizer
– Inverter
– Radio Receiver
Unit -6 Location of faults in different types of Electronics Circuits. [ ]

Unit -7 Tracing fault in a CRO and its repair. [ ]
Unit -8 Handling of different types of multimeter: VTVM, Frequency meters, [ ]
Calculators.
Unit -9 Fault Location and repair of instruments - Multimeter VTVM, Frequency [ ]
meters, Calculators, operation of push-pull class amplifer.
Unit -10 Repair of faulty study panels of your laboratory. [ ]
Total
Note: Three assignments for practical under SL 1 and 2. Two assignments for practical listed under SL 3 and 4, and at least
one assignment for each of the practical under SL No. 5 to 10. Altogether eleven assignments to be done by the students in the
workshop or laboratory.
ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT - TW.
1621407 L T P/S Internal : 30 02

Unit -1 Introduction to various meters and instruments to be used. [ ]
– Study of CRO; Phase and Frequency measurement.
Unit -2 Measurement of h-parameter of transistor. [ ]
Unit -3 Frequency response of a CE amplifier. [ ]
Unit -4 Frequency response of direct-coupled amplifier. [ ]
Unit -5 Frequency response of RC-coupled amplifiers. [ ]
Unit -6 Characteristics of a transformer-coupled amplifier. [ ]

Unit -7 Calculation of gain, input impedance and output impedance in case of cascaded [ ]
amplifiers.
Unit -8 Operation of Push-Pull amplifier. [ ]
Unit -9 Operation of Class C amplifier, Operation of puss-pull class-B amplifer. [ ]
Unit -10 Characteristics Curves of FETs. [ ]
Unit -11 Operation of Wein Bridge and RC Phase shift oscillator. [ ]
Unit -12 Verification of basic operation of OP-AMP curves. [ ]
Unit -13 Use of OP-AMP as Adder and Subtractor. [ ]
Unit -14 Use of OP-AMP as integrator and differentiator. [ ]
Total
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS - TW.
1621408 L T P/S Internal : 15 02
Unit -1 Construction and verification of diode OR gate. [ ]

Unit -2 Construction and verification of diode AND gate. [ ]
Unit -3 Verification of truth table of Basic Gates. [ ]
Unit -4 Verification of truth table of Universal Gates from ICs. [ ]
Unit -5 Construction of Basic gates from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit -6 Construction of Ex-OR gate from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit -7 Construction of Half Adder and Full adder circuit from Gates and Verification
of its function.
[ ]
Unit -8 Construction of Half and Full subtractor circuit from Universal Gates and
Verification of its function.
[ ]
Unit -9 Verification of truth table of R-S and J-K Flip Flop. [ ]
Unit -10 Operation of Transistor Multimeter circuits. [ ]
Unit -11 Operation of multivibrator functions from 555 IC. [ ]
Unit -12 Construction and verification of function of Ripple and BCD Counter. [ ]
Unit -13 Construction and verification of Sequence Generator. [ ]
Total
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING/
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING.
THEORY
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT
SUBJECT Week of Assessment Test Semester Marks Marks Marks
No. CODE
Exam. (TA) (CT) Exam.(ESE) (A+B+C) ESE in the
A B C
1. Transmission &
Distribution of 1620401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Electric Power
2. D.C. Machines
1620402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
& Transformers
3. Network Theory 1620403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
4. Electrical
Estimation & 1620404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 02
Costing
5. Applied
1620405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Electronics
Total :- 16 350 500
PRACTICAL
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT
No. CODE
Week (A+B) Subject
6. D.C. Machines &
1620406 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Transformers Lab
7. Electronic
Construction and 1620407 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Repair Lab
8. Applied
1620408 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Electronics Lab
Total :- 06 150
TERM WORK
SCHEME
SUBJECT
(X) (Y)
9. Electrical Estimation & Costing
(TW) 1620409 02 07 18 25 10 01
10. Electrical Drawing (TW)

1620410 03 07 18 25 10 02
11. Development of Life Skills-II
1620411 03 07 18 25 10 02
(TW)
12. Professional Practices-IV (TW)
1620412 03 07 18 25 10 02
Total :- 11 100
TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
(ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING GROUP)
1620401
L T P/S ESE : 70
04 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Unit-01 Basics Of Transmission.
1.1 Introduction to transmission.
03 03
1.2 Necessity of transmission of electricity.
1.3 Classification & comparison of different transmission systems.
Unit-02 Transmission Line Components.
2.1 Introduction to line components.
2.2 types of conductors-Copper, Aluminum & state their trade names.
2.3 Solid, Stranded & bundled conductors.
2.4 Line supports – requirements, types, and field of applications.
2.5 Line insulators – requirements, types, and field of applications.
2.6 Failure of insulator & reasons of Failure.
2.7 Distribution of potential over a string of suspension insulators.
2.8 Concept of string efficiency, Methods of improving string efficiency.
2.9 Corona – corona formation, advantages & disadvantages, factors affecting
corona, important terms related to corona. 10 12
2.10 Spacing between Conductors.
2.11 Calculation of Span length & sag Calculation ( Numerical based on 2.7 , 2.8
& 2.11)
Unit-03 Transmission Line Parameters
3.1 R,L & C of 1-ph & 3-ph transmission line & their effects on line.
3.2 Skin effect, proximity effect & Ferranti effect. 03 04
3.3 Concept of transposition of conductors & necessity.
Unit-04 Performance Of Transmission Line.
4.1 Classification of transmission lines.
4.2 Losses, Efficiency & Regulation of line.
4.3 Performance of single phase short transmission line(Numerical based on it )
4.4 Effect of load power factor on performance.
10 13
4.6 Medium transmission lines-End condenser, Nominal T & Nominal
iZ Network with vector diagram.
4.7 General circuit & Generalised Circuit Constants ( A, B, C, D )
Unit-05 Extra High Voltage Transmission.

5.1 Introduction & Requirement.
5.2 EHVAC Transmission, Reasons for adoption & limitations. 03 06
5.3 HVDC Transmission – Advantages, Limitations.
Unit-06 Components Of Distribution System.
6.1 Introduction.
6.2 Classification of distribution system.
6.3 A.C distribution. 10 16
6.4 Connection schemes of distribution system.
6.5 Requirements of Distribution systems.
6.6 Design consideration.
6.7 A.C. distribution calculations.
6.8 Methods of solving A.C.-1 phase & 3 Ø -phase connected (balanced)
distribution system.
( Numerical based on 1-ph & 3-ph balanced distribution system)
Unit-07 Underground Cables.
7.1 Introduction & requirements.
7.2 Classification of cables.
7.3 Cable conductors.
7.4 Cable construction. 03 04
7.5 Cable insulation, Metallic sheathing & mechanical protection.
a. Comparison with overhead lines
7.6 Cable laying
Unit-08 Substations.
8.1 Introduction.
8.2 Classification of indoor & outdoor sub-stations.
8.3 Advantages & Disadvantages.
8.4 Selection & location of site.
8.5 Main connection schemes. 12
06
8.6 Equipment’s circuit element of substations.
8.6.1 In coming & outgoing lines, Transformers, CT&PT, Relays, CB’s, fuses,
Isolators, batteries, lightning arresters. Insulators.
8.6.2 Bus bar’s material, types in detail. Connection diagram and layout of sub-
stations.
TOTAL 48 70
Text /Reference Books:

A Course in electrical power Soni-Gupta- Bhatnagar Dhanpat Rai
Principals of power system
V. K. Mehta S. Chand & Company
A Course in electrical power
S. L. Uppal. S. K. Khanna
Transmission & distribution of electrical energy S. K. Khanna

J. B. Gupta
Generation & transmission of electrical energy A. T. Star Pitman
Transmission & Distribution of Electric Power Savinder Singh Foundation Publishing

D.C. MACHINES & TRANSFORMERS
1620402
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Unit-01 DC Machine General
1.1 definition
1.2 construction & types of DC machines
1.3 armature winding types : lap & wave.
1.4 emf equation 08 12
1.5 armature reaction
1.6 commutation – concept of reactance voltage
1.7 methods of improving commutation – emf commutation Numericals on
e.m.f. equation
Unit-02 DC Motors
2.1 working, principle, back emf, torque equation
2.2 characteristics & application of series, shunt & compound motors
08 10
2.3 speed control of dc motor & numerical based on 2.1 to 2.3
2.4 starting of dc motor – 3 point starter
2.5 applications of above motors
Unit-03 Single phase transformer
3.1 introduction 10
3.2 principle of operation
3.3 emf equation, transformation ratio, KVA rating
3.4 types & construction of transformer
3.5 concept of ideal transformer
3.6 transformer on no load – vector diagram & numerical
3.7 transformer on load – phasor diagram of loaded transformer
3.8 equivalent circuit
3.9 direct method of finding performance of transformer,
20
3.10 finding the performance of 1 phase transformer by indirect method 10
using OC& SC Test.
3.11 all day efficiency– numerical based on 3.10 & 3.11
3.12 polarity of transformer & polarity test
3.13 application
3.14 1 phase auto transformer – principle , advantages & disadvantages
3.15 comparison with 2 winding transformer & potential divider
3.16 Design of Transformer: Main Dimensions, No. of turns for Primary and
secondary, Conductor cross section 10
Unit-04 Three phase Transformer
4.1 construction
4.2 connections
4.3 voltage & current ratio 08 10
4.4 vector groups
4.5 3 phase auto transformer
4.6 application of 3 phase auto transformer
Unit-05 Special purpose transformer
5.1 current transformer
5.2 potential transformer 04 08
5.3 isolation transformer
5.4 welding transformer
Total 48 70

Electrical Technology
E. Hughes Logmans, London
Electrical Technology
H. Cotton C. B. S. Publisher New Delhi
Electrical Technology Vol. II S. Chand & C0 Delhi
B. L. Theraja
Electrical Machine Design A. K. Sohawney Dhanpatrai & Sons, New Delhi

Pradeep Sinha D.C. Machines & Transformers Foundation Publishing
NETWORK THEORY
1620403
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Name of the Topic Hours Marks
BASIC CIRCUIT ELEMENTS & WAVEFORMS: [07]
Unit-01
01.01 Circuit Components
01.02 Standard Input Signals
01.03 Sinusoidal Signals
Unit-02 MESH AND NODE ANALYSIS: [09]
02.01 Kirchoff’s Laws.
02.02 Source Transformation.
02.03 Mesh & Node analysis.
02.04 Magnetic coupling.
Unit-03 FOURIER SIERIES: [06]
03.01 All forms of Fourier Series including trigonometry, Exponential etc.
03.02 Fourier Transform.
Unit-04 LAPLACE TRANSFORM & THEIR APPLICATION: [07]
04.01 Introduction.
04.02 Laplace Transformation.
04.03 Application of Laplace Transform in the solution of Linear Differential
Equation.
04.04 Inverse Laplace Transform.
Unit-05 RESONANCE: [03]
05.01 Series Resonance.
05.02 Parallel Resonance
Unit-06 TWO-PORT NETWORK: [12]
06.01 Introduction.
06.02 Open Circuit Impedance Parameters.
06.03 Short Circuit Admittance.
06.04 Two Port Symmetry.
Unit-07 PASSIVE NETWORK SYNTHESIS: [10]
07.01 Introduction.
07.02 Positive real function.
07.03 Two Terminal R-L Network.
07.04 Two Terminal R-C Network.
Unit-08 INTRODUCTION OF FIRST ORDER & SECOND ORDER SYSTEMS WITH EXAMPLES: [06]
Total 60
Books Recommended:-
1. Network & system - D. Roy Choudhury
2. Network & system - G.K. Mittal
3. Network & system - Vulkenberg
4. Network & system - Dacsur & Kuo
5. Network Theory - R.N. Pathak
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION & COSTING
1620404
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
Unit-01 Drawing and IE rules
1.1 Classification of Electrical Installation.
1.2 General requirement of Electrical Installation.
1.3 Reading and Interpretation of Electrical Engineering Drawings. 03 06
1.3.1. Various diagrams, plans and layout
1.3.2. Important definitions related to Installation
1.4 IE rules related to Electrical Installation & Testing.
Unit-02 Service Connection
2.1 Concept of service connection.
2.2 Types of service connection & their features. 04 10
2.3 Methods of Installation of service connection.
2.4 Estimates of under ground & overhead service connections.
Unit-03 Residential Building Electrification
3.1 General rules guidelines for wiring of Residential Installation and
positioning of equipments.
3.2 Principles of circuit design in lighting and power circuits.
3.3 Procedures for designing the circuits and deciding the number of
circuits.
3.4 Method of drawing single line diagram.
3.5 Selection of type of wiring and rating of wires & cables. 11 24
3.6 Load calculations and selection of size of conductor.
3.7 Selection of rating of main switch, distributions board, protective
switchgear ELCB and MCB and wiring accessories.
3.8 Earthing of Residential Installation.
3.9 Sequence to be followed for preparing Estimate
3.10 Preparation of detailed estimates and costing of Residential Installation.
Unit-04 Electrification of factory unit Installation
5.1 Concept of Industrial load.
5.2 Concept of Motor wiring circuit and single line diagram.
5.3 Important guidelines about power wiring and Motor wiring.
5.4 Design consideration of Electrical Installation in small
Industry/Factory/workshop.
5.4.1. Motor current calculations. 11 24
5.4.2. Selection and rating of wire, cable size & conduct.
5.4.3 Deciding fuse rating, starter, distribution boards main switch etc.
5.4.4. Deciding the cable route, determination of length of wire, cable, conduit, earth
wire, and earthing.
5.5 Sequence to be followed to prepare estimate.
5.6 Preparations of detailed estimate and costing of small factory unit/
workshop.
Unit-05 Testing of Installation
Testing of wiring Installation for verification of current; earthing, insulation 03 06
resistance and continuity as per IS
Total 32 70
Electrical Design; Estimating and K.B. Raina S.K.Bhattacharya New Age International (p) Limited, New
costing Delhi
Electrical Estimating and costing Dhanpat Rai and company, New Delhi
Surjit Singh
Electrical Estimating and costing N. Alagappan S. Ekambaram Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication, New Delhi
Electrical wiring Estimating and

S.L. Uappal Khanna Publication.
costing
Electrical wiring, Estimating and
B.D.Arora R.B. Publication, New Delhi
costing
Electrical Estimation & Costing Savinder Singh Foundation Publishing
APPLIED ELECTRONICS

1620405
L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY
AMPLIFIERS
1.1) Power Amplifiers
1.1.1 Introduction, Classification – Class A, Class B,
Class AB & Class C, efficiency of each.
1.1.2 Single stage class A power amplifier:
Unit-01 16 24
Circuit operation, input & output waveforms , graphical Analysis
and efficiency of
1.1.2.i] Transformer couple resistive load single stage power amplifier
1.1.2. ii] Class A push pull amplifier
1.1.2.iii] Class B push pull amplifier
1.1.2.iv] Class AB push pull amplifier
1.1.3 Concept of cross over distortion
1.1.4. Advantages of push pull amplifier , collector power dissipation
requirement & specifications of power transistor, need of heat sink.
1.2 FET Amplifier
1.2.1 Biasing of FET: Source Self Bias, Drain to source Bias Application of FET
as V V R
1.2.2 Common Source Amplifier: Working & Applications
1.2.3 Introduction to MOSFET:Types, Construction, Working & Applications
1.3 Tuned Amplifiers
1.3.1 Introduction & necessity of tuned amplifier. Basic tuned circuits, series &
parallel resonance in tuned circuits.
1.3.2 Operating principle, circuit working, resonance frequency of single tuned,
double tuned amplifiers.
2.1 Feedback Amplifiers & oscillators
2.1.1 General theory of feedback: Types of feedback – negative & positive
feedback.
2.1.2 Types of negative feedback – voltage shunt, voltage series, current shunt
& current series.
2.1.3 Advantages of negative feedback on voltage gain , bandwidth , input
impedance output impedance, stability , noise , distortion in amplifiers.
2.2 Introduction to oscillator , block diagram of sine wave oscillator ,
Unit-02 10 14
requirement of oscillation –
2.2.1 Barkhausen criterion , operating principles of RC & LC oscillators
2.2.2 RC oscillators – RC phase shift , Wien bridge
2.2.3 LC oscillators – Colpitts , Hartley , Crystal oscillators Circuit diagram,
equation for frequency of oscillation & frequency stability.
3.1 Wave shaping circuits
3.1.1 Necessity of wave shaping circuits.
3.1.2 Linear circuits – RC integrator & differentiator – input / output
waveforms
Unit-03 & frequency response. 06 10
3.1.3 Non-linear circuits - Clipper , diode series & shunt ,positive & negative
biased & unbiased & combinational clipper.
3.1.4 Clampers – positive & negative clampers
4.1 Multivibrators
4.2 Transistor as switch. Definition & graphical representation of
different time periods .
Unit-04 06 10
4.3 Multivibrator classification , circuit working & frequency with specific
application . MMV , AMV,BMV & Schmitt trigger
5.1 Time base generator –

Unit-05 06 08
5.2 Voltage time base generator, exponential sweep generator UJT Relaxation
Oscillator, negative resistance generator. working principle & operation .
5.3 Current time base generator , bootstrap & miller sweep generator,
applications in TV & CRO
Trouble shooting & Testing
6.1 Need for trouble shooting , Important steps for testing
6.2 Visible testing – Observing circuits for visible faults like broken
component, open contacts etc.
Unit-06 6.3 Active testing – Voltage analysis, Resistance analysis, signal analysis. 04 04
6.4 Trouble shootings of multivibrators, phase shift oscillators, transistorised
sweep generator, clipping & clamping circuits.
Total 48 70

Electronic Principles Paul Malvino Tata McGraw-Hill

Applied Electronics R.S.Sedha S.Chand & Co.
Electronics Devices & Circuits Allen ottershed
Prantice Hall India LTD.
Pulse Digital & Switching Waveforms J.Millman and H.Taub
Tata McGraw-Hill
Pulse & Digital Electronics G.K.Mittal and R.Vanvasai
Khanna Publication
Applied Electronics R.S. Sharma Foundation Publishing
D.C MACHINES & TRANSFORMERS LAB

1620406
L T P/S ESE : 50
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
1. Analytical Skills.
2. Identification
Motor Skills:
1. Measurement Skills.
2. Connection Skills.
List of Practical’s:-
1) a) To identify the constructional parts of D. C. machine.
b) To plot the O.C.C. of a given d. c. machine and to find critical resistance.
2) To find the performance of d. c. series & shunt motor by conducting load test
3) a) To control the speed of d. c. shunt motor above and below normal speed.
b) To reverse the direction of rotation of d. c. motor.
4) a) To identify the constructional details of 1-phase and 3-phase transformer.
b) Visit to maintenance and repair workshop of a transformer and prepare a report.
5) To measure the performance of single phase transformer by direct loading and to
find transformation ratio.
6) To measure the performance of single phase transformer by conducting O.C. and S.C. test.
7) To identify terminal polarity of corresponding phases of 3-phase transformer & to
calculate transformation ratio.
8) To compare 1-phase auto transformer with two winding transformer by collecting literature
from local dealer/manufacturer & compare the data on following points.
Weight of iron, weight of copper, turns ratio, efficiency & percentage regulation.
9) To observe the phase difference between primary & secondary voltage of 3-phase transformer
for various vector groups.
ELECTRONICS CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR LAB

1620407
L T P/S ESE : 50
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
Name of the Topic Hrs/Week Marks
Unit-01 Construction of a Battery Eliminator Box, Stabilizer Box, Radio and TV [ ]
Cabinets.
Unit-02 Soldering Practice: Connecting circuit components. [ ]
Unit-03 Assembling Battery-Stabilizer, Radio Receiver, Intercoil Circuit. [ ]
Unit-04 Assembling Inverter. [ ]
Unit-05 - Location of faults and repair of:-

- Battery Eliminator
- Voltage stabilizer [ ]
- Inverter
- Radio Receiver
Unit-06 Location of faults in different types of Electronics Circuits. [ ]
Unit-07 Tracing fault in a C.H.O and its repair. [ ]
Unit-08 Handling of different types of multimeter: VTVM, Frequency meters, [ ]
Calculators.
Unit-09 Fault Location and repair of instruments – Multimeter VTVM, Frequency [ ]
meters, Calculators.
Unit-10 Repair of faulty study panels of your laboratory. [ ]
Total
NOTE:- Three assignments for practical under SL 1 and 2. Two assignments for practical listed under SL 3
and 4, and at least one assignment for each of the practical under SL No. 5 to 10. Altogether eleven
assignments to be done by the students in the workshop or laboratory.
APPLIED ELECTRONICS LAB
1620408
L T P/S ESE : 50
CONTENTS: PRACTICAL
1 To locate faults in circuits.
2. Interpret the waveforms.
Motor Skill:
1. Ability to Sketch circuit/block diagram.
2. Ability to interpret the circuit.
List of Practical’s:
1. To Plot Frequency response of FET amplifier.
2. To Plot Frequency response & bandwidth of negative feedback amplifier.
3. To Study the Colpitt’s oscillator.
4. To Study RC Phase shift oscillator.
5. To Study RC integrator and differentiator & draw i/p & o/p waveforms.
6. To Study Clipping and clamping circuits.
7. To Study function of Astable Multivibrator.
8. To Study Monostable Multivibrator.
9. To Study Bistable Multivibrator.
10. To Study UJT relaxation oscillator.
ELECTRICAL ESTIMATION & COSTING -TW
1620409
CONTENTS: TERM WORK
2. IS/International Codes : IS- 5909, 7733, 2174, 732,4648
List of Assignments / Term Work :-
S.No Term Work Problems Assignments : Note: Use half imperial drawing
on estimation and sheets
1 costing:
1. Electrical Installation scheme for 1. Design electrical Installation scheme for a flat scheme/
single flat, independent bungalow Independent bungalow/House. Draw detail wiring diagrams
and small house. Draw wiring also prepare material schedule and detailed estimate and
diagram and prepare detailed costing. Prepare report and Drawing sheets. (Minimum 2
estimate and its costing Drawing sheets).
2. Electrical Installation scheme for 2. Design electrical Installation scheme for any one
commercial buildings. Draw wiring commercial complex having minimum 20KW load
diagram and prepare detailed requirements. Draw detailed wiring diagram; prepare
estimate and its costing. material schedule and detailed estimate and costing,
3. Electrical Installation scheme for prepare report and Drawing sheet (one Drawing sheet).
small factory unit. Draw single line 3. Design Electrical Installation scheme for agriculture
layout and prepare detailed pump/floor mill. Draw wiring diagram, prepare material
estimate and its costing schedule and detailed estimate and costing. Prepare report
1) Small factory unit 2) Workshop and Drawing sheet. (One Drawing sheet).
3) Agriculture pump and floor mills 4. Design electrical Installation scheme for any two-
etc. factory/small unit/workshop having aggregate load of 30
KW. Draw wiring diagrams prepare material schedule &
detail estimate and costing. Prepare report and Drawing
sheet. (Two Drawing sheet).
ELECTRICAL DRAWING - TW
1620410
Contents :Term Work Hrs/week

Chapter Name of the Topic Hours
Study of symbols for representation of machines, Electrical Accessories Equipment 2*
01
switching and protection units as per IS 2032, 8270, 3722
Study of various methods of representing circuits/systems through layouts, Block
02 Diagrams, wiring diagrams. 1*
Study any Engineering Graphic package (preferably CAD)for preparing layout, Block
03
Diagrams, wiring Diagrams of substations, Machine shop, Illumination systems etc. 1*
How to read and interpret, various types of electrical drawings based on the
4*
04 knowledge & Information given while studying the above 3 chapters.
* Eight Clock Hours of practical / drawing will be used for teaching theory
Drawing Sheets: (HALF IMPERIAL)
1. (A) Draw a sheet for symbolic representation of various electrical equipment's/machines
(B) Read the given circuits identify the components & trace the path of flow of current.
2. Draw a sheet of wires & wiring accessories
3. Prepare a drawing sheet showing details of domestic appliances such as Electric iron, electric Geyser,
Electric Bell, Hot plate.
4. Draw a sheet of electrical symbols for various electrical devices using CAD.
5. Draw circuit diagrams for Staircase & Godown wiring using CAD.
6. Draw (a) circuit diagram (b)vector diagram for conducting direct loading test on transformer using
CAD
7. Draw control and power circuit diagrams for DOL and Star/Delta Starter
Mini Project:
1. Visit electrical Machine lab/workshop & trace the electrical installation. Draw Layout diagram & single
line diagram.

Electrical Engineering Drawing Dr. S. K. Bhattacharya New Age International Publishers
Working with Auto CAD Mr. Ajit Singh Tata McGraw Hill
Electrical Drawing Sandeep Verma Foundation Publishing
List of Assignments :-
1 (A) Draw a sheet for symbolic representation of various electrical equipment's/machines
(B) Read the given circuits identify the components & trace the path of flow of current.
2 Draw a sheet of wires & wiring accessories
3 Prepare a drawing sheet showing details of domestic appliances such as Electric iron, electric
Geyser, Electric Bell, Hot plate
4 Draw a sheet of electrical symbols for various electrical devices using CAD.
5 Draw circuit diagrams for Staircase & Godown wiring using CAD.
6 Draw (a) circuit diagram (b)vector diagram for conducting direct loading test on transformer
using CAD.
DEVELOPMENT OF LIFE SKILLS II - TW

1620411
CONTENTS: TERM WORK

Name of the Topic HOURS
SOCIAL SKILLS
Unit-01 01
SOCIETIES, SOCIAL STRUCTURE, DEVELOP SYMPATHY AND EMPATHY.
Unit-02 SWOT Analysis – Concept, How to make use of SWOT. 01
Inter personal Relation
Unit-03 Sources of conflict, Resolution of conflict , Ways to enhance interpersonal 02
relations.
Problem Solving
I) STEPS IN PROBLEM SOLVING,
1) IDENTIFY AND CLARIFY THE PROBLEM,
2) INFORMATION GATHERING RELATED TO PROBLEM,
3) EVALUATE THE EVIDENCE,
Unit-04 4) CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS AND THEIR IMPLICATIONS, 02
5) CHOOSE AND IMPLEMENT THE BEST ALTERNATIVE,
6) REVIEW
II) Problem solving technique.
(any one technique may be considered)
1) Trial and error, 2) Brain storming, 3) Lateral thinking
Presentation Skills
Body language --
Dress like the audience
Posture, Gestures, Eye contact and facial expression. PRESENTATION SKILL –
Unit-05 STAGE FRIGHT, Voice and language – Volume, Pitch, Inflection, Speed, Pause 03
Pronunciation, Articulation, Language, Practice of speech. Use of aids –
OHP,LCD projector, white board
Group discussion and Interview technique –
Introduction to group discussion,
Ways to carry out group discussion,
Unit-06
Parameters— Contact, body language, analytical and logical thinking,
03
decision making INTERVIEW TECHNIQUE NECESSITY, TIPS FOR HANDLING
COMMON QUESTIONS.
Working In Teams
UNDERSTAND AND WORK WITHIN THE DYNAMICS OF A GROUPS. TIPS TO WORK
EFFECTIVELY IN TEAMS,
ESTABLISH GOOD RAPPORT, INTEREST WITH OTHERS AND WORK EFFECTIVELY WITH
Unit-07 02
THEM TO MEET COMMON OBJECTIVES, TIPS TO PROVIDE AND ACCEPT FEEDBACK IN A
CONSTRUCTIVE AND CONSIDERATE WAY , LEADERSHIP IN TEAMS, HANDLING
FRUSTRATIONS IN GROUP.
Unit-08 Task Management 02
INTRODUCTION, TASK IDENTIFICATION, TASK PLANNING ,ORGANIZING AND EXECUTION,
CLOSING THE TASK
Total 16
List of Assignment /Term Work : (Any Eight):-
1) SWOT analysis: - Analyse yourself with respect to your strength and weaknesses, opportunities and
threats. Following points will be useful for doing SWOT.
a) Your past experiences,
b) Achievements,
c) Failures,
d) Feedback from others etc.
2) Undergo a test on reading skill/memory skill administered by your teacher.
3) Solve the puzzles.
4) Form a group of 5-10 students and do a work for social cause e.g. tree Plantation, blood donation,
environment protection, camps on awareness like importance of cleanliness in slump area, social
activities like giving cloths to poor etc.( One activity per group)
5) Deliver a seminar for 10-12 minutes using presentation aids on the topic given by your teacher.
6) Watch/listen an informative session on social activities. Make a report on topic of your interest using
audio/visual aids. Make a report on the programme
7) Conduct an interview of a personality and write a report on it.
8) Discuss a topic in a group and prepare minutes of discussion. Write thorough description of the topic
discussed
9) Arrange an exhibition, displaying flow-charts, posters, paper cutting, Photographs etc on the topic
given by
your teacher.
Note: - Please note that these are the suggested assignments on given contents/topic. These assignments are
the guide lines to the subject teachers. However the subject teachers are free to design any assignment
relevant to the topic. The term work will consist of any eight assignments.
MINI PROJECT ON TASK MANAGEMENT. DECIDE ANY TASK TO BE COMPLETED IN A STIPULATED TIME WITH THE HELP OF
TEACHER. WRITE A REPORT CONSIDERING VARIOUS STEPS IN TASK MANAGEMENT.

Adams Time management
Marshall Cooks Viva Books
Basic Managerial Skills for All
E.H. Mc Grath , S.J. Prentice Hall of India, Pvt Ltd
Body Language Allen Pease Sudha Publications Pvt. Ltd.

Creativity and problem solving
Lowe and Phil Kogan Page (I) P Ltd
Decision making & Problem Solving
Adair, J Orient Longman
Develop Your
Bishop , Sue Kogan Page India
Assertiveness
Make Every Minute Count
Marion E Haynes Kogan page India
Organizational Behavior Steven L McShane and Mary Ann Tata McGraw Hill
Glinow
Stephen P. Robbins
Organizational Behavior Pretice Hall of India, Pvt Ltd
Michael Hatton ( Canada – India
Presentation Skills Project) ISTE New Delhi
Stress Management Through

Yoga and -- Sterling Publisher Pvt Ltd .
Meditation
Target setting and Goal Achievement Richard Hale
Kogan page India
,Peter Whilom
Chakravarty, Ajanta
Time management Rupa and Company
Working in Teams Harding ham .A Orient Longman

Development of Life Skills-II Sudha Ranjan Foundation Publishing
INTERNET ASSISTANCE
1. http://www.mindtools.com
2. http://www.stress.org
3. http://www.ethics.com
4. http://www.coopcomm.org/workbook.htm
5. http://www.mapfornonprofits.org/
6. http://www.learningmeditition.com http://bbc.co.uk/learning/courses/
7. http://eqi.org/
8. http://www.abacon.com/commstudies/interpersonal/indisclosure.html
9. http://www.mapnp.org/library/ethics/ethxgde.htm
10. http://www.mapnp.org/library/grp_cnfl/grp_cnfl.htm
11. http://members.aol.com/nonverbal2/diction1.htm
12. http://www.thomasarmstron.com/multiple_intelligences.htm
13. http://snow.utoronto.ca/Learn2/modules.html
List14. http://www.quickmba.com/strategy/swot/
of Assignments :
1 SWOT analysis:- Analyze yourself with respect to your strength and weaknesses,
opportunities and threats. Following points will be useful for doing SWOT.
a) Your past experiences,
b) Achievements,
c) Failures,
d) Feedback from others etc.
2 Undergo a test on reading skill/memory skill administered by your teacher.
3 Solve the puzzles.
4 Form a group of 5-10 students and do a work for social cause e.g. tree plantation, blood
donation, environment protection, camps on awareness like importance of cleanliness in
slump area, social activities like giving cloths to poor etc.( One activity per group)
5 Deliver a seminar for 10-12 minutes using presentation aids on the topic given by your
teacher.
6 Watch/listen an informative session on social activities. Make a report on topic of your
interest using audio/visual aids. Make a report on the program.
PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IV- TW
1620412
Activity Hours
Unit-01 Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries : 08
1) Telephone Exchange
2) District Level National Information Center(NIC)
3) Any other
Unit-02 Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any of
the following areas:
x) Interview Techniques.
xi) Cyber Laws 10
xii) Nano Technology
xiii) Ethical Hacking
xiv) Any other suitable topic
Unit-03 Information Search :
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue,
internet, magazines; books etc. and submit a report.
Following topics are suggested :
v) Market survey of different processors.
vi) Blue tooth Technology
vii) Artificial Technology 10
viii) Data ware-housing
ix) Cryptography
x) Digital signal processing
xi) Bio-informatics
xii) Any other suitable areas
Unit-4 Seminar :
Each student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a
seminar (Presentation time – 10 minutes) Seminar topic
i) Parallel Computing
ii) Distributed Processing
iii) Wireless communication
iv) Virtual reality 10
v) Embedded system
vi) Computer security
vii) Multimedia Techniques
viii) Bio - Technology
ix) Any other suitable topic
Unit-5 Mini Project / Activities :
a) Web-site development
b) Database related any topic
10
c) System projects in VB like notepad, editors
d) Animation projects using C, C++, VB etc
e) Any other suitable topic
Total 48
Titles of the Book Name of Authors Name of the
Professional Practices- Sudha Ranjan Foundation
Publishing
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Hours Teacher's Class End Semester Total Pass Pass
Week of Assessment Test(CT) Exam. (ESE) Marks Marks Marks in Credits
Exam. (TA) Marks Marks Marks (A+B+C) ESE the Subject
(A) (B) (C)
1.
Digital Electronics– I 1621401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
2. Electronics
Components and 1621402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Materials
3. Advance Electronic
1621403 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Devices and Circuits
4.
Network and Lines 1621404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Basic Comm.
Techniques & Sound 1621405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
Total:- 17 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Electronic Construction and

1621406 06 03 30 70 100 40 03
Repair Lab.
Total:- 06 100
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
7. Electronics Circuit Lab.
1621407 05 30 70 100 40 02
8. Digital Electronics Lab.

1621408 05 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 10 150
Total Periods per week Each of duration One Hours = 33 Total Marks = 750 24
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS - I
1621401 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:-
Digital System has made great in roads in the field of Electronics. The use of Digital Circuits is rapidly increasing in
all most all the electronic applications, to be it microprocessors, Computers, Communications, Measuring
instruments and others.
Objectives:-
This paper is to deal with the basics of Digital System. The students are expected to learn the Binary System,
Conversions from one System to another, the various Logic Circuits, Digital ICs and connected basic Digital
Circuits used in Electronic field.
Unit -1 Binary System [08]
01.01 Transistor in cut off and saturation.
01.02 Binary Numbers.
01.03 Number Base Conversion.
01.04 Hexadecimal.
01.05 Compliments: 1’s, 2’s, 9’s and 10’s compliments, its application, signed
binary number, weighted and non-weighted codes.
01.06 Codes: Weighted and non-weighted codes.
Unit -2 Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates [06]

02.01 Basic Definition of Boolean Algebra, Axioms of Boolean Algebra.
02.02 Basic theorem and properties of Boolean Algebra.
02.03 Boolean functions, Canonical and standard forms.
02.04 Logic Gates, Universal logic gates and its application.
Unit -3 Simplification of Boolean Function [05]
03.01 Theorem and K-map methods up to variables.
03.02 Product of sum and sum of product simplification.
03.03 NAND and NOR implementation.
03.04 Don't care conditions.
Unit -4 Digital Integrated Circuits [06]
04.01 Introduction to following: RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL, MOS, CMOS,
Transmission gate circuits.
Unit -5 Combinational Logic [12]

05.01 Half Adder, Full Adder.
05.02 Half and Full Subtractor.
05.03 Code Conversion.
05.04 Binary Adder and Subtractor.
05.05 Magnitude Comparator.
05.06 Decoder and Encoder.
05.07 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer.
Unit -6 Multi-vibrator and Synchronous Sequential Logic [06]
06.01 Transistor/IC based multivibrator circutes.
06.02 Flip Flop (RS, JK, T, D, Master Slave type)
06.03 Triggering of flip flops.
Unit -7 Shift Registers and Counters [07]

07.01 Registers.
07.02 Shift Registers using different types of flip flops.
07.03 Ripple Counter, Synchronous and Asynchronous counter.
Total 50
Reference Books:-
Maho
1 Digital Design -
2 Design Principle Application - Malvino and Mano

Malvino
3 Digital Computer System -
Lee
4 Digital Circuits and Logic Design -
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
1621402 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
This subject is being introduced in the Electronics/Electronics and Tele-communication diploma technical programme to
prepare a strong base for the students to understand the subjects of electronics that they will have to come across in their
higher stage of learning.
The topics and sub-topics are being included which will help the students to:
• Know the characteristics of different electronic components and materials.
• Understand their principles, characteristics, functions and use.
• Develop skill to apply the knowledge in proper selection and use of the electronic components and
materials.
• Able to distinguish different types of resistors, capacitors etc. through their color codes.
• Understand the principle of soldering.

Unit -1 Resistor [11]
01.01 Characteristics
01.02 Classification: Fixed resistors, Metal film, Carbon film, Wire wound,
Variable resistors, Rheostat, Chip resistors, Thermistors, and Varistors.
01.03 Color coding (with simple problem)
Unit -2 Capacitors [09]
02.01 General description and characteristics of capacitor
02.02 Classification: Fixed capacitors, Mica of capacitors, Paper capacitors, Plastic
film capacitors, Ceramic glass capacitors, and Electrolytic capacitors.
02.03 Color Coding.
Unit -3 Transformer and Chokes [05]

03.01 Applications and general principles of operation of transformer.
03.02 Types of magnetic circuits.
03.03 Materials for cores and manufacturing of stacked cores.
Unit -4 Induction Coils [06]

04.01 Classification and characteristics. Types of Core.
04.02 Inductance of a coil.
04.03 Methods used to decrease Skin Effect.
04.04 Eddy Current Loss.
04.05 Dielectric loss and distributed capacitances in coils.
Unit -5 P.C.B. Construction Materials [13]
05.01 Base Materials.
05.02 Metal Foil.
05.03 Types of Boards.
05.04 Methods of Fabrications. Taping materials
Unit -6 Electronic packaging parts [06]
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
1 Radio Circuit Construction, Mir Publication. - A.T. Belesvtsev
2 Hand Book for Electronic Engineering Technician - Milt Mafman and Arthur H. Seedman
3 Electronic Assembly and Fabrication - Goshan J. Wheeler

1621403 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
This paper is meant to make the students familiar with widely used IC chips and the solid state devices such as FETs.
The utility of Electronic Devices depends on circuits. Students are to study amplifier and oscillator circuits of
different type meant for various applications and specific uses.

Unit -1 Transistor Biasing [07]
01.01 Introduction Transistor, basic operation.
Unit -2 Transistor as Amplifier [07]

02.01 Hybrid Circuits
02.02 Z, Y & h Parameters of Two Port Networks.
02.04 Analysis of voltage gains, current gain, power gain, input impedance and
output impedance for h-parameter.
Unit -3 Coupled Amplifiers [09]

03.01 Cascading of Amplifier.
03.02 Principles of R-C, D-C and Transformer Coupling.
03.07 Compensation of amplifier for high and low frequency tuned circuit.
Unit -4 Feed-Back Amplifiers [10]
04.02 Gain with feedback, input resistance, B.W.
Unit -5 Oscillators [10]
Unit -6 FET Amplifiers [09]

06.01 Construction and operation of FETs biasing.
06.02 Parameters of FETs, MosFET, D.MosET, E-MosFET biasing, JFET
amplifier.
06.03 UJT, equivalent circuit of UJT, characteristics and its application.
Unit -7 Operational Amplifiers [08]
07.05 Basic Circuits: Subtractor, Adder, Integrator, Differentiator circuits using
Operational Amplifier (OP-AMP).
Total 60
Recommended Books:-
Millman and Halkias

1 Integrated Electronics -
John D. Ryder
2 Electronics Devices and Circuits -
Millman and Halkias
3 Electronics Devices and Circuits -
4 Byan
Linear Integrated Circuits
5
Principle of electronics V.K Mehta
6 Basic electronics B.L. Thereja

NETWORK AND LINES
1621404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale:-
Contents : Theory Hrs/wee Marks
Unit -1 Network Parameters k [07]
Unit -2 Two Port Network [12]
02.03 Transfer function, Concept and Calculation for two port network.
02.10 Conversion of T to ᴫ N/W and ᴫ to T N/W.
Unit -3 Attenuator and Equalizers [04]
Unit -4 Filters [08]
04.03 Classification as per use: Low Pass Filters, High Pass Filters, Band Pass Filters and
Band Stop Filters.
Unit -5 Transmission Lines [19]
05.02 Introduction to open wire, co-axial cable, wave guide, optical fibers with application.
05.07 Characteristics impedance and propagation constant of Transmission line.
05.08 Concept of propagation, attenuation constant and phase shift constant of a line.
05.12 Maximum and Minimum impedance.
05.13 Input and Output impedance of an open and short-circuited loss-less line.
05.14 Input impedance as a function of length of line.
05.15 Introduction to Smith Chart and Circle Diagrams.
Total 50
BASIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES AND
SOUND ENGINEERING
1621405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
The basis of communication techniques and a working knowledge of the principles of Acoustics are felt fit to be imparted at
this stage.
Objectives
The students are expected to get familiar with the process of Modulation and detection, Sonar and the basic principles of
Acoustics. The broad topics to covered are:

Unit -1 Introduction to Communication System and Noise [04]
01.02 Introduction to Information and Noise and type of noise.
01.03 Introduction of basic elements of communication system, Transmitter
channel, receiver.
Unit -2 Modulation [10]

02.01 AM, expression for AM wave power in carrier and sideband.
02.02 SSB and Vestigial Side Board Systems.
02.03 Frequency Modulation.
02.04 Phase Modulation, Noise.
Unit -3 De-Modulation [06]

03.01 Diode Transistor and FET Demodulation for AM waves.
03.02 Phase discriminators and ratio detectors for FM and PM waves.
Unit -4 Pulse Code Modulation [13]

04.01 Introduction.
04.02 Type of Pulse Code Modulation.
04.03 PWM, PPM, PCM, Multiplexing.
04.04 Time-Division Multiplexing and Frequency-Division Multiplexing.
04.05 Introduction to Radio Telemetry.
Unit -5 Ultrasonic G/R [04]
05.01 Detection and Application of Remote Control.
Unit -6 Acoustics [13]

06.01 Introduction to sound, ear audibility and stereo.
06.02 Recording and Reproduction, disc recording type of recorder
06.03 Reproducers, recording.
06.04 Hi-Fi and Stereophonic Systems.
06.05 Room Acoustics: Requirement of record room, acoustics room shape.
Optimum reverberation in room, Absorbent materials, scale model tests,
designer considerations of open air theaters auditorium, commercial
building sound recording.
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
1 Electronics Communication System - Kemecy

Hi-Fi Stereo Hand Book
2 - ---
S.P. Sharma
3 Radio and TV -
ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR LAB.
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 100 03
1621406
External : 70

Unit -1 Construction of a Battery Eliminator Box, Stabilizer Box, Radio and TV Cabinets. [ ]
Unit -2 Soldering Practice: connecting circuit components. [ ]
Unit -3 Assembling Battery-Stabilizer, Radio Receiver, Intercoil Circuit. [ ]
Unit -4 Assembling Inverter. [ ]
Unit -5 – Location of faults and repair of: [ ]
– Voltage Stabilizer
– Inverter
– Radio Receiver
Unit -6 Location of faults in different types of Electronics Circuits. [ ]
Unit -7 Tracing fault in a CRO and its repair. [ ]
Unit -8 Handling of different types of multimeter: VTVM, Frequency meters, Calculators. [ ]
Unit -9 Fault Location and repair of instruments - Multimeter VTVM, Frequency meters, [ ]
Calculators.
Unit -10 Repair of faulty study panels of your laboratory. [ ]
Total
Note:- Three assignments for practical under SL 1 and 2. Two assignments for practical listed under SL 3 and 4, and at least one
assignment for each of the practical under SL No. 5 to 10. Altogether eleven assignments to be done by the students in the
workshop or laboratory.
Recommended Books:-
1 -
2 -
3 -
ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT LAB.
1621407 L T P/S Internal : 30 02

Unit -1 Introduction to various meters and instruments to be used. [ ]
Study of CRO; Phase and Frequency measurement.
Unit -2 Measurement of h-parameter of transistor. [ ]
Unit -3 Frequency response of a CE amplifier. [ ]
Unit -4 Frequency response of direct-coupled amplifier. [ ]
Unit -5 Frequency response of RC-coupled amplifiers. [ ]
Unit -6 Characteristics of a transformer-coupled amplifier. [ ]
Unit -7 Calculation of gain, input impedance and output impedance in case of cascaded [ ]
amplifiers.
Unit -8 Operation of Push-Pull amplifier. [ ]
Unit -9 Operation of Class C amplifier, operation of puss-pull class-B amplifier. [ ]
Unit -10 Characteristics Curves of FETs. [ ]
Unit -11 Operation of Wein Bridge and RC Phase shift oscillator. [ ]
Unit -12 Verification of basic operation of OP-AMP curves. [ ]
Unit -13 Use of OP-AMP as Adder and Subtractor. [ ]
Unit -14 Use of OP-AMP as integrator and differentiator. [ ]
Total
Recommended Books:-
1 -
2 -
3 -
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB.
1621408 L T P/S Internal : 15 02

Unit -1 Construction and verification of diode OR gate. [ ]
Unit -2 Construction and verification of diode AND gate. [ ]
Unit -3 Verification of truth table of Basic Gates. [ ]
Unit -4 Verification of truth table of Universal Gates from ICs. [ ]
Unit -5 Construction of Basic gates from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit -6 Construction of Ex-OR gate from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit -7 Construction of Half Adder and Full adder circuit from Gates and Verification of its [ ]
function.
Unit -8 Construction of Half and Full subtractor circuit from Universal Gates and [ ]
Verification of its function.
Unit -9 Verification of truth table of R-S and J-K Flip Flop. [ ]
Unit -10 Operation of Transistor Multimeter circuits. [ ]
Unit -11 Operation of multivibrator functions from 555 IC. [ ]
Unit -12 Construction and verification of function of Ripple and BCD Counter. [ ]
Unit -13 Construction and verification of Sequence Generator. [ ]
Total
Recommended Books:-
1 -
2 -
3 -
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL ENGINEERING.

THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1. Electrical
Machine & 1640401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Control
2. Electronics Comp.
1621402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
& Materials
3. Advance
Electronic
1621403 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Devices &
Circuits.
4. Network and
1621404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Lines
5. Industrial &
1640405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Automation
Total:- 17 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Electronics Construction And

1621406 06 03 30 70 100 40 03
repair Lab
Total:- 06 100
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
7. Electronics Circuit Lab 1621407 05 30 70 100 40 02
8. Digital Electronics Lab 1621408 05 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 10 150
ELECTRICAL MACHINE AND CONTROL
1640401 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:-
The students are well conversant with the electric and magnetic field and circuit,
electro-magnetic induction, D.C. and A.C. circuits, based on related electric and magnetic theories.
They also know about electrical components and materials, Now the Electrical Machine is being
introduced for IVth Semester Diploma in Electrical & Electronics Engineering to impart the
knowledge of D.C. & A.C. machines, which play vital roles even in this era of electronics in different
industries throughout the world.
The topics of requisites and construction of D.C. machines, generators, D.C. &
A.C. motors, converters, special motors and electro plating have been included in the content. Which
will give full insight of electrical equipments in their practical life.
Topics have been divided into sub-topics in order to facilitate the students to understand
the subject matters properly. Tentative no. of lectures have been allotted for each topic and sub-topic,
so that the whole syllabus may be covered easily in the academic year.
OBJECTIVES :-
The thorough study of these topics will enable the students know fully about D.C.
machines, their operation, maintenance and proper connection and hence will enable him to work as a
good supervisor and also to efficiently monitor the works of operators under him. The topics of special
motors used and that of electroplating will provide full insight of practical use of electrical
equipments.
Contents :Theory Hrs/week Marks

Unit-1 Requisites and Construction of D.C. Machines [15]
01.01 Armature winding: Pole-pitch, Conductor coil and winding
elements, coil span, coil-pitch, pitch of winding, back pitch, front
pitch, resultant pitch, commutator pitch.
01.02 Single layer winding, lap and wave winding, use of lap and wave
windings.
Unit-2 D.C. Generator [15]
02.01 Types of generator, E.M.F. equation of generator.
02.02 Losses and efficiency of a generator, condition for maximum
efficiency.
02.03 Generator characteristics: No load curve of self-excited generator,
How to find critical resistance, How to draw O.C.C. at different
speeds, critical speed, voltage build-up of a shunt generator,
condition for voltage build-up.
Unit-3 D.C. Motor [15]
03.01 Significance of back E.M.F. voltage equation of a motor, armature
torque, shaft torque.
03.02 Characteristics of series shunt and compound motors.
03.03 Losses and efficiencies of a motor.
03.04 Speed control of a D.C. motor: Speed control of a series motor,
speed control of a shunt motor, merits and demerits of a rheostatic control
method, series. Parallel control.
Simple problems.
03.05 Testing of D.C. Motors : NO-load test (Swin Burne’s test) of D.C.
shunt motor, back to back test (Hopkinson’s test), retardation test of
a series motor.
03.06 Necessity of a starter : Shunt motor starter: 3-point starter, 4-point
starter.
Unit-4 A.C Motor [05]
04.01 Speed control of induction motors : control from startor side, control
from rotor side.
04.02 Direct On-Line starter, star-Delta starter and Autotransformer starter.
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
Sl.No Title/Publisher Author

1. Theory of Direct Current Machinery, TMN editions Alexander S.Langsdorf
2. A text-Book of Electrical Technology, Vol-II B.L. Theraja
3. Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publications P.S. Pimbhra
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1621402 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
This subject is being introduced in the Electronics/Electronics and Tele-communication diploma technical
programme to prepare a strong base for the students to understand the subjects of electronics that they will have
to come across in their higher stage of learning.
The topics and sub-topics are being included which will help the students to:
• Know the characteristics of different electronic components and materials.
• Understand their principles, characteristics, functions and use.
• Develop skill to apply the knowledge in proper selection and use of the electronic components and
materials.
• Able to distinguish different types of resistors, capacitors etc. through their color codes.
• Understand the principle of soldering.
Unit-1 Resistor [11]

01.01 Characteristics
01.02 Classification: Fixed resistors, Metal film, Carbon film, Wire wound,
Variable resistors, Rheostat, Chip resistors, Thermistors, and Varistors.
01.03 Color coding (with simple problem)
Unit-2 Capacitors [09]
02.01 General description and characteristics.
02.02 Classification: Fixed capacitors, Mica capacitors, Paper capacitors,
Plastic film capacitors, Ceramic glass capacitors, and Electrolytic
capacitors.
02.03 Color Coding.
Unit-3 Transformer and Chokes [05]
03.01 Applications and general principles of operation.
03.02 Types of magnetic circuits.
03.03 Materials for cores and manufacturing of stacked cores.
Unit-4 Induction Coils [06]
04.01 Classification and characteristics. Types of Core.
04.02 G of a Coil.
04.03 Methods used to decrease Skin Effect.
04.04 Eddy Current Loss.
04.05 Dielectric loss and distributed capacitances in coils.
Unit-5 P.C.B. Construction Materials [13]

05.01 Base Materials.
05.02 Metal Foil.
05.03 Types of Boards.
05.04 Methods of Fabrications. Taping materials
Unit-6 Electronic packaging parts [06]
Total- 50
Recommended Books:-
Sl.No. Title/Publisher Author

1. Radio Circuit Construction, Mir Publication. - A.T. Belesvtsev
2. Hand Book for Electronic Engineering Technician Seedman - Milt Mafman and Arthur H.
3. Electronic Assembly and Fabrication - Goshan J. Wheeler
1621403 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:-
This paper is meant to make the students familiar with widely used IC chips and the solid state
devices such as FETS.
The utility of Electronic Devices depends on circuits. Students are to study amplifier and oscillator
circuits of different type meant for various applications and specific uses.
Unit-1 Transistor Biasing [07]

Unit-2 Transistor as Amplifier [07]
02.01 Hybrid Circuits.
02.02 Z, Y & H Parameters of Two Port Networks.
02.04 Analysis of voltage gains, current gain, power gain, input
impedance and output
Unit-3 Coupled Amplifiers [09]
03.01 Cascading of Amplifier Types.
03.02 Principles of R-C, D-D and Transformer Coupling.
03.07 Compensation of amplifier for high and low frequency tuned
circuit.
Unit-4 Feed-Back Amplifiers [10]
04.02 Gain with feedback, input resistance, type of resistance.
Unit-5 Oscillators [10]
Unit-6 FET Amplifiers [09]
06.01 Biasing of FETs.
06.02 CS, CD, CG amplifiers with equivalent circuits analysis and
frequency response.
06.03 Biasing of UJT.
Unit-7 Operational Amplifiers [08]
07.05 Basic Circuits: Subtractor, Adder, Integrator, Differentiator
circuits using Operational Amplifier (OP-AMP).
Total 60
Reference Books:-

1. Integrated Electronics - Millman and Halkias
2. Electronics Devices and Circuits - John D. Ryder
3. Electronics Devices and Circuits - Millman and Halkias
4. Linear Integrated Circuits - Byan
5. Principle of electronics - V.K Mehta
6. Basic electronics - B.L. Thereja
NETWORK AND LINES
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1621404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE:-
Objectives
The topics to be covered are:-
Unit-1 Network Parameters [07]

Unit-2 Two Port Network [12]
02.03 Transfer function, Concept and Calculation for two port
network.
02.10 T to Pai to T network transformation.
Unit-3 Attenuator and Equalizers [04]
Unit-4 Filters [08]
04.03 Classification as per use: Low Pass Filters, High Pass Filters,
Band Pass Filters and Band Stop Filters.
Unit-5 Transmission Lines [19]
05.02 Introduction to open wire, co-axial cable, wave guide, optical
fibers with application.
05.07 Characteristics impedance a TX line.
05.08 Concept of propagation, attenuation constant and phase shift
constant of a line.
05.12 Maximum and Minimum impedance.
05.13 Input and Output impedance of an open and short-circuited loss-
less line.
05.14 Input impedance as a function of length of line.
05.15 Introduction to Smith Chart and Circle Diagrams.
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

1640405 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS: THEORY Hours Marks

Automation
1.1 Need of automation
Unit-1 02 --
1.2 Advantages of automation
1.3 Requirements of automation
Control System
2.1 Concept of control system
2.2 Basic block diagram of control system
2.3 Transfer function
Unit-2 2.4 Different terms in control system 04 04
2.5 Types of control system
2.6 Applications of control system
2.7 Development of block diagram for simple applications like level,
temperature, flow control
Control System Components
3.1 Contacts-types, current capacity & load utilization categories
3.2 Solenoids-dc, ac
3.3 I/P devices- switches-push buttons, foot switch, selector switch, pilot
switch, proximity, photoelectric, temperature actuated, level control,
pressure sensing, overload sensing
Unit-3 08 12
3.4 Relays- electromechanical, reed
3.5 O/P devices- contactors, valves, pilot lamps
3.6 Symbols in power & control circuits
3.7 Developing control circuit-basic & thumb rule
3.8 Power & control circuit for different applications like hoist, crane,
conveyer belt, induction motors
Electrical Actuators
4.1 Potentiometers-working & use as error detector
4.2 Servomotors-ac & dc –working principle
Unit-4 4.3 Synchros - transmitter, control transformer, use of as error detector 08 10
4.4 Stepper motor-PM & variable reluctance- working principle
4.5 Tacho - generator
4.6 Applications of above components as AC/DC control system.
Controllers
5.1 Hydraulic-advantages & disadvantages, hydraulic servomotor, types of
pumps used, control valves, components like accumulator, filter, seals
5.2 Pneumatic-resistance & capacitance of pressure system,
pneumatic flapper-nozzle system, pneumatic relays,
Unit-5 actuating valves, cylinders, comparison between pneumatic & hydraulic 08 10
systems
5.3 Electrical & electronic controller-brief overview of op-amps, inverting,
non-inverting, lead-lag networks
5.4 Digital controllers-brief overview of microprocessor & micro- controller
to be worked as controller
Control actions
6.1 On-Off, P, I, P+I, P+D,P+I+D, actions
Unit-6 06 10
6.2 P+I+D action using hydraulic, pneumatic electronic controller
6.3 Tuning of P+I+D controller
Programmable Logic Controller
7.1 Introduction
7.2 Advantages & disadvantages
Unit-7 08 10
7.3 PLC Vs PC
7.4 Block diagram of PLC
7.5 Basic blocks like CPU, I/O modules, bus system, power
supplies & remote I/Os
7.6 Different PLC′s available in market
Programming of PLC
8.1 development of Ladder logic
8.2 some simple programs such as I/O connections, starting of IM, stepper
Unit-8 02 10
motor control
(treatment to topic no.8.2 should be given at the time of
practical / pp hours.)
Introduction to special control systems
9.1 Distributed Control System(DCS)-brief introduction to
Unit-9 02 04
hardware & software used
9.2 SCADA- brief introduction to hardware & software used
Total 48 70

Name of Authors Titles of the Book Name of the Publisher
Nagrath Gopal Control System Engg. Wiley Eastern

K.Ogata Modern Control Engg. Prentice Hall
Jacob Industrial Control Engg Prentice Hall
Andrew Parr Hydraulics & Pneumatics Jaico Publication
Webb & Reis Programmable Logic Controller: Principle Wiley Eastern
applications
S.K. Bhattachrya Brijinder Singh Control of Electrical Machines New Age
International
Jon stenerson Industrial automation and process Prentice Hall
control
Richad Shell Handbook of Industrial automation Taylor and Francis
ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR LAB.
1621406 03
External : 70
Unit-1 Construction of a Battery Eliminator Box, Stabilizer Box, Radio and

[ ]
TV Cabinets.
Unit-2 Soldering Practice: connecting circuit components. [ ]
Unit-3 Assembling Battery-Stabilizer, Radio Receiver, Intercoil Circuit. [ ]
Unit-4 Assembling Inverter. [ ]
Unit-5 – Location of faults and repair of:-
– Voltage Stabilizer [ ]
– Inverter
– Radio Receiver
Unit-6. Location of faults in different types of Electronics Circuits. [ ]
Unit-7 Tracing fault in a C.H.O. and its repair. [ ]
Unit-8 Handling of different types of multimeter: VTVM, Frequency meters,
[ ]
Calculators.
Unit-9 Fault Location and repair of instruments - Multimeter VTVM,
[ ]
Frequency meters, Calculators.
Unit-10 Repair of faulty study panels of your laboratory. [ ]
Total
Note: Three assignments for practical under SL 1 and 2. Two assignments for practical listed under SL
3 and 4, and at least one assignment for each of the practical under SL No. 5 to 10. Altogether eleven
assignments to be done by the students in the workshop or laboratory.
ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT LAB.
1621407 L T P/S Internal : 30 02

Unit-1 Introduction to various meters and instruments to be used. [ ]
– Study of CRO; Phase and Frequency measurement.
Unit-2 Measurement of h-parameter of transistor. [ ]
Unit-3 Frequency response of a CE amplifier. [ ]
Unit-4 Frequency response of direct-coupled amplifier. [ ]
Unit-5 Frequency response of RC-coupled amplifiers. [ ]
Unit-6 Characteristics of a transformer-coupled amplifier. [ ]
Unit-7 Calculation of gain, input impedance and output impedance in [ ]
case of cascaded amplifiers.
Unit-8 Operation of Push-Pull amplifier. [ ]
Unit-9 Operation of Class C amplifier. [ ]
Unit-10 Characteristics Curves of FETs. [ ]
Unit-11 Operation of Wein Bridge and RC Phase shift oscillator. [ ]
Unit-12 Verification of basic operation of OP-AMP curves. [ ]
Unit-13 Use of OP-AMP as Adder and Subtractor. [ ]
Unit-14 Use of OP-AMP as integrator and differentiator. [ ]
Total
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB.
Subject Code L T P/S
1621408 02
External : 35
Unit-1 Construction and verification of diode OR gate. [ ]

Unit-2 Construction and verification of diode AND gate. [ ]
Unit-3 Verification of truth table of Basic Gates. [ ]
Unit-4 Verification of truth table of Universal Gates from ICs. [ ]
Unit-5 Construction of Basic gates from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit-6 Construction of Ex-OR gate from Universal Gates. [ ]
Unit-7 Construction of Half Adder and Full adder circuit from Gates [ ]
and Verification of its function.
Unit-8 Construction of Half and Full subtractor circuit from Universal [ ]
Gates and Verification of its function.
Unit-9 Verification of truth table of R-S and J-K Flip Flop. [ ]
Unit-10 Operation of Transistor Multimeter circuits. [ ]
Unit-11 Operation of multivibrator functions from 555 IC. [ ]
Unit-12 Construction and verification of function of Ripple and BCD [ ]
Counter.
Unit-13 Construction and verification of Sequence Generator. [ ]
Total
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1. Library Personnel
1641401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Management
2. Book and
1641402 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Information Selection
3. Reference and
1641403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Information Sources
4. Library
Administration and 1641404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Management
5. Library Automation
1641405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
and Networking
Total:- 17 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Book and Information

1641406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Selection Lab
7. Library Automation and
1641407 06 03 30 70 100 40 03
Networking Lab
Total:- 10 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
8. Book and Information
Selection (TW) 1641408 03 15 35 50 20 01
8. Library Automation and

Networking (TW) 1641409 03 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 06 100
LIBRARY PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

1641401 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale and Objectives

Library Personnel Management is increasingly getting integrated with the strategic Management at corporate
level. At any Library sector Library Personnel Management and development has assumed great importance. Library Personnel
Management has become a driving force in success of an enterprise.
The Management of Library Personnel is a very complicated and challenging task for those who are involved with
successful running of an organization. This subject given Considerable Knowledge of Various aspect of Personnel “Management”
i.e. Administration, Training & development Accounting etc.

Unit -1 Library Personnel Planning [ ]
01.01 Manpower Planning - Benefits, Process; MBO.
Unit -2 Recruitment and Selection Process, Recruitment Policy [ ]
02.01 Different Medias Likewise Advertisement, internet, etc.
Unit -3 Employee Training, Promotion and Development [ ]

03.01 Three Terms: Training, Promotion and development
03.02 Definition between Training and Development.
03.03 Training methods and technique, On the job training, In-house training,
Short term and Long term training.
Unit -4 Library Resource Accounting [ ]

04.01 Need for Personnel Resource accounting.
04.02 Practice and Consequence.
04.03 Objective of LRA (Library Resource Accounting)
Unit -5 Library Resource Audit [ ]

05.01 Objectives- Areas of Library Resource Audit- Books, Periodicals Library
others Materials, grants & Donation.
Unit -6 Library Personnel Research [ ]
06.01 Meaning of Research.
06.02 Characteristics of research
06.03 Types of Research
06.04 Objectives of Research
Total
BOOK AND INFORMATION SELECTION
1641402 04
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale
Recognition of the role of information as a vital input for development necessitates an adequate library and information
infrastructure for the efficient and effective function of National development system. Such as a structure requires plans,
design, organize, manage and operate a wide range of library and information centres. It is the tuff task to select
appropriate information at appropriate time. This paper is to give suitable knowledge about area.
Objective
• To select appropriate Media.
• To Recognized each aspect.
• To processed it.
• To preserve it.
• To give appropriate and latest service.
Topic
• Book Selection
• Information Selection
• Source Selection
• Tools and techniques selection.
• Finance Selection
• Marketing of Information

Unit -1 Book Selection: concept, elements Aims and utility. [ ]
Unit -2 Information Selection- Concepts, elements, aims and utility [ ]

Unit -3 Source Selection: Paper media, Non paper media and digital Media [ ]
Unit -4 Tools and Techniques selection-software, internet, others. [ ]
Unit -5 Finance Selection: Source, plans and Budget [ ]
Unit -6 Marketing of Information [ ]
Total
REFERENCE AND INFORMATION SOURCES
1641403 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

The paper has been specially designed to train the candidates for rendering personal, expeditions and to the point answer right at
the counter. Reference section of a library deals with its clients face to face therefore the man at this section should be always
ready to help his clients in his document research. He should act as a Guide in the library and should be able to direct the reader to
other sources of knowledge beyond the four walls of his own library.
Keeping in view of these expectations from a Librarian the following topics have been incorporated:

Unit -1 Reference Sources [ ]
01.01 Definition, Purpose and Scope
01.02 Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Sources of Information
01.03 Non-Paper Media
Unit -2 Basic Reference Sources [ ]

02.01 Dictionary: Subject, Language
02.02 Encyclopedia: General, Subject, Guide, Yearbooks, Almanac &
Bibliography
Unit -3 Directories [ ]
03.01 Geographical Sources, Biographical Sources, Current Events, News
Summaries.
03.02 Contemporary Archives, Asian Recorder.
Unit -4 Qualities of Reference Librarian [ ]

04.01 Academic and Human Qualities
04.02 Professional Qualities
04.03 Reference Librarian as personal friend and guide
Unit -5 Dealing with the Enquiries [ ]

05.01 Long and Short Range and Anticipatory Enquiries
Unit -6 Development of Reference and Information Services [ ]

06.01 Organization of Reference Section
06.02 Reference Work and Reference Service
06.03 Developments in India.
06.04 Needs and Achievements.
Total
Recommended Books:-
1. Reference Service and Bibliography. Dr. S. R. Ranganathan
2. iqLrd p;u ,oa lanHkZ lsok pUnzdkUr 'kekZ
LIBRARY ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT
1641404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Like all other commercial institutions, Management is the the key word in Library and Information Science. It demands a
continuous managerial ability of a man at the controlling points.
The course structure has been designed to groom a candidate with the basis of management at this stage to incorporate planning,
directing, organizing, staffing and the ability to coordinate the works of a library at every point.

Unit -1 01 Definition [ ]
01.01 Definition, Functions of Library Management, Aims and Objectives of
Library
02 Management.
Library Authority and Committee [ ]
Unit -2
02.01 Concept
02.02 Types, Formation of Committee, Functions of Committee
02.03 Meeting Procedures of Library Committee
Unit -3 03 Library Rules [ ]
03.01 Library General Rules
03.02 Library Hours
03.03 Enrolment Rules
03.04 Borrowing System/Inter- Library Loan System
03.05 Model Rules for Academics/Public/Special Libraries
Unit -4 04 Book/Document Selection Policy [ ]
04.01 Acquisition Policy
04.02 Routine Job for Document Selection
04.03 Routine Job for Acquisition of Ordinary Periodicals
Unit -5 05 Circulation Method [ ]
05.01 Kinds of Circulation Method
05.02 Browne System, Network System
Unit -6 06 Library Finance [ ]
06.01 Sources of Finance
06.02 Kinds of Budget, Account Maintenance
Unit -7 07 Library Building and Furniture [ ]
07.01 Building Planning and Implementation
07.02 Building Maintenance
07.03 Library Furniture and Fixtures
Total
Recommended Books:-
1. Library Administration R. L. Mittal
2. iqLrdky; laxBu ,oa iz’kklu MkWå vkjå ,lå ihå flag

3. Modernization in Libraries C. P. Vasistha
4. Library Administration and Management Dr. R. S. P. Singh

LIBRARY AUTOMATION AND NETWORKING
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

The Course of Library Automation and Networking has been planned to train a candidate for the purpose of automated
acquisition, technical processing, automated circulation, etc. Various library software available in the present day form the
backbone of this training. One, among the available software should be taken up for training of automation and networking of
libraries.
Automation of Library ensures automated service to the clients as well as automated in-house library work. Automation
envisages training of knowledgeable technicians.

Unit -1 Library as a System [ ]
01.01 Nature of Library System
01.02 Function of Library System
01.03 Characteristics of Library System
01.04 Differences with Office Automation
Unit -2 Automation of Library System [ ]
02.01 Planning and Designing
02.02 Academic Library
02.03 Public Library
02.04 Special Library
Unit -3 Implementation [ ]
03.01 Acquisition
03.02 Technical Processing
03.03 Cataloguing
03.04 Serial Control
Unit -4 Automation of Library Activities [ ]
04.01 Information Retrieval
04.02 Membership Record Maintenance
04.03 Budget Control
04.04 Report Generation
Unit -5 Software for Automation [ ]
05.01 Selection Criteria
05.02 Choosing Library Software Package
05.03 LYBSIS, SANJAY, SOUL, MATRIYA (any one)
05.04 Details about SOUL.
Unit -6 Networks [ ]
06.01 Important Networks: ERNET, NICNET.
06.02 Need and Purpose
06.03 Library Networks: DELNET, INFLIBNET, CALIBNET.
06.04 Network Topology
06.05 Network Software
Total
Recommended Books:-
1. Library Automation R. K. Rabindra Rao
2. Lkwpuk izk|kSfxdh ds u;s vk;ke] iwokZpy izdk’ku] ubZ fnYyh 'kadj flag
3. dEiwVj ,oa lwpuk rduhd iwokZpy izdk’ku] ubZ fnYyh 'kadj flag
4. xzFa kky; ,oa lwpuk foKku B. K. Sharma, C. Lal and K.
Kumar
BOOK AND INFORMATION SELECTION LAB
1641406 02
External : 35
Without practical student is not able to recognized his technology. The rational of the practical course content envisages
treating in accordance with the present and future requirement of library and information service with the help of innovated
technical findings of the present time.
Topic
• Familiar with tools.
• Hands on practice.
• Book and information Selection models.

Unit -1 Introduction of different selection tools: Reference tools, INB, BNB etc. [ ]
Unit -2 Preparing of techniques. [ ]
Unit -3 Hand on practice: 100 titles selection. [ ]
Total
LIBRARY AUTOMATION AND NETWORKING LAB
1641407 03

The rationale of the Practical course Content envisages treating in accordance with the present and future
requirement of Library services with the help of innovated technical findings of the modern times.

Unit -1 Introduction to the software package [ ]
• Operating system
Unit -2 Hands on Practice [ ]

• LIBSIS, SOUL (any one ) or any other Library software
Unit -3 Library Networking Model [ ]

• Bibliographic records formation
• ISBD, ISSN
Total
BOOK & INFORMATION SELECTION -TW
Subject Code Term Work No of Period in one session : Credits

Rational Recognition of the role of information as a vital input for research and development each and every aspect of
Nation depended actual information. It is the best selection of information is basic service. After aching greater idea
the student should be able to selected media because introducing various Medias.

Unit -1 Use of ICT. [ ]
Unit -2 Use of Networking. [ ]
Unit -3 Use of CAS. [ ]

Total
LIBRARY AUTOMATION AND NETWORKING -TW
Subject Code Term Work No of Period in one session : Credits
The rational of the practical course content envisages treating in accordance with the present and future requirementes of Library
Service with the help of innovated technical findings of the modern Time.
Curriculum
Sl. Topies
1. Introduction to the software package
2. Hands on Practic.
3. Library Networking Model

Unit -1 Introduction to the software package [ ]
• Operating system
Unit -2 Hands on Practice [ ]

• LIBSIS, SOUL (any one ) or any other Library software
Unit -3 Library Networking Model [ ]

• Bibliographic records formation
• ISBD, ISSN
Total
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGG.
THEORY
SCHEME
Periods per Hours of Teacher's Class Test End Semester Total Pass Marks Pass Credits
Sr. SUBJECT
SUBJECT Week Exam. Assessment (CT) Exam.(ESE) Marks ESE Marks
No. CODE
(TA) Marks Marks (A+B+C) in the
Marks B C Subject
A
1. Theory of
Machines & 1625401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Mechanisms
2. Fundamentals of
1625402 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Electronics
3. Production
1625403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Processes
4. Thermal
1625404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Engineering
5. Fluid Mechanics
1625405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
and Machinery
Total :- 16 350 500
PRACTICAL
SCHEME
Sr. SUBJECT
No. CODE
Week (A+B) Subject
6. Thermal
Engineering 1625406 02 03 15 35 50 20 01
Lab
7. Fluid
Mechanics and 1625407 03 03 15 35 50 20 01
Machinery Lab
8. Production
1625408 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Processes Lab
Total :- 09 150
TERM WORK
SCHEME
SUBJECT
(X) (Y)
Theory of Machines &
9. 1625409 03 07 18 25 10 01
Mechanisms (TW)
10. Professional Practices-IV (TW) 1625410 03 07 18 25 10 02
11.
Production Processes (TW) 1625411 02 15 35 50 20 01
Total :- 08 100
THEORY OF MACHINES & MECHANISMS

1625401
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY

Unit-1 Fundamentals and types of Mechanisms :
1.1 Kinematics of Machines: - Definition of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics,
Kinetics, Kinematic link, Kinematic Pair and its types, constrained motion
and its types, Kinematic chain and its types, Mechanism, inversion, machine
and structure.
1.2 Inversions of Kinematic Chain : 12 14
1.2.1 Inversion of four bar chain, coupled wheels of Locomotive &
Pentograph.
1.2.2 Inversion of Single Slider Crank chain- Rotary I.C. Engines
mechanism, Whitworth quick return mechanism, Crank and Slotted
lever quick return mechanism.
1.3.3 Ackerman’s Steering gear mechanism.
1.3.4 Foot operated air pump mechanism.
Unit-2 Velocity and Acceleration in Mechanism :
2.1 Concept of relative velocity and relative acceleration of a point on link,
angular velocity and angular acceleration, inter- relation between linear and
angular velocity and acceleration.
2.2 Drawing of velocity and acceleration diagram of a given configuration, 09 09
diagrams of simple mechanisms. Determination of velocity and acceleration
of a point on link by relative velocity method [Excluding coriollis components
of acceleration].
2.3 Analytical method [no derivation] and Klein’s construction to determine
velocity and acceleration of different links in single slider crank mechanism.
Unit-3 Cams and Followers :
3.1 Concept, definition and application of Cams and Followers.
3.2 Classification of Cams and Followers.
08 08
3.3 Different follower motions and their displacement diagrams like uniform
velocity, SHM, uniform acceleration and Retardation.
3.4 Drawing of profile of radial cam with knife-edge and roller follower with and
without offset with reciprocating motion (graphical method).
Unit-4 Power Transmission :
4.1 Types of Drives – Belt, Chain, Rope, Gear drives & their comparison.
4.2 Belt Drives - flat belt, V– belt & its applications, material for flat and V-belt, angle
of lap, belt length. Slip and creep. Determination of velocity ratio, ratio of tight
side and slack side tension, centrifugal tension and initial tension, condition for
maximum power transmission( Simple numericals)
4.3 Chain Drives – Advantages & Disadvantages, Selection of Chain & Sprocket 14 16
wheels, methods of lubrication.
4.4 Gear Drives – Spur gear terminology, types of gears and gear trains, their
selection for different application, train value & Velocity ratio for compound,
reverted and simple epicyclic gear train, methods of lubrication, Law of gearing.
4.5 Rope Drives – Types, applications, advantages & limitations of Steel ropes.
Unit-5 Flywheel and Governors :
5.1 Flywheel - Concept, function and application of flywheel with the help of turning
moment diagram for single cylinder 4-Stroke I.C. Engine (no Numericals).
Coefficient of fluctuation of energy, coefficient of fluctuation of speed and its
06 06
significance.
5.2 Governors - Types, concept, function and application & Terminology of
Governors.
5.3 Comparison between Flywheel and Governor.
Unit-6 Brakes, Dynamometers, Clutches & Bearings :
6.1 Function of brakes and dynamometer, types of brakes and Dynamometers,
comparison between brakes and dynamometer. 12 14
6.2 Construction and working of i) shoe brake, ii) Band Brake, iii) Internal
expanding shoe brake iv) Disc Brake.
6.3 Concept of Self Locking & Self energizing brakes.
6.4 Numerical problems to find braking force and braking torque for shoe & band
brake.
6.5 Construction and working of i) Rope Brake Dynamometer, ii)
Hydraulic Dynamometer, iii) Eddy current Dynamometer.
6.6 Clutches- Uniform pressure and Uniform Wear theories.
6.7 Function of Clutch and its application, Construction and working of
i) Single plate clutch, ii) Multiplate clutch, iii) Centrifugal Clutch iv)Cone
clutch v) Diaphragm clutch. (Simple numericals on single and Multiplate
clutch).
6.8 Bearings – i) Simple Pivot, ii) Collar Bearing, iii) Conical pivot.
Torque & power lost in friction (no derivation). Simple numericals.
Unit-7. Balancing & Vibrations :

7.1 Concept of balancing. Balancing of single rotating mass. Graphical method for
balancing of several masses revolving in same plane. 03 03
7.2 Concept and terminology used in vibration, causes of vibrations in machines,
their harmful effects and remedies.
Total 64 70
Eurasia publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 2006 edition
Theory of machines Khurmi Gupta
McGraw Hill companies II Edition
Theory of Machine S.S.Rattan
Theory of machines P.L.Ballaney Khanna Publication

Theory of machines Timo Shenko Wiley Eastern
Bombay Metro – Politan book ltd.
Theory of machines Jagdishlal
Theory of machines Ghosh - Mallik Affilated East west press

Theory of machines Beven T. CBS Publication
Theory of machines J.E.Shigley Mc Graw Hill
Theory of Machines & D.P. Mukherjee Foundation Publishing
Mehanisms
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONICS

1625402
L T P/S ESE : 70
04
04 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY
Electronic Devices :
Introduction to electronic devices, their symbols, principle of working and
testing procedure – Diode, Zener diode, Power diode, Varactor diode, Bipolar
Unit-01 Junction Transistor (BJT), Field Effect Transistor(FET) - JFET & MOSFET, Uni- 10 16
junction Transistor(UJT), power devices – DIAC,TRIAC, SCR, Photo devices-,
LDR, Photo diode, Photo transistor, LED & LED display ( 7 segment), Liquid
crystal display(LCD), opto –coupler, thermister-NTC,PTC Power supply.
Circuit diagram and operation : 09 15
Half wave, full wave & bridge rectifier. Filters – L, C, L-C, п filter Concept
of unregulated power supply, regulated power supply- line regulation & load
regulation. Principle of operation, block diagram and application of shunt
Unit-02 regulated power supply, series regulated power supply, switch mode power
supply (SMPS), 3 pin IC regulated, IC 723 adjustable power supply. Block
diagram of UPS, Concept of online and off line UPS. Concept of constant
current limiting and fold back current limiting, concept of constant voltage
source, constant current source.
Transistor :
Transistor as a switch and amplifier, single stage transistor amplifier CB,
CE and CC configuration and their applications, RC coupled and direct
coupled amplifier, their frequency response and application.
Power amplifier- class A, class B, class C, class AB, their comparison on
operating point, conduction cycle, efficiency, application.(No circuits
Unit-03 expected) 09 15
Oscillator: Requirement of oscillator circuit, Barkhauson’s criteria of
oscillator, circuit diagram and its application-. Phase shift oscillator, Hartley
oscillator, Colpitts oscillator, Crystal oscillator.
OP Amp :
Block diagram, configurations and use of op amp as - Inverting, Non-
Unit-04 inverting, Summing, Voltage to current converter, current to voltage
05 10
converter, differentiator, Comparator, Wien bridge oscillator, Schmitt’s
trigger, Instrument amplifier
Digital Electronics :
Number system- Decimal, Binary, Hexadecimal, BCD, Decimal to binary
conversion, , Decimal – Hexadecimal conversion.
Study of logic gates, Symbol, truth table and IC numbers - NOT, AND, OR,
NAND, NOR, XOR, XNOR and NAND as universal gate.
Unit-05 09 14
Flip Flops – Block diagram of flip flop, RS flip flop, D flip flop ,Toggle , JK flip
flop, Master Slave JK flip flop, Clocked flip flop – level triggered and edge
triggered , Application of flip flop – Frequency divider, Ring counter, Shift
register. Seven segment driving circuit, Encoder, Decoder, Multiplexer, De
multiplier.
IC 555 :
Block diagram, Multi vibrator circuit diagram and working for Mono stable,
Bi stable and Astable Multivibrator, Analog to Digital Converters , Digital to
Analog converter .
Unit-06 Block diagram and working of – Welding control circuits –sequential timer
06 10
Temperature control circuits using SCR,FWR Speed control circuits Level
control circuit using variable capacitor and potentiometer.
Total 48 80

S. Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi
Principles of Electronics V.K. Mehta
Electronic Principles Paul Malvino Tata McGraw Hill Publishers

Electronic Devices & Components’
A. Mottershead Prentice Hall of India
Modern Digital Electronics
R.P. Jain Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
Basic Electronics Grob Bernard Tata McGraw Hill Publishers

Paul B. ZBar, Albert
Basic Electronics - a Text Lab Manual
p.Malvino,Michael Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
A. Miller
Industrial Electronics - a Text Lab Manual
Paul B. ZBar Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
Fundamentals of Electronics Ashish K Majumdar Foundation Publishing
PRODUCTION PROCESSES

1625403
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY
Chapter
Turning : 03 08
1.1 Lathe :
Angle calculations for taper turning.
Cutting tool nomenclature and tool signature.
Cutting parameters and machining time calculation.
Unit-01 1.2 CNC Lathe : 10 22
Introduction, classification, advantages, positioning system, constructional
features.
Part programming : programming format, word, statement, block.
Preparatory and miscellaneous code, Fixed cycles in programming – canned
cycle, do-loop, subroutine.
Drilling :
Unit-02 Twist drill nomenclature. Cutting parameters , machining time calculation, Deep 02 06
hole drilling.
Milling and gear cutting
3.1 Milling : 03 06
Cutting parameters, machining time calculation, Milling operations – plain
milling, side and face milling, form milling, gang milling, end milling, face
milling, T- slot milling, slitting.
Unit-03 3.2 Gear cutting : 06 12
Gear cutting on milling machine –Dividing head and Indexing methods
Gear hobbing, Principle of operation, Advantages And limitations.
Hobbing techniques – climb and conventional, Gear shaping - Principle of
operation, advantages, disadvantages, Gear finishing processes - Gear
shaving , Gear grinding, Gear burnishing, gear lapping .
Grinding :
Classification of machines , Grinding wheel composition, types and shapes,
Unit-04 02 05
Designation. Types of Grinding operations.
Super Finishing Processes
6.1 Honing,
Unit-05 6.2 Lapping, 02 05
6.3 Burnishing,
6.4 Buffing and polishing.
Plastic Moulding
Types of plastic, Compression molding, Transfer moulding, Injection moulding,
Unit-06 04 06
blow molding, vacuum forming, extrusion, calendaring, rotational moulding.
Total 32 70
Text/Referernce Books:
Elements of workshop Technology-Volume S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Bose, Roy
Media Promoters and Publishers
I & II
Limited.
Production Technology Volume- I & II
O. P. Khanna & Lal Dhanpat Rai Publications.
Workshop Technology- Volume –I,II & III W. A. J. Chapman,
Viva Books (p) Ltd.
S. J. Martin
A text book of Foundry Tech.
O.P. Khanna Dhanpat Rai Publications.
Production Technology
R.B. Gupta Satya Prakashan New Delhi
Workshop Technology Volume-I& II
H.S.Bawa Tata McGraw-Hill
Introduction to Manufacturing Processes
John A. Schey McGraw-Hill
Manufacturing Technology M. Adithan A. B. Gupta
New age International
Pabla B. S. M. Adithan
CNC machines New age international limited.
Fundamental of metal cutting and machine
B. L. Juneja New age international limited.
tools
Technology of Machine Tools. Steve Krar, Albert Check
McGraw-Hill International.
CAD/CAM Principals and Applications
P. N. Rao Tata McGraw-Hill
Manufacruting Technology Metal Cutting P. N. Rao Tata McGraw-Hill
& Machne tools
Production Processes R.N. Pandey, S.P. Sharma Foundation Publishing
THERMAL ENGINEERING

1625404
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENTS : THEORY
Sources of energy
1.1 Brief description of energy sources
- Classification of energy sources
- Renewable, Non-Renewable
1.2 Fossil fuels, including CNG, LPG.
1.3 Solar
Unit-1. 08 06
- Flat plate and concentrating collectors & its application.
- Solar Water Heater
- Photovoltaic Cell, Solar Distillation.
1.4 Wind, Tidal, Geothermal
1.5 Biogas, Biomass, Bio-diesel
1.6 Hydraulic, Nuclear
1.7 Fuel cell – list of fuel cells
Fundamentals of Thermodynamics :
2.1 Concepts of pure substance, types of systems , properties of systems ,
Extensive and Intensive properties with units and conversion like P, V, ρ
And temperature. Point function and path function.
2.2 Work and Energy
- Thermodynamic definition of work, heat, difference between heat
and work, P.E., K.E, Internal Energy, Flow work, concepts of enthalpy,
entropy.
2.3 Laws of Thermodynamic
- Zeroth Law, Temperature measurement, principle of energy
conservation, irreversibility, Second Law of Thermodynamics,
Kelvin Plank, Clausius statements and their equivalence, Concept
of perpetual motion machine 1 and 2.
Unit-2. 2.4 Application of Thermodynamic laws 12 14
- Steady Flow Energy equation and its application to open system
like boiler, engine, nozzle, turbine, compressor & condenser.
2.5 Application of Second law to Heat Engine, Heat Pump and Refrigerator.
Ideal Gases :
3.1 Concept of Ideal gas, Charle’s law, Boyle’s law, Avogadro’s law, equation
of state, Characteristic gas constant and universal gas constant.
3.2 Ideal gas processes: -
- Isobaric, Isochoric, Isothermal, Adiabatic,Polytropic, Isentropic with
Unit-3. 08 14
representation of the processes on P-V and T-S diagram (only simple
numericals)
Steam and Steam Boiler :
4.1 Generation of steam at constant pressure with representation on
various charts such as T-H, T-S, H-S, P-H. Properties of steam and use of
steam table, Quality of steam and its determination with Separating,
throttling and combined Separating and throttling calorimeter (no
Unit-4. numerical). 14 14
4.2 Vapour process : -
- constant pressure, constant volume, constant enthalpy, constant
entropy (numericals using steam table and Mollier chart), Rankine
Cycle.
4.3 Steam Boilers: -
- Classification of boilers.
- Construction and working of Cochran, Babcock and Wilcox, La- mont
and Loeffler boiler. Boiler draught natural and Mechanical.
4.4 Boiler mounting and accessories [to be covered in practical].
Steam Turbines and Condensers :
5.1 Steam nozzle: -
- Continuity equation, types of nozzles, concept of Mach number,
critical pressure, application of steam nozzles.
5.2 Steam turbine: -
- Classification of turbines, Construction and working of Impulse and
Reaction turbine.
5.3 Compounding of turbines, Regenerative feed heating, bleeding of steam,
nozzle control governing (no velocity diagrams and numerical).
5.4 Steam condenser: -
- Dalton’s law of partial pressure, function and classification of
Unit-5. condensers, construction and working of surface condensers. 12 14
5.5 Sources of air leakage, concept of condenser efficiency, vacuum
efficiency (no numerical).
5.6 Cooling Towers.
- Force draught, natural draught and induced draught.
Heat Transfer :
6.1 Modes of heat transfer: -
- Conduction, convection and radiation.
6.2 Conduction by heat transfer
- Fourier’s law, thermal conductivity,
conduction through cylinder, thermal resistance, composite walls,
combined conduction and convection (Simple numerical).
6.3 Heat transfer by Radiation: -
Unit-6. - Thermal Radiation, Absorptivity, Transmissivity, Reflectivity, 10 08
Emissivity, black and gray bodies, Stefan-Boltzman law.
6.4 Heat Exchangers: -
- Shell and tube, plate type, multiphase heat exchangers. Materials
Used and applications of heat exchangers.
Total 64 70
Text /Referemce Books:

A Course in Thermal Engineering Domkundwar V. M. Dhanpat Rai & Co.
A Course in Thermal Engineering P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers
A text book of Thermal Engineering. R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & co. Ltd.
A Course in Thermal Engineering R. K. Rajput Laxmi Publication, Delhi
Heat Engine Vol. - I & II Patel and Karmchandani Acharya Publication
Engineering Thermodynamics P. K. Nag Tata McGraw Hill
Thermal Engineering B. K. Sarkar Tata McGraw Hill
Thermal Engineering Rajiv Kr Singh, P.K. Gupta Foundation Publishing
FLUID MECHANICS & MACHINERY

1625405
L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
— — — CT : 20
CONTENT : THEORY

Properties of fluid :
1.1 Density, Specific gravity, Specific Weight, Specific Volume
Unit-01 1.2 Dynamic Viscosity, Kinematic Viscosity, Surface tension, Capillarity 04 04
1.3 Vapour Pressure, Compressibility
Fluid Pressure & Pressure Measurement :
2.1 Fluid pressure, Pressure head, Pressure intensity
2.2 Concept of absolute vacuum, gauge pressure, atmospheric pressure,
absolute pressure.
2.3 Simple and differential manometers, Bourden pressure gauge.
Unit -02 09 12
2.4 Concept of Total pressure on immersed bodies, center of pressure.
Note: Numericals on Manometers, Total Pressure & Centre of pressure
Fluid Flow :
3.1 Types of fluid flows
3.2 Continuity equation
3.3 Bernoulli’s theorem
3.4 Venturimeter – Construction, principle of working, Coefficient of
Unit-03 discharge, Derivation for discharge through venturimeter. 12
09
3.5 Orifice meter – Construction, Principle of working, hydraulic
coefficients, Derivation for discharge through Orifice meter
3.6 Pitot tube – Construction, Principle of Working
Note :- Numericals on Venturimeter, orifice meter, pitot tube
Flow Through Pipes :
5.1 Laws of fluid friction ( Laminar and turbulent)
5.2 Darcy’s equation and Chezy’s equation for frictional losses.
5.3 Minor losses in pipes
Unit-04 05 06
5.4 Hydraulic gradient and total gradient line.
5.5 Hydraulic power transmission through pipe
Note: Numericals to estimate major and minor losses
Impact of jet :
4.1 Impact of jet on fixed vertical, moving vertical flat plates.
4.2 Impact of jet on curved vanes with special reference to turbines &
Unit-05 pumps 09 08
Note - Simple Numericals on work done and efficiency
Hydraulic Turbines :
6.1 Layout of hydroelectric power plant.
6.2 Features of Hydroelectric power plant.
6.3 Classification of hydraulic turbines.
6.4 Selection of turbine on the basis of head and discharge available
Unit-06 10 10
6.5 Construction and working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan
turbine.
6.6 Draft tubes – types and construction, Concept of cavitation in turbines
6.7 Calculation of Work done, Power, efficiency of turbine.
A] Centrifugal Pumps :
7.1 Construction , principle of working and applications 10 10
Unit-07 7.2 Types of casings and impellers.
7.3 Concept of multistage
7.4 Priming and its methods, Cavitation
7.5 Manometric head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, Overall
efficiency, NPSH
7.6 Performance Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps
7.7 Trouble Shooting
7.8 Construction, working and applications of submersible, jet pump
Note :- Numericals on calculations of overall efficiency and power required

to drive pumps.
B] Reciprocating Pump :
7.9 Construction ,working principle and applications of single and double
acting reciprocating pumps. 08 06
7.10 Concept of Slip, Negative slip, Cavitation and separation
7.11 Use of Air Vessel.
7.11 Indicator diagram with effect of acceleration head & frictional head.
Note:- No Derivations and Numericals on reciprocating pumps.

Total 64 70
Hydraulic, fluid mechanics & fluid Ramamrutham S.

Dhanpat Rai and Sons New
machines
Delhi
Hydraulics and fluid mechanics including Modi P. N. and Seth S. M.
Standard Book House. New
Hydraulic machines
Delhi
Fluid Mechanics Streeter Victor, Bedford K.W., McGraw Hill Int.
Wylie E.B
One Thousand Solved Problems in Fluid K. Subramanya Tata McGraw Hill
Mechanics
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Bishwajet Ranjan, Anand Sharma Foundation Publishing
Pump manufactures’ catalogs such as Kirloskar Brothers, KSB, Kishor pumps etc.
THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB
(MECH. ENGG. GROUP)
1625406 L T P/S ESE : 50
01
Intellectual Skill :
1. Understand different sources of energy and their applications.
2. Understand various concepts and fundamentals of thermodynamics.
3. Understand concepts and laws of ideal gasses.
4. Understand vapour processes, steam boilers and different mountings and accessories.
5. Understand modes of heat transfer and concept of heat exchanges.
6. Interpret steam tables, mollier chart and relationship between different thermodynamic
properties.
Motor Skills :
1. Collect and write technical specifications of photovoltaic cells and identify different components on
panels of photovoltaic cells.
2. Conduct trial on the setup for calculation of thermal conductivity of metal rod
3. Trace path of flue gases and water steam circuit in a boiler.
4. Conduct trial on solar water heating system.
List of practical:
1. Collection of technical data and specification of photovoltaic cell by referring to manufacturers’
catalogues.
2. Study and Trial on solar water heating system.
3. Report on visit to wind power generation plant / biogas plant / hydraulic power plant.
4. Trace the flue gas path and water-steam circuit with the help of boiler model and write a report.
5. Report on visit to sugar factory / Dairy / steam power plant with specifications of boiler and list of
mountings and accessories.
6. Calculation of thermal conductivity of a solid metallic rod.
7. Verification of Stefan-Boltzman’s law
8. Study and compare various heat exchangers such as radiators, evaporators, condensers, plate heat
exchangers etc.
Numericals on vapour processes and ideal gas processes (minimum two problems on each)
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LAB
(MECH. ENGG. GROUP)
1625407 L T P/S ESE : 50
01

1) Select and use appropriate flow measuring device.
2) Select and use appropriate pressure measuring device.
3) Analyze the performance of pumps and turbines.

Motor Skills:
1) Use flow measuring device.
2) Use pressure measuring device.
3) Operate pumps and turbines.

List of Practical:
1. Calibration of Bourden pressure gauge with the help of Dead Weight Pressure gauge.
2. Verification of Bernoulli’s Theorem.
3. Determination of Coefficient of Discharge of Venturimeter.
4. Determination of Coefficient of Discharge, coefficient of contraction and coefficient of velocity of

orifice meter.
5. Determination of coefficient of friction of flow through pipes.
6. Trial on Pelton wheel to determine overall efficiency.
7. Trial on centrifugal pump to determine overall efficiency.
8. Trial on reciprocating pump to determine overall efficiency.

PRODUCTION PROCESSES PRACTICAL
(MECH. ENGG. GROUP)
1625408 L T P/S ESE : 50
02
Note: Six hours practical work will be performed during practical examination Student will prepare
one jobs from the following list of practicals.
List :
machine.
10) Fittings related jobs.
THEORY OF MACHINES & MECHANISMS - TW
(MECH. ENGG. GROUP)
1625409 L T P/S Internal : 07 01
List of Term Work :- (Perform any four) -
1) Draw the profile of radial cam for the given motion of follower. (At least four problems)
2) Determine the radius of rotation of flyball for different speed of governor and draw a graph between radius of rotation
versus speed.
3) Dismantling and assembly of mechanically operated braking mechanism for two wheelers.
4) Determi nation of power transmitted by any belt drive using any one dynamometer.
5) Dismantling and assembly of multiplate clutch of two-wheeler.
6) Determine graphically balancing of several masses rotating in a single plane.

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IV- TW
(MECH.+ CIVIL ENGG. GROUP)
1625410 L T P/S Internal : 07 02
Contents : Term Work Hrs/week

Sr. No. Activities Practical
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be submitted by the
individual student, to form a part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries :
Unit-1 Sugar Factory / Dairy / Chemical Industry / Thermal Power Plant . 14
vi) Machine shop having CNC machines.
vii) ST workshop / Auto service station
viii) City water supply pumping station
ix) Manufacturing unit to observe finishing and super finishing processes.
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert lectures to be organized from any two of the
following areas:
Interview Techniques.
Unit-2 Modern Boilers – Provisions in IBR Applications of Sensors and Transducers 06
Alternate fuels – CNG / LPG , Biodiesel, Ethanol, hydrogen Piping technology
Information Search :
Information search can be done through manufacturer’s catalogue, websites,
magazines, books etc. and submit a report any one topic. Following topics are suggested :
v) Engine lubricants & additives
vi) Automotive gaskets and sealants
vii) Engine coolants and additives
viii) Two and Four wheeler carburetor.
Unit-3 ix) Power steering 08
x) Filters
xi) Different drives/Transmission systems in two wheelers.
xii) Types of bearings – applications and suppliers.
xiii) Heat Exchangers
xiv) Maintenance procedure for solar equipment.
Tools holder on general purpose machines and drilling machines.
Seminar :
Unit-4 Seminar topic shall be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each student shall submit a 08
report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar (Presentation time – 10 minutes)
Mini Project / Activities : (any one)
a) Prepare one model out of card board paper / acrylic / wood / thermocol
/ metal such as : i) Elliptical Trammel ii) Pantograph iii) Coupling iv)
Unit-5 Cams and Followers v) Geneva mechanism 12
b) Dismantling of assembly (e.g. jig / fixtures , tool post , valves etc.) Take
measurement and prepare drawings / sketches of different parts.
c) Make a small decorative water fountain unit.
d) Toy making with simple operating mechanisms.
Total 48
Professional Practices-IV Sudha Ranjan Foundation Publishing
PRODUCTION PROCESSES - TW
(MECH. ENGG. GROUP)

1625411 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
Note: One hour of the Term Work per week is to be utilized for instructions by subject teacher to
explain & demonstrate the accessories, tool holding & work holding devises as mentioned in Term Work
contents. The student will write assignments based on these sessions..
List of Term Work :
machine.
10) One Fittings related job.
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN MODERN OFFICE PRACTICE
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
Principle of
Management &
1. Human Resource
1626401 04 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 04
Management
Management
2. Accountancy
1626402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
3. Secretarial Practice 1626403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
E-Typing-II
4. (English + Hindi)
1626404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Money and Banking 1626405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Total:- 16 350 500

PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
Week of Internal (A) External (B) Marks in the
Exam. (A+B) Subject
E-Typing Lab-II
6. (English +Hindi)
1626406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Shorthand Lab-I
7. (English +Hindi)
1626407 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Stenography Lab-I
8. (English+ Hindi)
1626408 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 12 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Periods per Marks of Marks of Total Pass Marks in Credits
(X) (Y)
Shorthand-I (English+ Hindi)
9. (TW)
1626409 03 15 35 50 20 01
Stenography-I (English+
10. Hindi) (TW) 1626410 02 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 05 100
PRINCIPLE OF MANAGEMENT & HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
1626401 4
04 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
This subject gives a unified picture of what Management is and how it is applicable to various forms of Organization in this
country. It gives a basic knowledge about managerial function in the most useful and organized way.
A student must be sensitive to the environment of the place where he may be operating. So he must learn to make decisions
and to plan, organize and control activity in the environmental perspective of his own country.

Unit -1 What is Management? [02]
Meaning, Nature, Function, Social Responsibility of Management.
Unit -2 Planning [05]

Definition, Nature, Types, Steps.
Unit -3 Decision Making [05]

Types of Decision, Steps in Decision, Factors influencing decision-making
process.
Unit -4 Organizing [05]
Meaning and Principles, Theory of Organizing, Steps in Organizing, Organizing
Structures, Delegation and its meaning, Elements of Delegation, Principles of
Effective Delegation, Centralization vs. Decentralization of authority.
Unit -5 Staffing [05]
Nature and Purpose, Recruitment, Selection.
Unit -6 Directing [05]
Meaning and Elements of Directing, Nature, Function, Unity of Command vs.
Overlapping Directions.
Unit -7 Motivation [04]
Meaning and Importance, Factors of Motivation.
Unit -8 Co-ordination [06]
Meaning, Importance, Ways to facilitate co-ordination, Sense of Mutuality, Co-
operation, Steps towards co-ordination, Types of Co-ordination, Principles of
Co-ordination.
Unit -9 Leadership [03]
Meaning and Characteristics of Leadership, Types of Leader, Traits, Theory of
Leadership.
Unit 10 Controlling [05]
Definition, Process Controlling, Span of Control, Principles of Controlling.
Unit -11 Reviewing/Appraisal [01]
Assessing the Performance, Organizational behavior, Interaction with Peers,
Juniors and Superiors, Conduct, Discipline, Communication Skill, Initiative,
Drive, Moral, etc.
Unit -12 Human Resource Planning [04 ]

01.01 Manpower Planning - Benefits, Process; MBO.
Unit -13 Recruitment and Selection Process, Recruitment Policy [ 06 ]

02.01 Forecast of Manpower Requirement
02.02 Sources of Recruitment
02.03 Techniques of Recruitment
Unit -14 Promotion, Transfers, Separation, Absenteeism [06 ]
03.01 Turnover, tardiness, monotony, fatigue, Causes and ways to
minimize horizontal and vertical promotion.
03.02 Purpose of Promotion, Promotion Policy.
03.03 Purpose of Transfer, Transfer Policy.
03.04 Separation.
03.05 Absenteeism - Measures for Control of Absenteeism.
Unit -15 Employee Training and Development [ 06]
04.01 Three Terms: Training, Development and Education.
04.02 Definition between Training and Development.
04.03 Training methods and technique, On the job training, In-house training,
Short term and Long term training.
Unit -16 Human Resource Management and Economic Liberalization [06]

05.01 Definition, Scope and Objectives of Human Resource Management,
Function of Human Resources Department.
Unit -17 Human Resource Accounting [06]
06.01 Need for Human Resource Accounting - Present.
06.02 Practice and Consequence.
06.03 Objectives of HRA (Human Resources Accounting).
Unit -18 Human Resource Audit [05]

07.01 Objectives - Areas of Human Resource Audit.
Unit -19 Human Resource Research [05]

08.01 Meaning of Research.
08.02 Characteristics of Human Resource Research.
08.03 Objectives of Human Resource Research.
Unit -20 Exit Policy [06]
09.01 Voluntary Retirement Scheme: Effects of Excess Manpower,
Contribution of Computer towards making H. R. Redundant, Exit Policy:
Procedure for Voluntary Retirement Scheme. Merits & Demerits of VRS.
09.02 Policy of Govt. of India regarding rehabilitation of VRS, Optees, Schemes,
Grants.
Total 50
Books Recommended:
1. Personnel Management Text Cases C. B. Mamoria and S. V. Gaikar
2. Principles and Practice of Management J. M. Prasad
3. Principles of Management P. C. Tripathy & P. N. Reddy
4. O;olk;] laxBu] izc/a ku ,oa iz’kklu ;ksxUs nz izlkn oekZ

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTANCY
Subject Code
L T P/S ESE : 70
1626402 3
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

Management Accounting is the essential tech. of management with rising costs and striking of profit margin, the need to
plan and control is gaining vital importance.
Management Accounting has immense potentially to meet the growing complex, informative needs of planners, decision-
makers and controllers of modern commercial and Industrial enterprises.

Unit -1 Management Accounting [05]
Concept, Importance and Scope, Double Entry System. Books of Accounts,
Journal, Ledger,
Unit -2 Trial balance Accounting,
Depreciation and Work-sheet, System
Inventory of Book Keeping,
Accounting Single Entry
and Valuation, ProfitSystem,
& Loss [05]
Account.
Unit -3 Statement of financial Position. Its nature and importance. Analysis of financial [05]
statement, Cash flow statement funds flow statement.
Unit -4 Consignment Joint Venture Account Current, Average, Due Date [05]
Unit -5 Receipt & Payment Accounts, Income and Expenditure, Account & Balance [05]
Sheet.
Unit -6 Partnerships Accounts I General Account Problems Relating to admission [05]

Retirement and Death of a Partner
Unit -7 Partnershiping Accounts II [05]

- General
- Settlement of Accounts
- Entries in Books
- Sale to a Company
- Insolventry of Partner
Unit -8 Insolvency Accounts [05]

Unit -9 Hire Purchase Installment Royalties [05]
Unit -10 Budget & Budgetary Control Nature and types of budgets Preparation of [05]
budgets Human aspect of budgetary Control
Total 50
Books Recommended:
1 Introduction to Accountancy - T. S. Grewal
2 Advance Accountancy - M. C. Garewal
3 Advanced Accounts Vol I & Vol II - M. P. Gupta & B. M. Agarwal
4 Principles of Management Accounting - Dr. S. N. Maheshwari

SECRETARIAL PRACTICE
1626403 3
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

There is a great demand for qualified secretaries. Diploma holder student can perform this work effectively & efficiently.
This subject gives knowledge that what a company secretary shall do under law and should do in discharging his functions.
Contents : Theory
Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Types of Secretaries and their function [05]
Unit -2 Company Secretary [05]
Qualification, Appointment, Role and Function Rights, Duties and Liabilities of a
company secretary. Drafting of Agenda and Minutes
Unit -3 Different type of Companies [06]
03.01 Function of a Company, Types of Companies.
03.02 Memorandum of Association, Piercing Corporate Level
03.03 Articles of Association, Types of Ownership.
03.04 Prospectus
03.05 Certificate of Commencement
03.06 Share Capital and Debenture, Types of Shares, Bonds, Stock Market, Dividend
03.07 Secretarial Practice involved in formation of Company
Unit -4 Issue of Share and Debenture (Secretarial Practice) [06]
04.01 Issue of Share and Debenture(Secretarial Practice) involved there in, Share
Application, Short Allotment Calls. Primary and Secondary Market.
04.02 Forfeiture and Reissue of Shares and Debenture
04.03 Share Certificate and Share Warrant.
04.04 Share Transfer and Transmission
Unit -5 Company Management [06]
05.01 Appointment, Duties and Power of a Director
05.02 Appointment, Duties and Power of a Managing Director
05.03 Appointment, Duties and Power of a Manager
05.04 Appointment, Duties and Power of a Secretary
Unit -6 Company Meeting [04]
06.01 Types of Company Meeting
06.02 Secretarial Work regarding Constituent of a meeting, Convening AGM,
Proceeding of Board Meeting.
Unit -7 Procedure of Conducting Meeting [06]
07.01 Preparation of Agenda
07.02 Quorum
07.03 Voting
07.04 Roll
07.05 Proxies
Unit -8 Resolution [06]
08.01 Types of Resolution, Recording of Minutes
08.02 Confirmation, Forms of Resolution
Unit -9 Accounts and Audit [06]
09.01 Filing of Annual Accounts
09.02 Filing of Audit Reports.
09.03 Legal Requirements
Total 50
Recommended Books:-
1. A Text Book of Secretarial Practice Ashok K Bagrial
2. Secretarial Practice M.C. Kuchhal
3. O;olk; laxBu ,oa çca/k txnh'k çdk'k

4 O;kolk; laxBu çca/k ,oa ç'kklu MkW v"Bkuk
E-TYPEWRITING -II (ENGLISH+HINDI)
1626404 3
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
RATIONALE
COMPUTER is used in the offices for typing letters, bills, invoices, forms, notices, reports,
statements and other written forms of communication. The students of this programme must have
the necessary skills to operate the key-board of computer which is having similar key positions.
The proficiency in e-typing will enable the students to perform in the written communication,
necessary for modern offices, efficiently and effectively. Through the series of courses in typing
the necessary skills shall by developed in the students of this diploma programme.
CONTENTS : THEORY
E-TYPING II (ENGLISH)
Unit-1. E-Typewriting :-
• Business: Different styles of letters – indented, [05]
• semi indented and blocked
Unit-2. Official:
• Office Memorandum,
• office order, [05]
• DO letter and
• Office Note
Unit-3. Excel:
• Starting with Excel.
• Understanding worksheets/spreadsheet and
workbooks,
• Entering worksheet data –entering text, entering [06]
numbers and formulas, entering dates and times.
Navigating between spreadsheets.
• Opening a Workbook, Saving a workbook and
printing a Worksheet / Workbook.
Unit-4. Editing Excel:
• Worksheets/Spreadsheets – selecting cells,
• Editing cell contents,
• Inserting and deleting cells, Inserting and deleting [06]
rows and columns,
• Working with worksheet ranges.
• Using cut, copy and paste options, clearing data.
Unit-5. Using Formulas and Functions:
• Using arithmetic operators,
• Using range names in formulas, using relative
and Absolute cell referencing, copying
formulas. [04]
• Using auto sum for efficiency, common
functions – sum (), average (),max(), min(),
count(), countif (), counta (). Using paste
function.
Unit-6. Using Special Tools:
•Spell checking, auto correct worksheets, finding [02]
and replacing data, using autofill, adding
comments.
Unit-7. Formatting Worksheets:
• Center aligning, left aligning, right aligning and
justifying cell content, row and column height,
changing width and font.
• Making format changes, Auto formatting [06]
worksheets, additional formatting options –
special alignment, special cell borders, special
cell shades, protecting cells. Conditional
formatting, tab colors help separate worksheets
Unit-8. E-mails Management:
• Opening e-mail accounts using popular sites
offereing free email services like Yahoo,
Google,Rediffmail, Indiatimes, Hotmail etc.,
• composing a message,
• formatting text, selecting the e-mail message
[06]
format, add a signature,
• sending and receiving emails with/without
attachment, reading email, replying to email,
• Printing an email,deleting email,
• Porwarding an email, creating folders/labels for
archiving emails.
Books Recommended (English)
1. English Typewriting Instructor & Office Manual Dr. G. D. Bist

2. 2. Typography Dr. G. D. Bist
3. 3. Typing Test Guide Dr. G. D. Bist
4. 4. Principles of Typewriting By S. S. Sangal and D. P. Bhatia, Pitman Shorthand
5. School
5. dk;kZy; i)fr : MkW.xksikynÙk fc"V
6 Office Procedure and Practice-I. : NCERT
7 Office Management and Secretarial Practice. : V. P. Singh

E-TYPING - II (HINDI)
Hrs/week Marks
Unit-1. 1- i=&O;ogkj &
• O;kolkf;d ,oa 'kkldh; i=]
• i= Vkbi djus dh fof/k;ka
[06]
• O;fDrxr] O;kolkf;d ,oa 'kkldh; i=ksa esa varj]
• i=ksa ds Hkkx]
• 'kkldh; ,oa v)Z&'kkldh; i=]
• v'kkldh; fVIi.kh] Kkiu] vf/klwpuk vkfn ds izk:iA
Unit-2. • dkcZu izfrfyfidj.k ,oa
• LVsfa ly dkVuk ,oa cgqifz rfyfidj.k
• fofHkUu izdkj ds dkcZuksa ds iz;ksx] LVsfa ly dk iz;ksx] [06]
• QksVksdkih e'khu vkfn ls izfrfyfidj.kA
Unit-3. • ik.Mqfyfi Vkbi djuk ,oa la'kks/ku fpg~uksa dk iz;ksx [04]

• la'kksf/kr ik.Mqfyfi ,oa la'kksf/kr lkexzh Vkbi djus ls iwoZ dh
lko/kfu;ka]
• la{ksfir v{kjksa dk iz;ksxA.
Total
laLrqfr iqLrdksa dh lwph %&

1- nsoukxjh VkbijkbfVax izf'k{kd & x`g ea=kky; Hkkjr ljdkj
2- Vad.k dyk & vkj- lh- dqfB;kyk
3- fgUnh VkbijkbfVax izf'k{kd rFkk dk;kZy; lgk;d & MkW- th-Mh- fo"V
4- fof'k"V Vad.k xfr vH;kl & MkW th-Mh- fo"V
MONEY AND BANKING
1626405 3
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

The students should be aware with the Banking system, types of accounts; a Bank maintains types of Banks, types of
cheques, procedure for procurement of loans etc.
In modern day practices a secretary has to deal with many duties which control the market, like inflation deflation index
number etc. For a successful secretary he or she should have knowledge of money, factors affecting inflation index
number and continuing of surplus
Contents : Theory
Group – A Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Evaluation of money [ ]

Meaning of Exchange & Barter System [ ]
Advantage and disadvantage of Barter System [ ]
Introduction & evaluation of Money [ ]
Definition of Money [ ]
Nature of Money [ ]
Characteristics of Money [ ]
Function & importance of Money [ ]
Different types of Money [ ]
Importance of Money in present time [ ]
Advantage & disadvantage of money [ ]
Evaluation of good money [ ]
Meaning of Inflation [ ]
Causes of inflation and steps taken to control inflation [ ]
Meaning of deflation [ ]
Causes affects of Deflation and steps taken to control deflation [ ]
Comparatives study of Inflation & Deflation [ ]
Meaning of Index number [ ]
Types of Index number [ ]
Use & their limitation [ ]
Group – B Hrs/week Marks
Unit -2 Definition and classification of Banking [ ]
Definition of Bank [ ]
Kind of Bank [ ]
Commercial Bank [ ]
Definition of Commercial Bank [ ]
Function of Commercial Bank [ ]
Sources of banking funds [ ]
Accounts of customer and their deposits [ ]
Meaning of current accounts [ ]
Precaution to be taken while opening a current account [ ]
Joint Account [ ]
Trust Account [ ]
Different types of deposits [ ]
Loans and advances [ ]
Cash Credits [ ]
Overdrafts [ ]
Descanting of Bills [ ]
Letters of Credit [ ]
Loans on Quartets [ ]
Death or insolving of a security [ ]
Precaution to be taken by the Banks [ ]
Modes of securing Advances [ ]
Pledge [ ]
Mortgage [ ]
Advances against Collateral Security [ ]
Personal & impersonal security [ ]
Third Party Security [ ]
Stock Exchange Security [ ]
Advance against Goofs [ ]
Kinds of letter of Credit [ ]
Parties to letter of Credit [ ]
Cheques [ ]
Requisites of a Cheque [ ]
Difference between cheques and Bills of exchange [ ]
Dating of Cheques [ ]
Crossing of a cheques surcharge, general and special [ ]
Persons authorised to cross cheques [ ]
Endorsement of a cheque [ ]
Books Recommended:-
1. Money Banking & International Trade, - S. Chand Padamdeo Narayan Sharma
2. Banking Theory & System, - S. Chand K. K. Prabhakar
3. Practical Banking, - S. Chand M. Radhashran
4. Banking Law & Practices, - S. Chand T. T. Sethi

E-TYPING LAB -II (ENGLISH + HINDI)
L T P/S ESE : 70
1626406 02
— — 04 TA : 10
CT : 20

E-Typing English
Units-1 English Typing Basics.
I. Ribbon Changing. Cleaning and Oiling the typewriter.
II. Satisfy the curiosity of the student by making near the typewriter by
inserting and removing and observing the action of keys when
depressed
III. Mastery of the top row (Figures and symbols printing keys)
IV. Mastery of key Board.
Units-2 Practice of words and simple sentence. (Computer)
I. Home row keys practice.
II. Shift key+Home row keys practice
III. Upper row keys practice
IV. Shift key+Upper row keys practice
V. Simple Word Practice By Home & Upper Row Keys.
VI. Bottom-Row Keys Practice
VII. Shift Keys+ Bottom-Row Keys Practice
VIII. Simple word Practice By Al; Rows Characters
IX. Fourth Row Number & Symbol Keys
X. Shift key+Fourth Row Number and Symbol Keys
XI. Work Division Drills
Units-3 Passage and Paragraph Practice. (Computer)
Copying from exercises (Attainment: Speed rate of 20W.P.M.)
Units-4 Application and Letter Typing. (Mannual & Computer)
Units-5 Typewriting for speed exercises, building control speed tests for 5 to 10
minutes to at speed rate of 35 W.P.M. (Computer)
E-Typing Hindi
Units-1 fgUnh Vad.k dk cqfu;knh izf’k{k.kA
I. Vad.k e’khu dh tkudkjh
II. dh&cksMZ ij vH;kl
III. VkWi Vh dh&cksMZ ij iw.kZ vH;kl
Units-2 'kCn ,oa ljy okD; ij vH;kl (Computer)
Units-3 I. Home row keys dk vH;kl
II. Home row ds ljy 'kCnksa dk vH;kl
III. Shift + Home row ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
IV. Upper row ds 8 v{kjksa dk vH;kl
V. Upper row ds 12 v{kjksa dk vH;kl
VI. Shift + Upper row ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
VII. Bottom-Rows ds 8 v{kjksa dk vH;kl
VIII. Bottom-Rows ds 10 v{kjksa dk vH;kl
IX. Shift +Bottom-row ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
X. All rows ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
XI. Number Row ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
XII. Shift + Number Row ds v{kjksa dk vH;kl
Units-4 Paragraph dk vH;kl fo"k;oLrq ls lh/ksa Vad.k djus dk vH;kl ,oa dEI;wVj ij
20 'kCn izfr feuV xfr izkIr x|ka’kA dafMdk Vafdr djus dk
vH;kl djus dh ps"VkA
Units-5 vkosnu i=@dk;kZy;h i= Vafdr djus dk vH;kl VkbijkbVj
,oa dEI;wVj
ij
Units-6 Vad.k vH;kl ,oa 30 izfr 'kCn izfr feuV dh xfr] ik¡p ls nl feuV dEI;wVj ij
ds Vad.k ds mijkar izkIr djus dk vH;klA
Reccomended Books:-
1. Typing Guide-Omkar Nath Verma.
2. Proficieny in English-R. Gupta’s
3. Typewriting High Speed-Vivaan Sharma
SHORTHAND LAB - I (ENGLISH+HINDI)
1626407 2
External : 35
SHORTHAND : ENGLISH Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 Practice of consonants, use of vowels [ ]
Unit -2 Exercises from Text Book [ ]
Unit -3 Practice from exercises [ ]
(Class Work: Dictation and Reading)
(Home Work: Reading and Copying work daily throughout the year)
Unit -4 Practice from exercises, Dictation and Reading Book [ ]
Unit -5 Transcription from Shorthand into Longhand [ ]
(Attainment to develop ability to take notes in neat and accurate style at a speed of 40 to 60 W.P.M.)
SHORTHAND : HINDI
Unit -1 vk’kqfyfi dk ifjp;] mi;ksx ,oa egRoA [ ]
Unit -2 vk’kqfyfi ds o.kkZ{kjksa dh tkudkjh] O;atu dk vH;klA [ ]
Unit -3 Loj] Loj ds izdkj ,oa 'kCnksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -4 Rk oxZ dh nk;ha ck;ha js[kkvksa dk vH;kl [ ]

Unit -5 'kCn fpUgksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -6 'kCnksa esa vkadM+ks ds iz;ksx dk vH;kl [ ]
Unit -7 o`r] pki] ,oa ek=kavksa dk 'kCnksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -8 Ladsr fyfi esa okD;ksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -9 milxZ dk vH;kl [ ]
Unit -10 izR;; dk vH;kl [ ]
vH;kl
i. ikB~; eqLrd Jqfr ys[k ,oa iqLrd iBu ls vH;klA
ii. xfr dk vH;klA 60 'kCn izfr feuVA
iii. x|ka’k dk vH;klA
Recommended Book
• _f"k iz.kkyh& fgUnh ladsr fyfi& vH;kl iqfLrdk
• _f"k iz.kkyh & tufiz; fgUnh ladsr fyfi vH;kl iqfLrdk
• fiVeSu iz.kkyh & fgUnh ladsr fyfi
• ekud vk’kqfyfi & dsUnzh; fgUnh izf’k{k.k laLFkku] jktHkk"kk laLFkku] x`g ea=ky;
STENOGRAPHY LAB - I (ENGLISH+HINDI)
1626408 02
— — 04 TA : 15
CT : 35
Rationale (Stenography English):-

The performance of the personnel working in modern offices depends, to a large extent, on
the proficiency with which they can take dictation. Many of the confidential matters have to be
written in shorthand before final communication is sent to different quarters/ parties. It is necessary
that students acquire an accurate and good speed of shorthand so that they are able to perform in
the modern offices effectively. Through accessories of courses on stenography these skills can be
imparted to the students. Hence the introduction of the subject in the curriculum of Modern offices
Practice.
STENOGRAPHY : ENGLISH Hrs/week Marks
Units-1 Introduction
Units-2 Importance of shorthand
Units-3 Emphasis on phonetic system in Pitman Shorthand.

Correct sitting position, holding of pencil and note book and their quality
Units-4 Consonants
- Straight
- Curves
- Others
Units-5 Joining of uneven strokes
Units-6 Vowel signs-Vowel indication, Grammalogues, punctuation

- First place
- Second place
- Third place
Units-7 Alternative forms of ‘R’ and ‘H’ (upward and downward)
Units-8 Diphthongs
Units-9 Phraseogarphy
Total
ATTAINMENT OF SPEED:-
At the end of semester the students should be able to take down dictation at a minimum
speed of 30 words per minute.
Assignment :-
1. Practicing sitting posture including the position of note-book and holding open/pencil.
2. Practice of consonants with special attention to their formation, length, angle, size, direction,
thickness, etc. joining of strokes.
3. Repeated practice of using vowels and exercises from the text books.
BOOK PRESCRIBED
1. Pitman shorthand Instructor and Key by sir Issac Pitman.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Pitman’s shorthand-New course by Sir Issac; Pitman’s Publications, London.
2. Pitman’s shorthand Dictionary by Pitman; Pitman’s Publications, London.
3. Shorthand Quiz (Question/Answers) by G.D. Bisat; Vishishit Prakashan, C4B/66 Janakpur,
New Delhi.
4. Model speed Dictations (Subject wise Volumes by Dr. G.D.Bist; Vishishit Prakashan, C45B/66
Jankpur, New Delhi.
vk’kqfyfi (fgUnh)
vk/kqfud dk;kZy; esa dk;Zjr dfe;ksa dk izn’kZu dkQh gn rd mudh Jqfrys[k ysus dh {kerk ij fuHkZj
djrk gSA vusd xksiuh; fo"k; dks fofHkUu Lrjksa ij vafre :Ik ls izfs "kr djus ds iwoZ vk’kqfyfi esa fy[kk
tkrk gSA
fgUnh vk’kq
vk’kqfyfi dk cqfu;knh izf’k{k.kA
1- vk’kqfyfi dk ifjp;] mi;ksx ,oa egRoA
2- vk’kqfyfi ds o.kkZ{kjksa dh tkudkjh, O;atu dh ifjHkk"kk ,oa vH;klA
3- Lok, Loj ds izdkj ,oa iz;ksxA
4- Rk oxZ dh nk;ha ck;ha js[kkvksa dk iz;ksxA
5- ‘’kCn fpUgA
6- vkadM+ksa dks iz;ksxA
• r vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
• u vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
• j ,oa Y vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
7- o`r] pki] ,oa ek=kacksa dk egRo ,oa iz;ksxA
• l ,oa Lo o`r dk iz;ksx
• LFk] Lr ,oa "V pki dk iz;ksx
• Nkj] /kkj ,oa = pki dk iz;ksx
• f}/ofud ek=k,a
• f=/ofud ek=k,a
Recommended Book
1. _f"k iz.kkyh & fgUnh ladsr fyfi&vH;kl iqfLrdk
2. _f"k iz.kkyh & tufiz; fgUnh ladsr fyfi vH;kl iqfLrdk
SHORTHAND-I (ENGLISH+HINDI) -TW
1626409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01

SHORTHAND ENGLISH Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Practice of consonants, use of vowels [ ]
Unit -2 Exercises from Text Book [ ]
Unit -3 Practice from exercises [ ]
(Class Work: Dictation and Reading)
(Home Work: Reading and Copying work daily throughout the year)
Unit -4 Practice from exercises, Dictation and Reading Book [ ]
Unit -5 Transcription from Shorthand into Longhand [ ]
(Attainment to develop ability to take notes in neat and accurate style at a speed of 40 to 60 W.P.M.)
SHORTHAND HINDI
Unit -1 vk’kqfyfi dk ifjp;] mi;ksx ,oa egRoA [ ]
Unit -2 vk’kqfyfi ds o.kkZ{kjksa dh tkudkjh] O;atu dk vH;klA [ ]
Unit -3 Loj] Loj ds izdkj ,oa 'kCnksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -4 Rk oxZ dh nk;ha ck;ha js[kkvksa dk vH;kl [ ]

Unit -5 'kCn fpUgksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -6 'kCnksa esa vkadM+ks ds iz;ksx dk vH;kl [ ]
Unit -7 o`r] pki] ,oa ek=kavksa dk 'kCnksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -8 Ladsr fyfi esa okD;ksa ij vH;kl [ ]
Unit -9 milxZ dk vH;kl [ ]
Unit -10 izR;; dk vH;kl [ ]
vH;kl
iv. ikB~; eqLrd Jqfr ys[k ,oa iqLrd iBu ls vH;klA
v. xfr dk vH;klA 60 'kCn izfr feuVA
vi. x|ka’k dk vH;klA
Recommended Book
• _f"k iz.kkyh& fgUnh ladsr fyfi& vH;kl iqfLrdk
• _f"k iz.kkyh & tufiz; fgUnh ladsr fyfi vH;kl iqfLrdk
• fiVeSu iz.kkyh & fgUnh ladsr fyfi
• ekud vk’kqfyfi & dsUnzh; fgUnh izf’k{k.k laLFkku] jktHkk"kk laLFkku] x`g ea=ky;
STENOGRAPHY-I (ENGLISH+ HINDI) -TW
1626410 L T P/S TA : 15 01
— — 03 CT : 35
RATIONALE - (STENOGRAPHY : ENGLISH)

The performance of the personnel working in modern offices depends, to a large extent, on
the proficiency with which they can take dictation. Many of the confidential matters have to be
written in shorthand before final communication is sent to different quarters/ parties. It is necessary
that students acquire an accurate and good speed of shorthand so that they are able to perform in
the modern offices effectively. Through accessories of courses on stenography these skills can be
imparted to the students. Hence the introduction of the subject in the curriculum of Modern offices
Practice.
STENOGRAPHY : ENGLISH Hrs/week Marks
Units-1 Introduction
Units-2 Importance of shorthand
Units-3 Emphasis on phonetic system in Pitman Shorthand.

Correct sitting position, holding of pencil and note book and their quality
Units-4 Consonants
- Straight
- Curves
- Others
Units-5 Joining of uneven strokes
Units-6 Vowel signs-Vowel indication, Grammalogues, punctuation

- First place
- Second place
- Third place
Units-7 Alternative forms of ‘R’ and ‘H’ (upward and downward)
Units-8 Diphthongs
Units-9 Phraseogarphy
Total
ATTAINMENT OF SPEED:-
At the end of semester the students should be able to take down dictation at a minimum
speed of 30 words per minute.
Assignment
4. Practicing sitting posture including the position of note-book and holding open/pencil.
5. Practice of consonants with special attention to their formation, length, angle, size, direction,
thickness, etc. joining of strokes.
6. Repeated practice of using vowels and exercises from the text books.
BOOK PRESCRIBED
2. Pitman shorthand Instructor and Key by sir Issac Pitman.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
5. Pitman’s shorthand-New course by Sir Issac; Pitman’s Publications, London.
6. Pitman’s shorthand Dictionary by Pitman; Pitman’s Publications, London.
7. Shorthand Quiz (Question/Answers) by G.D. Bisat; Vishishit Prakashan, C4B/66 Janakpur,
New Delhi.
8. Model speed Dictations (Subject wise Volumes by Dr. G.D.Bist; Vishishit Prakashan, C45B/66
Jankpur, New Delhi.
vkSfpR; ¼vk’kqfyfi : fgUnh½

fgUnh½&
vk/kqfud dk;kZy; esa dk;Zjr dfe;ksa dk izn’kZu dkQh gn rd mudh Jqfrys[k ysus dh {kerk ij fuHkZj
djrk gSA vusd xksiuh; fo"k; dks fofHkUu Lrjksa ij vafre :Ik ls izfs "kr djus ds iwoZ vk’kqfyfi esa fy[kk
tkrk gSA
vk’kqfyfi : fgUnh
fgUnh vk’kqfyfi dk cqfu;knh izf’k{k.kA
1 vk’kqfyfi dk ifjp;] mi;ksx ,oa egRoA
2 vk’kqfyfi ds o.kkZ{kjksa dh tkudkjh, O;atu dh ifjHkk"kk ,oa vH;klA
3 Lok, Loj ds izdkj ,oa iz;ksxA
4 Rk oxZ dh nk;ha ck;ha js[kkvksa dk iz;ksxA
5‘’kCn fpUgA
6 vkadM+ksa dks iz;ksxA
• r vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
• u vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
• j ,oa Y vkadM+ksa dk iz;ksx
7 o`r] pki] ,oa ek=kacksa dk egRo ,oa iz;ksxA
• l ,oa Lo o`r dk iz;ksx
• LFk] Lr ,oa "V pki dk iz;ksx
• Nkj] /kkj ,oa = pki dk iz;ksx
• f}/ofud ek=k,a
• f=/ofud ek=k,a
Recommended Book
1 _f"k iz.kkyh & fgUnh ladsr fyfi&vH;kl iqfLrdk
2 _f"k iz.kkyh & tufiz; fgUnh ladsr fyfi vH;kl iqfLrdk
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN PRINTING TECHNOLOGY
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
1.
Letter Assembly-I 1627401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
2.
Binding & Finishing – I 1627402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
3.
Printing Process-I 1627403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
4.
Printer's Design 1627404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Reproduction &
1627405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Photography-I
Total:- 15 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6.
Printer's Process Lab-I 1627406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
7.
Printer's Design Lab. 1627407 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
8.
Letter Assembly Lab. – I 1627408 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
9.
Binding & Finishing Lab. – I 1627409 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 16 200
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
10. Reproduction & Photography
Lab-I (TW) 1627410 02 15 35 50 20 01
Total:- 02 50
LETTER ASSEMBLY – I

1627401 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

Every printed product consists of text portion and illustrations, with the former occupying mechanical portion knowledge
of text setting methods and equipment used for setting text, which is broadly termed Letter Assembly, therefore very essential.
The aim of this subject is to study letter assembly as an important part of print-production techniques, to enable the
students to make judgment about the aspect of printing, particularly in relation to the requirements of designing the printed
products.
This will cover development of typesetting methods, preparation for type setting inputs and outputs, page assembly,
proofing imposition and planning.
The aim is to further develop the student’s understanding and knowledge of letter assembly equipment, particularly in the
areas of on-line integrated system, image generation system, editing and corrections, electronic page assembly, digital storage and
outputs.

Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: [06]
01.01 Historical development of Typesetting from Gutenberg to present.
01.02 Review of various systems and their relationship with current production
Unit -2 PREPARATION FOR TYPESETTING: [09]
02.01 Typographical unit of measurement. Angle-American point system.
02.02 Units of set, measurement of length;
02.03 Preparation of copy, house style.
02.04 Proof-reading.
02.05 Casting- off and copy fitting.
Unit -3 LETTER ASSEMBLY SYSTEM: [06]

03.01 Handsetting, Mechanical typesetting, typewriter composition
03.02 Display composition by various system.
03.03 Editing, correction and page-make up in all the systems.
Unit -4 TYPESETTING ROUTINES: [06]
04.01 Different kinds of setting poetry; table, tabular, mathematical, scientific
04.02 Methodical approach for each kind of job, tools, accessories, and
precision aids, used in the letter assembly departments and their purposes.
Unit -5 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOTYPESETTING: [09]
05.01 Development from the earliest to the present.
05.02 Principles of first to present generations photo-typesetting machines, their
performance and usage.
Unit -6 TYPESETTING INPUT: [06]
06.01 Counting and non-counting keyboard, keyboard layout and ergonomics.
Unit -7 PHOTO-TYPESETTING OUTPUT: [06]
07.01 Application of various photo-typesetter, scopes, and limitation.
07.02 Processing of photo-typesetting output.
nit -8 PAGE ASSEMBLING AND PROOFING: [06]
08.01 Make-up of photo-typesetting products for book, magazine, newspaper,
and general printing.
08.02 Equipment and materials used.
08.03 Photo headline setting and transfer lettering systems for display
08.04 Proofing Techniques-matrix printer, diazo, electrostatic, diffusion
transfer, photographic.
Unit -9 IMPOSITION AND PLANNING: [06]
09.01 Page shapes, margins, and size in relation to paper size.
09.02 Rules for Imposition up to 32 pages.
09.03 Accommodation of press and Finishing requirements, sheet work and
halfsheet work, grip edge, signature and register marks.
Total 60
BINDING & FINISHING – I
1627402 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

This is a core subject-After printing is complete; the printed sheets are required to be put in a proper shape such as books, magazine, registers,
etc. For this, knowledge of various methods and techniques of binding and finishing is very essential. A diploma holder is required to
supervise the binding and finishing section in a press.

Unit -1 WAREHOUSE OPERATIONS. [08]
01.01 Printed paper warehouse and white paper warehouse, storing temperature, humidity,
materials handing, safety.
01.02 Paper buying, stocking, storage and issue.
01.03 International paper sizes, and I.S.I. paper sizes, advantages, grammes per square
metre - GSM), method of substances specification; old imperial sizes and
subdivisions of paper.
Unit -2 SECURING OPERATIONS: [08]
02.01 Use of thread, tape, cord, wire-stitching, looping, gluing, pasting, covering,
02.02 Different kinds of sewing, cord sewing and tape sewing, hand sewing and machine
sewing, two-on and all-along sewing, over casting for loose-leaf works, suitability
for different styles of binding.
02.03 End papers: single, made –end paper, reinforced, cloth-joint, leather-joint, silk-fly
leaf and leather –flyleaf. Zigzag end papers, their object.
Unit -3 FORWARDING OPERATIONS. [08]
03.01 In board and out –board forwarding, different kinds of binding and styles, publishers,
library, miscellaneous and deluxe extra leather, stationery binding- characteristics.
03.02 Gluing the back; founding and backing objects, care and precautions, reducing
swelling in the back, flat backs, back lining.
Unit -4 BINDING TECHNIQUES [08]

04.01 Adhesive binding, thermoplastic, unsewn, threadless and perfect binding.
Unit -5 PREPARATION AND ATTACHING BOARDS [08]

05.01 Dimensional variation of boards, lining, cutting to size, warping of boards,
prevention, attaching boards, lacing-in-split-board work.
Unit -6 COVERING OPERATION: [05]
06.01 Different kinds of covering materials, selecting leather as other materials, measuring
and cutting to size and shape, applying adhesive and turning it, pressing, setting the
groove or joints, settings the head, setting the band, polishing pressing and pasting
down.
Unit -7 FINISHING [05]

07.01 Decorating the cover of the book with the finishing tools, blind blocking, gold
blocking and sliding hand tools, fillets pallets, rules. Lottering, type holder, brass
type, marking for tooling and lettering, heating, testing and pressing, cleaning,
inlaying, lacing and bands open up and pressing.
07.02 Edge decoration, colouring, spraying marbling, guilding, gauffereing or tooling the
edges, head bands, handmade and machine-made head bands.
Total 50
PRINTING PROCESS – I
1627403 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

It is a core subject of printing technology, It is essential for students to learn about the basics of various printing processes.
Process photography, techniques of printing surface preparation and printing machines.
Unit -1 Printing Industry- historical background and structure. [ ]

Principles Involved and characteristics of different printing process-their suitability and [ ]
Unit -2 limitations.
Unit -3 Introduction to Relief surface and Plano graphic surface. [ ]
Unit -4 Introduction to equipments and tools used for all printing processes. [ ]
Introduction to process photography: types of process cameras-their constructions and [ ]
Unit -5 functioning-making negatives and positives.
Unit -6 Introduction to Surface Preparation (Overview only) [ ]
Total
PRINTER’S DESIGN
1627404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

Even printed product should be designed before it is send to the printers or executing the work. The pront-technician
should have a clear perspective of the design principles involved in designing a product, as the designing on the printing
process to be decided. The aim of this subject will be to introduce the study of printed products, introduction to type and
typography, design method, design organisation, visual studies, techniques of copy preparation, layouts and dummy for all
kinds of jobs.
The aim is to further examine in details to design consideration and corporate design planning applied to different
types of products, and to allow the students to apply the knowledge gained in the professional carrier.

VARIOUS KINDS OF PRINTED PRODUCTS, THEIR FORMAT, AND DESIGN
FACTORS:
01.01 Leaflets, pamphlets, booklets, catalogyes, brochures, manuals, books.
Unit -1 01.02 Magazines and Newspapers. [06]
01.03 Business forms and commercial stationary.
01.04 Labels, cartons, point-of-sale displays, etc.
01.05 Factors to be considered in print planning, such as, purpose, budget, materials etc.
DESIGN AND TYPOGRAPHIC ELEMENTS: [06]
02.01 Identification of design terms; point, line, space, shape, mass, size and scale,
colour, tone, texture, pattern, balance and contrast.
02.02 Typographic Elements.
02.03 Type fundamentals, main groups of type face designs, type series, type families.
Unit -2 02.04 Choosing type face suitable to the subject or product, relation between type face
and printing processes, type face and paper surfaces.
02.05 Legibility and readability.
02.06 Monograms, trade-marks and logotypes.
COLOUR ELEMENTS: [08]

03.01 Colour theory. Terms used to describe colour: warm and cold colours, hue,
shade, tint.
03.02 Colour wheel. Term to describe their relationships, between colours,
Unit -3 complementary colour, split-complementary colours, selection of colours for
two or three or four colours jobs. Attributes and emotional appeal of colour.
03.03 Choose and effective use of colours, colour harmony, colour contrast and colour
values.
ILLUSTRATIVE ELEMENT [05]

04.01 Types of originals for illustration and re-production: continuous tone copy, line
drawings, black and white and colour.
04.02 Requirements of art work and originals for reproduction, treatment of
photographs, photomechanical transfer materials and their use.
Unit -4
04.03 Black and white photographs, high contrast and low contrast; improving quality
of photographic pronts; masking , scaling, cropping of illustration, reduction
and enlargements; size of reproduction; care and protection; air brush and its
use.
LAYOUT PREPARATION: [08]
05.01 Materials, equipments and techniques used in the preparation of layout and art work.
05.02 Basic geometric shapes, disposition of elements and space; principles of symmetrical
and asymmetrical arrangements; distinction between geometric and optical centres.
Unit -5 05.03 Preparation of the layouts, analysis of briefs, stages and house styles.
05.04 Methods of producing different forms of layout.
05.05 Page structures, arrangement of illustration and text matter.
05.06 Dummy preparation.
TYPOGRAPHY: [06]
06.01 Methods of preparing a design in its various stages, for different classes of work book,
display, news, magazines and other kinds, typographic specifications for different
classes of work.
Unit -6 06.02 Copy preparation for different classes of work in relation to typesetting systems,
artworks preparation for different printing processes paper etc.
06.03 Materials and tools used in preparation of layouts and art work.
PLANNING FOR PRODUCTION: [05]

07.01 Selection and colour limitation of production processes, jobs selections, consideration
of available methods of composition method possibilities and limitations of Bindings
and ancillary processes as they affect design.
07.02 Technical influences and the selection and specification of ink, paper and other
Unit -7 materials in relation to job specifications and the different production processes
decided.
07.03 Casting-off copy, principles of copy-fitting, copy fitting tables.
07.04 Preparation of page: layouts for different parts of the book and preparation of dummies.
DISPLAY COMPOSITION: [06]

08.01 Principles of display, factors affecting display setting, effective use of white space.
Line shape and size of space, the type face combinations, suitability, use of initials, the
Unit -8 techniques of layouts arrangements to guide the eye-dividing an area-use of grid
preparation of dummy of different kinds of jobs.
Total 50
REPRODUCTION & PHOTOGRAPHY – I
1627405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20

Potomechanics, transfer of image and electronic image generation of the photography and their importance for a student to learn, in making
tinting
for the job and mainly deals with operation and handling of different equipments , machinery etc, used for reproduction photography.

FUNCTION OF GRAPHIC REPRODUCTION:
Functions of graphic reproduction, Definitions of graphic reproduction photography; Originals for
Unit -1 graphic reproduction classification of originals, line originals, Half Tone, Continuous tone, full [08]
colour originals, requirements of originals, scaling the originals.
OPTICAL SYSTEM [08]
Lenses. Lens aberrations, process lens, optical reversal, straight line reversal, lens aperture,
Unit -2 diaphragm, its functions depth of focus, depth of field, water house etc.
CAMERAS [08]
Different types of process cameras and accessories, e.g. horizontal, dark room, vertical, vertical
Unit -3 enlarger-types camera, roll-film cameras, Computerised Camera evaluation of modern cameras.
ILLUMINANATS [08]
Classification, requirements, colour temperature, comparative study of different illuminants,
Unit -4 carbon are lamps open and enclosed, incandescent lamps, tungsten, halogen lamps, pulsed xenon
lamps, lens flap, units of illumination, inverse square law, relative intensity exposure calculations.
EMULSIONS FOR GRAPHIC REPRODUCTION PHOTOGRAPHY [07]

Ingredients, brief description of manufacture of emulsions, types of emulsions, emulsion structure,
Requirement of emulsions, emulsion structure, Requirements of emulsion. Study of sensitometric
Unit -5 waves-characteristic and gama curves. Latent image Theory: Reciprocity failure, intermittency
effect, cavalier effect, etc.
LINE AND HALFTONE PHOTOGRAPHY: [07]

Basic Line exposure, magnification factor, line photography from black and white, and colour line
originals, evaluation of line negatives. Brief study of halftone screens, manufacture, halftone
Unit -6 theories, screen distance calculations, inverse system Various ratio system-calculations, Halftone
exposure-single and multiple exposure system, flash no-screen exposure principles of dot
formation, evaluation of halftone, negative & positives
CONTACT PROCESSING [07]
Application of Contact printing, determining the correct exposure dots, soft dots, spreads and
Unit -7 chokes for multi-colour printing inspection of negatives and positives.
PROCESSING: [07]
Developers, Ingredients and their function. Different developers, their suitability, factors affecting
Unit -8 of development, method of development, automatic processor, stop bath, fixing bath, their
functions.
Total 60
PRINTER’S PROCESS LAB – I
1627406 02
External : 35
Letter Assembly: Lay of case, use of tools and equipments, use of spacing materials, setting
Unit -1 straight matter, setting techniques, proofing. [ ]
Process Photography: Handling and operation of process camera their units and accessories, [ ]
Unit -2 making negatives and positives.
Surface Preparation: [ ]
(a) Use of equipments and accessories for plate making, graining, counter-
Unit -3 etching, preparing coating, solution, coating plate for albumen process and;
(b) Equipments and tools used for making a line block.
Total
PRINTER’S DESIGN LAB.
1627407 02
External : 35

Collection and study of all verities of printed materials. [ ]
Unit -1
Classification of types faces: Block letters, Old face Transitional, Modern and Decorative types. [ ]
Unit -2
Identification of different display faces: method. [ ]
Unit -3
Layout procedure: Interpretation of copy and layout, preparing composing room layouts rough and [ ]
Unit -4 finished layouts.
Tools of the layout man; care and handling. [ ]
Unit -5
Materials for the layout; preparation. [ ]
Unit -6
Lettering for layouts techniques. [ ]
Unit -7
Layout for simple title pages, letterheads, visiting cards envelopes, greeting cards, invitations, [ ]
Unit -8 certificates, advertisements and folders.
Designing of monograms and trademarks. [ ]
Unit -9
Study of various kinds of originals used in the printed materials. [ ]
Unit -10
Unit -11 Study of colour and mixing of colours, two-three-colour-combinations. [ ]
Unit -12 Practicing layout and dummies for various, class of work: book, display, news, magazines, and [ ]
other kinds of job work.
Unit -13 Practicing the techniques of copy preparation. [ ]
Total
LETTER ASSEMBLY LAB –I
1627408 02
External : 35

Unit -1 Typesetting Routines [ ]
Setting various kinds of work-text/ poetry, table and tabular and display work
by hand setting, mechanical composition and photo-typesetting.
Unit -2 Make up of pages [ ]
Procedure for making-up for different kinds of text pages which includes
various components, such as, headlines and folio, footnotes, let-in-notes, let-in-
notes, labels. Illustration with legends etc Make –up of preliminary and
supplementary pages of books.
Unit -3 Display Composition [ ]
Setting up of display job as per the layouts, using suitable typesetting system
for different kinds of display jobs
Unit -4 Practical work with different, proofing techniques [ ]
Unit -5 Imposition [ ]
Imposition up to 32 pages for upright and Landscape pages, half sheet and sheet
work.
Unit -6 Practicing for keyboard operation for phototypesetting. [ ]
Total
BINDING & FINISHING LAB – I
1627409 02
External : 35

Unit -1 Study of tools and machinery, their uses and care in handling. [ ]
Unit -2 Materials and supplies essential for a book binding department. [ ]
Unit -3 Folding, counting and jogging. [ ]
Unit -4 Side and saddle Odd and even number stitching. [ ]
Unit -5 Endpapers. [ ]
Unit -6 Styles of binding: Quarter-bound cut-flush (library sewing). Quarter-bound turned in (library [ ]
sewing) Quarter-bound turned in (Sawn-in Sewing)
Unit -7 Manifield book (Carbon duplicate book) [ ]
Unit -8 Tear-off pad. [ ]
Unit -9 One letter Index book, Styles of binding Quarter-bound turned-in with squares (Flexible [ ]
sewing),
Quarter-bound turned –in with squares (Two-on sewing), case binding (Overcast sewing),
Publishers binding (Library sewing).
Unit -10 Half-bound (conventional method); Calico and marble with gilding, spine preparing and spine [ ]
decorating with ink. Photo-album with colour strings.
Unit -11 Account book binding: Hall bound (Modern style) leather and calico and gilding, file making of [ ]
loose-leaf binding with screws.
Unit -12 Rebinding-Case binding. [ ]
Unit -13 Writing pad with gift cameras. [ ]
Unit -14 Practice on sewing machine, exercise on stitching machine. [ ]
Total
REPRODUCTION & PHOTOGRAPHY - I TW
1627410 L T P/S Internal : 15 01

Unit -1 Preparation of Line & Half Tone Negative. [ ]
Unit -2 Preventive maintenance of Crocess Camera. [ ]
Unit -3 Scaling of different types of originals. [ ]
Unit -4 Factor Controlling of exposure & development. [ ]
Unit -5 Basic Ingredient of Developers. [ ]
Total
IV SEMESTER DIPLOMA IN TEXTILE ENGINEERING
THEORY
No. CODE SCHEME
(A) (B) (C)
Yarn Preparation &

1. Weaving Calculation
1628401 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
2. Textile Testing 1628402 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
3. Textile Chemistry-I 1628403 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
Fabric Structure &

4. Design-I
1628404 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03
5. Man Made Fiber 1628405 03 03 10 20 70 100 28 40 03

Technology
Total:- 15 350 500
PRACTICAL
No. CODE SCHEME
6. Textile Testing Lab.-I 1628406 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
7. Textile Chemistry Lab I 1628407 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Cloth Analysis & Designing

8. Practice-I
1628408 04 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total: 12 150
TERM WORK
No. CODE SCHEME
Credits
(X) (Y)
9. Textile Testing –I (TW) 1628409 03 15 35 50 20 01
10. Textile Chemistry -I (TW) 1628410 03 15 35 50 20 02
Total:- 06 100
YARN PREPARATION & WEAVING CALCULATION
03
1628401 03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale: Yarn preparation and weaving calculation is one of the main activities for diploma holder technician in Textile
Engineering. He is required to handle the yarn preparatory machines, tools and equipments and also supervise the yarn
preparatory processes. He is also required to perform calculations regarding weaving. The subject is introduced to develop
the understanding of yarn preparatory processes and weaving Calculation. It will help in discharge of his duties in the world
of work as he can understand a problem, analyse the same and take an appropriate decision as and when the job demands.
Objectives: After Completion of the courses, student will be able to

- Define the terminologies related with yarn preparatory machines and process like winding, pirn winding, Warping,
Section Warping, Mill Warping, Sizing, Beaming and looming.
- Explain the principle and working of the machine
- Sketch the machine parts and label them and process of production and their related problem
- Calculate Heald count, Reed count, Weight of Warp and Weft, loom shed efficiency and production, etc.
Topics Periods
1 Introduction (02)
2 Winding (10)
3 Warping. (10)
4 Sizing. (10)
5 Beaming. (04)
6 Looming. (04)
7 Modern Development (02)
8 Weaving Calculation. (08)
Total : (50)
Contents : Theory
UNIT: 01 Introduction [02]
01.01 A brief consideration of the principle, purpose , requirements of preparatory process
involved in converting important natural , regenerated, synthetic and blended yarns in
to appropriate packages
UNIT: 02 winding [10]
Machine design, main working members and operating principle of non-automatic winding
2.01
machines – upright spindle winding machine, Drum winding machine.
02.02 Merits and demerits of upright spindle winding machine.
Machine design, main working members and operating principles of high speed winding
02.03
and super speed winding, automatic cone and cheese winding.
High speed winding – Schlathorost high speed cheese winding, Roto corner high speed cone
02.04
winding , Auto corner high speed cone winding, Precision cone and cheese winding, Schweiter
High speed winding machine.
02.05 Merits and demerits of high speed and super speed winding.
02.06 Automatic cone and cheese winding – Barber Coloman automatic spooler winder
02.07 Advantages and disadvantages of Barber Coloman spooler winder.
02.08 Winding process parameter , characteristics of Various winding packages
02.09 Faults and elimination of defects, waste in winding ,
02.10 Structure of various knots and splicers.
02.11 Introduction to weft yarn preparation for weaving
02.12 Ordinary pirn winding machine, merits and demerits of ordinary pirn winding machine.
02.14 Super speed pirn winding.
02.15 Automatic and fully automatic pirn winding – Schweiter Automatic pirn winding machine.
02.16 Characteristics of various packages, Technological parameter of weft winding.
Study of different types pirns, shuttles and their Characteristics, possible faults in weft yarn
02.17
winding
UNIT: 03–WARPING: [10]

03.01 Objects and requirements of Warping process.
03.02 Description and working of ordinary beam warping machine.
03.03 Main working members, their functions (Ordinary, High Speed and
Super Speed)
03.04 Limitation of ordinary beam warping machine.
03.05 Old type and Modern type of high speed warping machine.
03.06 Ruti high speed beam warping machine.
03.07 Barber Colman high speed beam warping machine.
03.08 Franz Muller high speed warping machine.
03.09 Super Speed beam warping.
03.10 Barber Colman super speed warping machine.
03.11 High Speed cone creels and super speed creels, Magazine creels.
03.12 Sectional Warping-Principle.
03.13 Description and working of Sectional warping machine.
03.14 Mill Warping-Principle.
03.15 Description and working of Mill warping machine.
03.16 Comparative study of different Warping machines.
UNIT: 04– SIZING: [10]
04.01 Sizing Process-Its objects and requirements.
04.02 Different sizing materials, their properties and functions.
04.03 Equipment for Size cooking.
04.04 Size preparation methods.
04.05 Size recipe for important natural, regenerated, synthetic yarns.
04.06 Influence of Sizing on yarn properties.
04.07 Various system of sizing-Slasher Sizing, Ball warp sizing, Hank
sizing.
04.08 Main parts and their functions of Slasher Sizing Machine.
04.09 Description and working of Multi cylinder sizing machine.
04.10 Hot air sizing machine.
04.11 Warp drying by different methods.
04.12 Measuring and monitoring of different types of controls used in
sizing machine.
04.13 Factors affecting size pick up.
04.14 Faults in sizing process.
04.15 Comparative study of different types of sizing machines and their
importance.
UNIT: 05– BEAMING: [04]
05.01 Objects of Beaming.
05.02 Different system of beaming.
05.03 Merits and demerits of different system of beaming.
UNIT: 06–LOOMING: [04]
06.01 Principles and objects of looming process.
06.02 Manual and Mechanical methods employed and their relative merits.
06.03 Study of Automatic drawing in.
06.04 Warp tying.
06.05 Study of process equipment.
UNIT: 07–MODERN DEVELOPMENTS: [02]
07.01 Review of developments in yarn preparatory machines and processing
techniques.
UNIT: 08–CALCULATIONS: [08]
08.01 Production related to Warping, ordinary beam warping machines, high speed
and super speed beam warping, sectional warping, ordinary and high speed
Slasher sizing machine.
08.02 Reed Calculations.
08.03 Problem relating to loom production and efficiency.
08.04 Calculation of warp and weft in a fabric by Indirect and Direct methods.
08.05 To find the quantity of material in a piece.
08.06 To calculate the quantity of material warp and weft required to produce a cloth.
Reference Books :
1. An Introduction to Winding and Warping, - M. K. Talukdar.
Bombay Private Circulation.
2. Wrap Sizing Mechanism, - Ramsbotton.
Colombia Press, Manchester.
3. Yarn Preparation Vol.-I & Vol-II, - R. Sen Gupta.
Mahajan Publication, Ahmedabad.
4. Sizing, - Ajgaonkar D. B.
Textile Trade Press, Bombay.
5 Weaving Calculation - R. Sen Gupta.
TEXTILE TESTING
1628402 L T P/S ESE : 70
03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale: The subject covers information about textile fibres, their structural and physical properties like length,
fineness, tensile property etc. along with experimental methods to determine them. The knowledge of these topics
are very much useful in process control and testing of textile fibres to control yarn and fabric properties.
Objectives:
• Learning the various testing methods for the measurement of the fibre properties.
• The student will be able to measure the properties and draw an appropriate conclusion.

01. Introduction (01)
02. The Selection of Samples (04)
03. Moisture Relations and Testing (10)
04. Fibre Testing (15)
05. Yarn Testing (10)
06. The Elements of Statistics (10)
Total: (50)
Contents :Theory
Name of the Topic Hrs/ week Marks
Unit -1 INTRODUCTION: 01
1.1 The objectives of testing
12 Importance of testing quality control
Unit -2 THE SELECTION OF SAMPLES FOR TESTING 04

2.1 Introduction, The Random Sample and the Biased Sample.
2.2 Methods of sampling for testing: Sampling by ISI Method and B.S.I. Method.
2.4 Determination of Fiber-Length (Silver form)
2.4.1 Squaring Technique
2.4.2 Cut Squaring Technique
2.5 Yarn Sampling Methods
2.6 Fabric Sampling Methods.
Unit -3 MOISTURE RELATIONS AND TESTING 10
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Humidity and its importance to textile materials
3.3 Moisture Regain and Moisture Content
3.4 Absolute humidity and Relative humidity
3.5 Standard atmosphere and testing atmosphere
3.6 Standard condition for testing of textile material
3.7 Determination of the humidity
3.7.1 Wet-and-dry bulb hygrometer
3.7.2 Hair hygrometer
3.8 Regain –Humidity Relations of textiles.
3.9 Factors affecting the regain of textile material : (Relative humidity, time,
temperature, previous history of sample)
3.10 Effects of regain of fibre properties
3.11 Oven dry weight and correct in voice weight.
3.12 Determination of moisture
3.12.1 Conditioning oven
3.12.2 Shirley moisture meter
3.13 Standard regain percentage of textile material (cotton, silk, wool, jute, nylon,
acetate, polyester etc).
Unit -4 FIBRE TESTING 15
4.1 Fibre grade
4.1.1 Determination of colour, trash by trash analyser
4.2 Fibre length
4.2.2 Methods of Measuring fibre length
4.2.2.1 Comb sorter
4.2.2.2 Digital Fibro graph
4.2.2.3 Uster Staple Apparatus
4.3 Fibre Fineness
4.3.1 The importance of fibre fineness and definition of fineness
4.3.2 Methods of measuring fineness
4.3.2.1 Gravimetric Method
4.3.2.2 Optical Method
4.3.2.3 Air- flow Method- W.I.R.A Fineness Meter.
4.4 Fibre maturity
4.4.1 Introduction and importance of maturity
4.4.2 Maturity ratio, Maturity count
4.4.3 Determination of maturity
4.4.3.1 Alkaline Swelling Method
4.4.3.2 Polarized light method
4.4.3.3 Differential dyeing method
4.5 Fibre strength
4.5.1 Terminology and Definitions: Load, Breaking load, Stress, Tenacity or specific
strength, Breaking length, Strain, Extension, Breaking extension, The load-
elongation curve, The stress-strain curve, The initial Young’s modulus, Yield
point, Work of rupture, Work factor, Elastic recovery, Time and elastic
properties.
4.5.2 Factors influencing strength test results.
4.5.3 Principle of CRL, CRE, CRT, type tensile testing machine
4.5.4 Methods of measuring the strength of fibres
4.5.5 Single fibre strength testing
4.5.6 Bundle (group) fibre strength testing
4.5.7 Pressley Strength tester
4.5.8 Stelometer.
Unit -5 YARN TESTING 10
5.1 Yarn Counts: Definition, Concept of different yarn numbering system – Direct
Indirect and universal system with examples. Conversion from one system to another
system in indirect system and direct system. Conversion from indirect system to
direct system and vice – versa. Folded yarns and resultant counts, Averages counts.
5.2 Measurement of Length of yarn: Method of Length measuring by Hand wrap reel
and Motorized warp reel.
5.4 Yarn in short length (or piece of cloth)
5.5 Instruments used for count determination: Analytical Balance, Knowles Balance,
Quadrant Balance, Beesley’s Balance, etc.
Unit -6 THE ELEMENTS OF STATISTICS 10

6.1 Definition
6.2 Importance in testing
6.3 Average and other methods of location: Arithmetic Mean, Median and Mode. The
relationship between methods of location.
6.4 The Measurement of Dispersion or scatter-Range, mean range, percentage mean
range, inter-quartile range, mean deviation, percentage mean deviation, standard
deviation, co-efficient of variation, variation, variance and standard deviation.
6.5 Probability
6.6 Problems.
Total 50
Books Recommended:
01. Principle of Textile Testing - J.E. Booth
02. Hand Books of Methods of Testing - C.T.R.L.
03. Hand Books of Textile Testing & Quality Control - Grover
04. ISI Hand Books of Textile Testing - I.S.I.
05 Textile Testing - Skinkle
06. Textile Testing - Angappan
07. Textile Testing and Analysis - Vaishnav. Joshi

TEXTILE CHEMISTRY-I
1628403 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rational:-
Textile chemistry is one of the main activities for a diploma holder technician in textile Engineering. He is required to apply
different types of dyes on different types of textile fibre, printing and wet processing. He must be well versed with the subject of textile
chemistry.
Objective
After completion of the course student will be able to -
- Define the terminologies related with textile chemistry
- Explain the principle and working of the dyeing and printing processes
- Methods of application of dyes.
- Understand wet processing like singeing, Desizings, Scouring, Bleaching. Mercerization and their related problem.
Contents : Theory
Name of the Topic Hrs/ week Marks
Unit -1 Singeing 03
01.01 Objects of Singeing
01.02 Methods of singeing by various singeing machines - Plate singeing, Roller singeing, Gas
singeing.
01.03 Merits and demerits of these above singeing machines
Unit -2 Desizing 05
02.01 Objects of Desizing
02.02 Methods of desizing - Hydrolytic and oxidative
02.02.01 Description and working of Hydrolytic desizing method - Rot steep, Acid steep, Enzymatic
desizing, continuous desizing method.
02.02.02 Description and working of oxidative desizing method - chlorine desizing, chlorite
desizing, Bromite desizing, Continuous desizing.
Unit -3 Scouring 05
03.01 Objects of Scouring
03.02 Scouring operation - Saphonification, Emulsification Detergent action, Prolonged boiling
03.03 Machines used for batch wise and continuous Scouring - Jigger and Winch machine
03.04 Kier – old type kier, vertical kier, Horizontal kier
03.05 Comparison of horizontal and vertical kier
03.06 Steam injector kier
03.07 Scouring and bleaching agents for cotton, wool silk.
Unit -4 Bleaching 06
04.01 Objects of bleaching
04.02 Bleaching of cotton
04.03 Bleaching process- Bleaching powder, Sodium hypochlorite, Hydrogen peroxide, sodium
chlorite.
04.04 Advantages and disadvantages of above processes
04.05 Bleaching of Wool
04.06 Wool Carbonisation
04.07 Bleaching of silk – sodium peroxides method,H2O2 method
04.08 Optical whitening agents.
04.09 Application of Hydrogen peroxides- one or two bath method , mixed bleaching ,
continuous method, Du pont process
04.10 Machines used for continuous bleaching
04.11 Developments in bleaching
04.12 Souring, Antichlorination
04.13 Different types of bleaching agents and optimum conditions for various operators.
04.14 Methods used for determination of degradation of cotton during scouring and bleaching
04.15 Faults in bleaching and their prevention
Unit -5 Mercerization 06
05.01 History and developments of mercerization
05.02 Factors determining the efficiency of mercerization
05.03 Physical and chemical changes in cotton due to mercerization
05.04 Methods and machines used for mercerization chain cloth mercerizing machines, chainless
cloth mercerizing machine , chainless padless mercerizing machine
05.05 Hank Mercerization and Hot mercerization
05.06 Evaluation of different chemicals, solvents used in wet processing and their importance.
Unit -6 Dyeing 13
06.01 Historical developments of dyes and their applications
06.02 Classification of dyes to mode of application
06.03 Theory of dyeing
06.04 Introduction to physical and chemical principles involved in dyeing
06.05 Factors affecting dyeing
06.06 Properties, selection and application of various dyes like – Direct, Basic, Acid, Sulphur dyes
used on cotton, wool silk.
06.07 Various after treatment given to sulphur dyed goods
Unit -7 Printing 12
07.01 Historical developments of decorating textiles especially by printing, the scope of printed
textiles.
07.02 The printing process on overview
07.03 Difference between dyeing and printing
07.04 Methods of printing-
07.04.01 Block printing - Preparation and use of blocks
07.04.02 Screen printing - Principle and working of screen printing
07.04.03 Roller printing- Principle and working of Roller printing
07.05 Vertical Duplex screen printing
07.06 Rotary Screen printing
07.07 Transfer printing and foam printing
Total- 50
1. A glimpse on chemical Technology of textile fibres

- R.R Chakraworty
2. Chemical technology of fibrous materials
_ Sadov MIR Publications.
3. Textile chemistry Vol I and II
- R.H. peters, Elsewhere Publishing Co, New York.
4. Dyeing and chemical Technology of Textile fibres
- ER Trotman
5. Scouring and bleaching of Cotton
- J.T.Marsh, B.I Publications
6. Mercerization
- J.T. marsh, B I Publications.
7. Technology of textile processing Vol III
- V.A. Shenai, Sevak Publications
8. Textile chemistry vol I, II and III R.H peters Elsewhere publishing Co, New York
-
9. Modern Techniques of textile Bleaching, Dyeing and
- SITRA Pub.
finishing
10. Textile printing
- Miller , L.W.C. Butter worths Publications
11. Printing Textiles A guide to creative design Fundamentals terry and
genteelly
FABRIC STRUCTURE AND DESIGN-I
1628404 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale: Study of fabric manufacture i.e. weaving is incomplete without the knowledge of fabric structure. This subject is
aimed at educating student about more elaborate weaves like Plain, Twill, Satin, Honeycomb, Bedford Cord, Pique which are
used in furnishing. Also this subject deals with concept of colour and weaves effect, which is very important in Textile
Designing.
Contents :Theory
Name of the Topic Hrs/ week Mark
s
Unit -1 ELEMENTS OF WOVEN DESIGN: 06
01.01 General Principle of fabric structure and design
01.02 Classification of woven fabrics
01.03 Methods of fabric representation
01.04 Use of the design
01.05 Repeat of the design
01.06 Basic elements of a woven design: design, draft or Drawing-in, lifting or peg
plan, Denting Plan.
01.07 Systems of drafting
01.08 Construction of drafts and lifting plans
01.08.01 Methods of indicating drafts and lifting plans
01.08.02 Relations between design, draft, and lifting plan.
01.08.03 Construction of drafts and lifting plan from given designs.
01.08.04 Construction of drafts from given designs and lifting plans.
01.08.05 Construction of designs from given drafts and lifting plans.
Unit -2 CONSTRUCTION OF ELEMENTARY WEAVES: 04

02.01 Study of plain weaves
02.02 Classification of plain weave
02.03 Simple twill weaves and its construction
02.04 Sateen and satin weaves
02.04.01 Regular sateens and satins
02.04.02 Irregular sateens and satins
Unit -3 DEVELOPMENT OF WEAVES FROM ELEMENTARY BASES: 12

03.01 Plain weave derivatives
03.01.01 Warp rib weaves
03.01.02 Weft rib weaves
03.01.03 Hopsack, mat or basket weaves
03.01.04 Mock rib effects
03.02 Weaves constructed on Twill Bases
03.02.01 Waved twills or Pointed or Zig-zag twills
03.02.02 Herringbone twills
03.02.03 Broken twills
03.02.04 Elongated twills
03.02.05 Combined twills
03.02.06 Fancy twills.
03.03 The Angle of Twills, Factors determining the prominence of
twill weaves, comparison of the firmness of twills.
03.04 Weaves constructed on satin of sateen bases
Unit -4 DIAMOND AND DIAPER DESIGNS: 04

04.01 Introduction.
04.02 Construction of diamond designs
04.02 Construction of diaper designs
04.03 Comparison between diamond and diaper designs.
Unit -5 SIMPLE FANCY WEAVES: 14
05.01 Principles of designing honey comb weave
05.02 Types of honey comb weaves
05.02.01 Ordinary honey comb weaves
05.02.02 Brighton honey comb weaves
05.03 Huckaback weaves
05.04 Mock Leno Weaves
05.05 Crepe weaves
05.06 Bedford cords
05.06.01 Wadded bedford cords
05.06.02 Crepon bedford cords
05.06.03 Bedford cords, arranged with alternate picks
05.06.04 Twill- faced Bedford cords
05.07 Welts and piques
05.11 Stripe and check weave combinations
Unit -6 YARN DIAMETERS AND COVERFACTOR: 05
06.01 Diameter of yarn and their calculations regarding their in fabric
06.02 Classification of Plain Cloths; Square Plain Cloths.
06.02 Brief idea of structure of cover factor of simple fabrics
06.03 Quality particulars of different fabrics of the above weave.
Unit -7 COLOUR AND ITS APPLICATION: 06

07.01 Light and colour phenomena
07.01.01 Physical baiss of colour
07.01.02 Emission and absorption of light
07.02 Theories of Colour: Light theory and Pigment theory.
07.02.01 Light theory of colour: Complementary colour, The Chromatic Circle, Colour
measurement.
07.02.02 Pigment theory of colour
07.02.03 Visual effects or attributes of various colours.
07.03 Modification of colours
07.04 Colours in combination: Colour contrast, Contrast of hue, Contrast of tone,
Colour harmony.
07.05 Colour Mixing: The rainbow, additive colour mixing, subtractive colour
mixing.
07.06 Appication of colour: Mixed colour effects, fibre mixtures, twist yarn
mixtures, combinations of differenty coloured threads, colour stripes and
checks, simple regular patterns, simple irregualr patterns, compound orders
of colouring, etc. 50
Total
Books Recommended:-
01. Watson’s Textile Design and Colour - Z. Grosicki
02. Cloth Construction - Robinson and Marks
03. Grammer of Textile Desing - Nisbet
04. Structure Fabric Deign - Kilbbe
05. Textile Colour Mixing - Paterson

MAN MADE FIBRE TECHNOLOGY
L T P/S ESE : 70
1628405 03
03 — — TA : 10
CT : 20
Rationale :
Fabric made of man made Fibres are much in demand because of its durability and easy
maintenance. The production, therefore, of the man made fibres has increased keeping the pace with
market demand. This course deals with the study of various concepts and technologies used in manmade
fibre manufacturing process.
Objective:
Students will be able to understand :-
♦ Process of manufacture of Viscose Rayon, Cellulose Acetate, Polynosic rayon, Polyamide fibres,
Polyesters, Polyvinyl Chloride, Orlon, Acrilian, Polypropyline.
♦ Their chemical behaviour, the properties of the fibres and their uses.
♦ The application of the process, properties, chemical behaviour in actual manufacturing of the
man made fibres.
01 Man Made fibre Spinning. (04)
02 Fibre made from natural polymer. (16)
03 Synthetic fibres. (23)
04 Conversion and developments. (07)
Total : (50)
Contents : Theory
Unit-1 MAN MADE FIBRE SPINNING: 04

01.01 Viscosity of melts and solution.
01.02 General principles of spinning- Melt Spinning, Dry Spinning,
Wet Processing.
Unit-2 FIBRE MADE FROM NATURAL POLYMER: 16
02.01 Introduction of various manmade fibre based on natural
polymers.
02.02 Manufacture of various man-made fibre based on natural
polymers like viscose, cellulose, Acetate, Cupramonium rayon.
02.03 Physical and chemical properties of above fibres.
02.04 Uses of above fibres.
02.05
Need for drawing, factors influencing diability influence of
drawing on structure.
Unit-3 SYNTHETIC FIBRES: 23
03.01 Introduction of various synthetic fibres.

03.02 Manufacture of various synthetic fibres like Polyamide (Nylon
6,Nylon 66), Polyester (Polyethylene terephthalate),
Polyloefine(Polyethylene, Poly prophylene, Polyacrylontrile).
03.03 Need for drawing, factors influencing diability, influence of
drawing on structure.
03.04 Physical and chemical properties of above fibres.
03.05 Uses of above fibres.
Unit-4 CONVERSION AND DEVELOPMENTS: 07
04.01 Detailed study of low to top conversion-cut method, stretch
breaking method, perlock method.
04.02 Need for Spin finish application in fibre processing.
04.03 Spin finish composition and spin finish application method.
04.04 Elastomeric fibres of spandex type, Chloro fibres, Bi-
Component fibres.
Total 50
Reference Books :
1. Man Made Fibre, Wirley & Sons. - Moncriff.
2. Textile Yarns. - B. C. Goswami.
3. Man Made Fibres, Mir publication. - Usenko.
TEXTILE TESTING LAB.-I
02
1628406 — — 04 Internal : 15
External : 35
S. No. Units Periods

01. Sampling (06)
03. Moisture Relation Testing (06)
04. Identification and Estimation of Fibres in Textile Materials (15)
Total (60)
List of Experiment :- Hrs/ week Marks
Unit -1 SAMPLING 06
01.01 Sampling of raw cotton by ISI Method and estimate ginning percentage
and lint index.
01.02 Sampling of cotton by B.S.I. method and estimate ginning percentage and
lint index.

02.01 Fibre length
02.01.01 Determination of fibre length by Halo and Butterfly Method.
02.01.02 Determination of fibre length by Baer Sorter Method.
02.01.03 Determination of fibre length by Balls Sorter Method.
02.01.04 Determination of fibre length parameters using Uster Stapler.
02.02 Fibre Fineness
02.02.01 Determination of fibre fineness by Gravimetric method.
02.02.02 Determination of fibre fineness by Air-flow method. (WIRA Fineness
Meter)
02.03 Fibre Maturity
02.03.01 Determination of percentage maturity of cotton by polarized light
(Microscope) Method.
02.03.02 Determination of Maturity Co –efficient by Alkaline method.
02.04 Fibre Strength.
02.04.01 Determination of single fibre strength by the instruments available in
laboratory.
02.04.02 Determination of Bundle fibre strength by Stelometer.
Unit -3 MOISTURE RELATIONS TESTING 06

03.01 Determination of moisture regains moisture content and legal weights by
using conditioning oven.
Unit -4 IDENTIFICATION AND ESTIMATION OF FIBRES IN TEXTILE 15
MATERIALS
04.01 Identification of textile fibres.
04.01.01 Identification of fibres by longitudinal view using optical microscope also
determine the mean width o fibres.
04.01.02 Identification of fibres by cross-sectional view using microscope.
04.01.03 Identification of Textile material by chemical analysis and
also burning test of fibres.
04.01.04 Quantitative Analysis and Estimation of Mixture of fibres in textile
materials.

05.01 Determination of Yarn Count by:
05.01.01 Beesley’s Balance
05.01.02 Quadrant Balance
05.01.03 Torsion Balance & Analytical Balance Total 60
TEXTILE CHEMISTRY LAB. – I
1628407 02
External : 35
Rational:-
Diploma holder technician in Textile Engineering is very frequently required to dye the fabric, Scouring and bleaching of fabrics and
printing of fabrics.
The Course is introduced to develop the skill to dye the cellulosic material with Direct, Acid, Basic, sulphur, scouring and bleaching of
cotton, silk, wool, Printing of natural fibre for letter understanding of the subject.
Objectives:-
The students will be able to develop skill for -
- Scouring and Bleaching of cotton, silk, wool
- Dyeing of cotton with Direct dyes.
- Dyeing of Cotton, wool, silk, with basic dyes
- Dyeing of wool, silk, with Acid dyes
- Dyeing of Cotton with sulphur dyes
- Printing of fabric
List of Experiment :- Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Scouring 06
01.01 Experimental Scouring of cotton, Wool, silk and other important textile fibres, yarns
and fabrics.
01.02 Experimental Bleaching of cotton, Wool, silk and other important textile fibres, yarns
and fabrics.
Unit -3 Dyeing 33
03.01 Familiarzing and sketching of various tools and machines used in wet processing.
03.02 Evaluation of inorganic and other substances used in textile processing like soda ash,
bleaching powder, hydrogen peroxides, sodium sulphate, hydrosulphate,
03.03 Dying of three shades with direct dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.04 Dying of three shades with basic dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 1%, 1.3%, 1.5 %,)
03.05 Dying of three shade with basic dyes on silk, wool,
(0.5%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 1.8 %,)
03.06 Dying of three shade with acid dyes on wool, silk
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.07 Dying of three shade with sulphur dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.08 After treatment given to direct colour and sulphur colour dyed goods.
03.09 To study the effect of fine, temperature, concert ration of chemicals during dyeing .
Unit -4 Printing 15
04.01 Practice of block printing on paper and fabrics (cotton, silk)
04.02 Preparation of designs for printing systems.
04.03 Printing paste preparation
04.04 Study the Roller printing machines and practice of them on fabric (cotton, silk)
04.05 Study the screen printing constituents - screen table, screen, exposing unit, washing
tray.
Total- 60
CLOTH ANALYSIS & DESIGNING PRACTICE-I
1628408 02
External : 35
Rational:-
Diploma holder technician in Textile Engineering is very frequently require to analyses the sample for the purpose of
reproduction.
The course is introduced to develop the skill to analyse the sample, representation of weave in point paper and its design and
peg plan, preparation of colour chart, preparation of common design and free hand sketching for better understanding of the subject.
Objectives:-
Able to develop skill to
- Analyse the test sample
- Representation of weave in point paper and find out draft, denting and its lifting plan for weaving.
- Preparation of colour chart, common and saree border design
- Free hand sketching.
List of Experiments:- Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Cloth Analysis 45
01.01 Discussion on the method of analysis, representation of weave on point
paper, thread interacting diagrams, cross section diagrams, drawing – in,
drafts and peg plans.
01.02 Discussion on the Analysis and fabric manufacturing data. Study of the
method of analysis.
01.03 Studying the characteristics of various plain weave fabrics. Dissecting
and finding various data of the given plain weave fabrics.
01.04 Analysis of matt weave fabrics for their characteristics and various data
01.05 Analysis of twill weave fabrics for their characteristics.
01.06 Analysis of Honey comb and Brighton Honey comb weaves fabrics for
their characteristics.
01.07 Analysis of Mockleno and Huckaback weave fabrics
01.08 Analysis of crepe like effect fabrics
01.09 Analysis of woven crepe effect fabrics.
01.10 Analysis of combination of weaves fabrics.
01.11 Analysis of Decorative natural silk fabrics.
01.12 Analysis of Decorative Artificial silk weave fabrics
01.13 Analysis of Decorative polyester fabrics.
01.14 Analysis of satin and sateen weave fabrics.
01.15 Analysis of Bed ford cord fabrics.
01.16 Analysis of Pique fabrics.
Unit -2 Design and color 15

02.01 Preparation of colour charts showing primary, secondary, and tertiary
colour
02.02 Preparation of mixed colour effect
02.03 Practice of colour harmony and contrast
02.04 Preparation of small border design
02.05 Free hand sketching
02.06 Preparation of design for jacquard
Total- 60
TEXTILE TESTING I -TW
1628409 L T P/S Internal : 15 01
S.No. Units Periods
01. Sampling (06)
03. Moisture Relation Testing (06)
04. Identification and Estimation of Fibres in Textile Materials (15)
Total (60)
List of Term Work:- Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 SAMPLING 06
01.01 Sampling of raw cotton by ISI Method and estimate ginning
percentage and lint index.
01.02 Sampling of cotton by B.S.I. method and estimate ginning
percentage and lint index.
02.01 Fibre length
02.01.01 Determination of fibre length by Halo and Butterfly Method.
02.01.02 Determination of fibre length by Baer Sorter Method.
02.01.03 Determination of fibre length by Balls Sorter Method.
02.01.04 Determination of fibre length parameters using Uster Stapler.
02.02 Fibre Fineness
02.02.01 Determination of fibre fineness by Gravimetric method.
02.02.02 Determination of fibre fineness by Air-flow method. (WIRA Fineness
Meter)
02.03 Fibre Maturity
02.03.01 Determination of percentage maturity of cotton by polarized light
(Microscope) Method.
02.03.02 Determination of Maturity Co –efficient by Alkaline method.
02.04 Fibre Strength.
02.04.01 Determination of single fibre strength by the instruments available in
laboratory.
02.04.02 Determination of Bundle fibre strength by Stelometer.
Unit -3 MOISTURE RELATIONS TESTING 06
03.01 Determination of moisture regains moisture content and legal weights by
using conditioning oven.
Unit -4 IDENTIFICATION AND ESTIMATION OF FIBRES IN TEXTILE 15
MATERIALS
04.01 Identification of textile fibres.
04.01.01 Identification of fibres by longitudinal view using optical
microscope also determine the mean width o fibres.
04.01.02 Identification of fibres by cross-sectional view using
microscope.
04.01.03 Identification of Textile material by chemical analysis and
also burning test of fibres.
04.01.04 Quantitative Analysis and Estimation of Mixture of fibres in textile
materials.
05.01 Determination of Yarn Count by:
05.01.01 Beesley’s Balance
05.01.02 Quadrant Balance
05.01.03 Torsion Balance & Analytical Balance
Total 60
TEXTILE CHEMISTRY I -TW
Rational:-
Diploma holder technician in Textile Engineering is very frequently required to dye the fabric, Scouring and bleaching of fabrics and
printing of fabrics.
The Course is introduced to develop the skill to dye the cellulosic material with Direct, Acid, Basic, sulphur, scouring and bleaching of
cotton, silk, wool, Printing of natural fibre for letter understanding of the subject.
Objectives:-
The students will be able to develop skill for -
- Scouring and Bleaching of cotton, silk, wool
- Dyeing of cotton with Direct dyes.
- Dyeing of Cotton, wool, silk, with basic dyes
- Dyeing of wool, silk, with Acid dyes
- Dyeing of Cotton with sulphur dyes
- Printing of fabric

List of Term Work:- Hrs/week Marks
Unit -1 Scouring 06
01.03 Experimental Scouring of cotton, Wool, silk and other important textile fibres,
yarns and fabrics.
01.04 Experimental Bleaching of cotton, Wool, silk and other important textile fibres,
yarns and fabrics.
Unit -3 Dyeing 33
03.08 Familiarzing and sketching of various tools and machines used in wet
processing.
03.09 Evaluation of inorganic and other substances used in textile processing like soda
ash, bleaching powder, hydrogen peroxides, sodium sulphate, hydrosulphate,
03.10 Dying of three shades with direct dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.11 Dying of three shades with basic dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 1%, 1.3%, 1.5 %,)
03.12 Dying of three shade with basic dyes on silk, wool,
(0.5%, 1.2%, 1.5%, 1.8 %,)
03.13 Dying of three shade with acid dyes on wool, silk
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.14 Dying of three shade with sulphur dyes on cotton
(0.5%, 0.8%, 1.2%, 1.5 %,)
03.08 After treatment given to direct colour and sulphur colour dyed goods.
03.09 To study the effect of fine, temperature, concert ration of chemicals during
dyeing .
Unit -4 Printing 15
04.06 Practice of block printing on paper and fabrics (cotton, silk)
04.07 Preparation of designs for printing systems.
04.08 Printing paste preparation
04.09 Study the Roller printing machines and practice of them on fabric (cotton, silk)
04.10 Study the screen printing constituents - screen table, screen, exposing unit,
washing tray.
Total- 60

SEM 4 2016 17 Complete PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEM 4 2016 17 Complete PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEM 4 2016 17 Complete PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, BIHAR

Scheme of Teaching and Examinations for

1. Soil Science & Soil

3. Hydraulics & Fluid

9. Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics

10. Soil Science & Soil Mechanics

Theory No of Period in one session : 42 Credits

Contents : Theory Hrs/week Marks

Unit -9 ATTERBURG’S LIMITS: [02] [04]

Unit -13 BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL: [02] [04]

Contents : Theory Hrs/week Marks

6. Open Channel Flow - V.T. Chaw Mc Graw Hill Co.

Unit -5 VALVE SYSTEM AND VALVE TIMING: [03] [06]

Unit -6 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM: [03] [07]

Unit -11 GOVERNING SYSTEM: [03] [04]

Unit -12 MOBILE ENGINE AND TRACTORS: [03] [06]

Unit -13 POWER TILLER AND ITS COMPONENTS: [03] [04]

Contents : Theory Hrs/week Marks

4 Estimates & Cost - C.K. Singh & M.I. Khanna

At least Eight experiments to be done from the following list of experiments:

Contents : Practical Hrs/week Marks

Unit -7 - Study of lubricating system. [ 04 ]

Contents : Practical Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 - Turning, Knurling, Facing, Drilling, Threading, Tapping, Boring on a job on [ 08 ]

Unit -2 - Step turning on lathe. [ 04 ]

S.N. Book’s Name Writte’s Name Publisher’s Name

1 Machine Drawing - N.D. Bhatt

2 Machine Drawing - Parkinson

3 Machine Drawing - R.B. Gupta

4 Machine Drawing - Mittal & Agarwal

5 A Text Book of Engineering Drawing - R.K. Dhawan

6 Practical Agricultural Engineering - R.K. Ghosh and S. Swain

Contents : Term Work Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 - Study of piezometer and pressure gauges used in hydraulics. [ 03 ]

S. Ramanrutham Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New Delhi

6 Open Channel Flow - V.T. Chaw Mc Graw Hill Co.

At least Seven sessional units must be carried out by the students.

Unit -1 - Study about soil classification. [ 02 ]

Sr. SUBJECTS SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION – SCHEME

Sr. SUBJECTS SUBJECT TEACHING EXAMINATION – SCHEME

Name of the Topic Hrs/week Marks

Unit -1 Ecology and Environment 10 14

Unit -5 Air conditioning 06 09

Subject Code Theory No of Period in one session : 50 Credits

Name of the Topic Hrs/week Marks

Unit -2 Principles of Interior Designing 05 07

Unit -3 Principle of lines, wall composition guidelines. 03 05

a) Drawing Room, Family Room 05 07

Unit -1 Brick bond (English & Flemish) - 2 Sheet 02 13

Unit -2 Wall Junction (T& Cross Junction) - 2 Sheet 02 13

Unit -3 Stone Masonry - 1 Sheet. 01 06

Unit -4 Door/ Window - 1 Sheet. 01 06

Unit -5 Floor - 1 Sheet. 01 06

Unit -6 DPC (Exp joint/ Water proofing) - 1 Sheet 01 06

Materials Supplied : Thermocol, Mount Board, Adhessives, Hard board

Contents: Term Work

List of Term Work :- (2 Model Block )-

Term Work No of Period in one session : 60 Credits

Contents: Term Work ( 5 Sheets )